JEE MODULE 3 PHY Waves and Mechanical Properties of Solids and Fluids

2
Published by
Vedantu Innovations Private Limited
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
Vedantu Innovations Private Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by
any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the
publishers.
Notice : Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best of the resources and
knowledge. Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book
from sources regarded as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this
book. However, we as authors and publishers are not to be held responsible for
unintentional mistakes that might have crept in. Having stated that, errors (if any)
brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged and rectified in upcoming
editions.
Printed by
Colours Imprint
475C, Adugodi Main Road,
8th Block, Koramangala, Bengaluru 560 095
www.coloursimprint.com
3
4
Founder’s Message
Dear Student,
It gives me immense pleasure to present to you a Ready Reckoner and Practice booklet by
Vedantu - ‘TATVA’. Tatva in Sanskrit, means a collection of “Core” content/truth and isn’t that
what Vedantu brings to your table - the Core? Vedantu, at all times, ensures that you have
easy accessibility to a collection of all essential concepts, theory, derivations, definitions, solved
examples, concept videos, and practice questions, important questions from competitive
examinations and pleased to say that all questions come with detailed solutions.
Tatva is the result of the constant endeavour and research done by our highly experienced
team of teachers and subject experts to compile relevant content for you to succeed in IIT JEE/
NEET and Olympiads. We strongly believe and vouch for the effectiveness and relevance of
this booklet to grab the desired rank in IIT JEE/ NEET.
Key Points on ‘How to obtain optimal benefits from ‘Tatva’ ?

 We suggest starting with the Practice of ‘Tatva questions’ at the end of a chapter
after revision and Practice of basic questions.
 For daily practice of questions attempt we strongly recommend session assignments
along with Vedantu live sessions
 Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you
revise concepts, mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary and eventually
clear all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
 Attempt Tatva questions post revision of 11th and 12th Grade topics. Take one topic at
a time to solve. Attempt any revision test series for NEET/JEE once you have resolved
Tatva questions. Following this will not only help you during revision but also give a
major boost to your confidence.
 First solve basic level questions and gradually progress to the advanced level.
 Practice basic level questions regularly all through your journey of preparation.
 Your success is our dream-come-true
I wish you all the best.
Anand Prakash
Founder, Academic Head
Vedantu
Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing

Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
5
Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Theodore Roosevelt
Tatva is the brainchild of the creative Vedans who The managers who understood every aspect of what
strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you. Our the leadership were trying to accomplish and brought
heartfelt thanks to the Super Vedans who give wings so much of their own to the table and managed the
to the vision of Vedantu. execution of ‘Tatva’ immaculately.
Our leaders who have been our guiding light and Kiran Kumari Harish Rao
encouragement in every step: Bhavya Bangera Shraddha
Vamsi Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Sir Sushmitha Akshatha
Charubak Chakrabarti
Our gratitude to the insightful leadership and
guidance of our leaders who dreamt about ‘Tatva’, Our heartfelt gratitude to ourcreative content
steered the project in the right direction and were developers, the dedicated master teachers and the
instrumental in making this dream into a reality: DTP team who have put in their hard work, insights,
eagerness to execute and nurtured Tatva into ‘your
Sahil Bhatia Shubam Gupta ready handbook’ and to bring positive learning
Arshad Shahid Ajay Mittal experience to you.
JaideepSontakke Sudhanshu Jain
Physics Team
Teachers SME DTP

Aarzoo Walia Satyam Kumar Atul Singh (Team Lead) Jitender Singh
Ishani Mitra Santosh Kumar Nanda Pukhraj Singh Yamala Santhosh Kumar
Shubham Ghar Anmol Gupta Saurabh Sharma
Anand M Rohit Thakur
Vijayalakshmi Viswanathan
Pritesh Ranjan
Ravneet Wadhwa
A loud shout out for our media team - a bunch of creative minds with contagious energy. We cannot thank
them enough.
Suraj Bhan Singh

Gadde Ranjith
Ranjeeth Ramesh
Sreyoshi Biswas
Devika Ramachandran
Special thanks and appreciation for the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal,
Dipshi Shetty, Mohamed Anzar and Anuska Singh.
The journey of the imagination to the reality of ‘Tatva’ would not have been possible without our enthusiastic
Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated team of Teachers and our talented Tech
Team.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLUID MECHANICS
Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 8
Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 14
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 22
Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 32
Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 37
Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 48
Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 157
ELASTICITY
Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 55
Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 59
Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 159

OSCILLATION & WAVES
Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 78
Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 90
Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 161

01
FLUID MECHANICS
Chapter 01 9
FLUID MECHANICS THEORY
1. FLUID MECHANICS
 The liquids and gases together are termed as fluids, in
other words, we can say that the substances which can
flow are termed as fluids. p1 – p2 = la
 We assume fluid to be incompressible (i.e., the density of and tan  = a/g, where  is the angle which the liquid’s free
liquid is independent of variation in pressure and remains surface is making with horizontal.
constant) and non-viscous (i.e. the two liquid surfaces in (d) Pressure at two points within a liquid at vertical separation
contact are not exerting any tangential force on each other). of h when the liquid container is accelerating up are related
by expression
1.1 Fluid Statics
1.1.1 Fluid Pressure
Pressure p at any point is defined as the normal force per

unit area.
dF p2 – p1 =  (g + a) h
p
dA
If container is accelerating down, then p2 – p1 = (g – a) h.
2 1.1.2 Atmospheric Pressure

The SI unit of pressure is the Pascal and 1 Pascal = 1 N/m
 Fluid force acts perpendicular to any surface in the fluid,  It is the pressure exested by earth’s atmosphere. Normal
no matter how that surface is oriented. Hence pressure, atmospheric pressure at sea level (an average value) is 1
5
has no intrinsic direction of its own, it is a scalar. atmosphere (atm) that is equal to 1.013 × 10 Pa.
Variation of Pressure  The excess pressure above atmospheric pressure is called
(a) Pressure at two points in a horizontal plane or at same gauge pressure, and total pressure is called absolute pressure.
level when the fluid is at rest or moving with constant  Barometer is a device used to measure atmospheric
velocity is same. pressure while U–tube manometer or simply manometer is
a device used to measure the gauge pressure.
1.1.3 Pascal’s Law

 A change in the pressure applied to an enclosed fluid is
transmitted equally to every portion of the fluid in all
(b) Pressure at two points which are at a depth separation of
direction of to the walls of the containing vessel.
h when fluid is at rest or moving with constant velocity is
related by the expression  There are a lot of practical applications of Pascal’s law e.g
Hydraulic lift

p2 – p1 = gh, where  is the density of liquid.

(c) Pressure at two points in a horizontal plane when fluid
container is having some constant horizontal acceleration
are related by the expression
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 10
According to principle of hydraulics, A1

F1 F2 A A2
P1  P2    F2  2 F1
A1 A2 A1
v1 v2
1.1.4 Archimedes Principle
 When a body is partially or fully dipped into a fluid, the

fluid exerts contact force on the body. The resulatant of all  A1 V1 = A2 V2
these contact forces is called buoyant force (upthrust).  mass flows rate = AV
 F = weight of fluid displaced by the body. (where  is the density of the liquid.)
 This force is called buoyant force and acts vertically  Thus AV = constant velocity of liquid is smaller in codes
upwards (opposite to the weight of the body) through the parts and vice versa
centre of gravity of the displaced fluid. 1.2.2 Bernoulli’s Theorem
F = Vg In a stream line flow of an ideal fluid, the sum of pressure
where, v = volume of liquid displaced energy per unit volume, potential energy per unit volume
and kinetic energy per unit volume is always constant at
 = density of liquid.
all cross section of the liquid.
 Apparent decrease in weight of body = upthrust – weight
of liquid displaced by the body. ρV 2
P+ρgh+ =Constant
Wapp = U – W 2
 Floation :  It is a mathematical consequences of low of conservation
(a) A body floats in a liquid if the average density of the body of energy an fluid dynamics.
is less than that of the liquid.
C P2
(b) The weight of the liquid displaced by the immersed part of
A2 v2
body must be equal to the weight of the body.
(c) The centre of gravity of the body and centre of buoyancy P1 B
v1 h2
must be along the same vertical line.
A1
h1
1.2 Fluid Dynamics
 Steady Flow (Stream Line Flow)

 Bernoulli’s equation is valid only for incompressible
The flow in which the velocity of fluid particles crossing a steady flow of a fluid with no viscosity.
particular point is the same at all the times. Thus, each
 Application of Bernoulli’s Theorem.
particle takes the same path as taken by a previous particle
through that point. (a) Velocity of Efflux
 Line of flow
It is the path taken by a particle in flowing liquid. In case of a
steady flow, it is called streamline. Two steamlines can never
intersect. Streamlims do not intersect each other
 Tusbent flow
It is irregular flow in which particles move in zig zag way
1.2.1 Equation of Continuity
In a time t, the volume of liquid entering the tube of flow

in a steady flow is A1 V1 t. The same volume must flow
out as the liquid is incompressible. The volume flowing Let us find the velocity with which liquid comes out of a
out in t is A2 V2 t. It is a consequences of conservation hole at a depth h below the liquid surface.
of mass. Using Bernoulli’s theorem,
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 11
1 2 1 2 Q
2
Q
2
PA  V  gh A  PB  VB  gh B   2 hg
2 A 2 
A2
2 2
A1
(Q = AV)
1 2 1 2
 Patm  VA  gh  Patm  V  0
2 2 2hg
 Q  A1A 2 2 2
(Note: PB = Patm, because we have opened the liquid to A  A2
1
atmosphere)
2 2
Here Q is the rate of fluid flow
 V = VA + 2gh
1.3 Viscosity
Using equation of continuity
AVA = aV The property of a fluid by virtue of which it opposes
the relative motion between its different layers is known
A: area of cross-section of vessel
as viscosity and the force that is into play is called the
a: area of hole viscous force.
a2 2 Viscous force is given by :

 V2  V  2gh
A2 dv
F  A
dx
2gh
 V  2gh (if the hole is very small) Newton’a law of viscocity :
1  a 2 / A2
It defines relationship between the shear strers and rate of
(b) Venturi Meter fluid subjected to an externals strers.
where  is a constant depending upon the nature of the
This is an instrument for measuring the rate of flow of fluids.
liquid and is called the coefficient of viscosity and velocity
It is an instrument to measure speed of fluid. gradient = dv/dx
–2
S.I. unit of coefficient of viscosity is Pa.s or Nsm .
CGS unit of viscocity is poise. (1 Pa.s = 10 Poise)
1.3.1 Stoke’s Law
 When a solid moves through a viscous medium, its motion

is opposed by a viscous force depending on the velocity
and shape and size of the body.
 The viscous drag on a spherical body of radius r, moving with
velocity v, in a viscous medium of viscosity  is given by
If PA is pressure at A and PB is pressure at B,
Fviscous = 6rv
PA – PB = hg
This relation is called Stoke’s law.
[h : difference of heights of liquids of density  in vertical
 Importance of Stoke’s law
tubes]
(a) This law is used in the determination of electronic charge
If V1 is velocity at A and V2 is velocity at B
with the help of milikan’s experiment.
Q = A1V1 = A2V2 [equation of continuity]
(b) This law accounts the formation of clouds.
2 2
V 1 V 2 (c) This law accounts why the speed of rain drops is less
PA    PB   [Bernoulli’s Theorem]
2 2 then that of a body falling freely with a constant velocity
from the height of clouds.
2 2 2 2 (d) This law helps a man coming down with the help of a
 V2  V1   PA  PB   hg
  parachute.
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 12
1.3.2 Terminal Velocity

F
So, S  where S = surface tension of liquid.
It is maximum constant velocity acquired by the body while 
falling freely in a viscous medium. Surface tension is a property of liquid where liquid surface
2 behaves like a stretched membrane which have the
2r    0  g tendency to contract tending to have minimum possible
vr 
9 area at the surface. The property is called surface tension.
2
Where r is rduis of body  is density of body,  is density Unit of surface tension in MKS system : N/m, J/m
2
of liquid and  is coefficient of viscosity. CGS system  Dyne/cm, erg/cm
1.3.3 Poiseuille’s Formula 1.4.1 Surface Energy
This law states that the flow of liquid depend on variables In order to increase the surface area, the work has to be
such as length of tube (L) radius(r), pressure difference done over the surface of the liquid. This work done is
(P) and coefficient of visocity  stored in the liquid surface as its potential energy. Hence
Poiseuille studied the stream-line flow of liquid in capillary the surface energy of a liquid can be defined as the excess
tubes. potential energy per unit area of the liquid surface.
Volume of liquid coming out of tube per second in given by

4
 Pr
V
8
1.3.4 Reynold Number W = SA, where A = increase in surface area.

 The stability of laminar flow is maintained by viscous Note:
forces. It is obverved, however that laminar or steady flow (1) Work dione in formation of drop of radius r = surface
is disrupted when the rate of flow is large. Irregular, 2
tension × A = 4r S
unsteady motion, turbulence, sets in at high flow rates.
(2) Work dione in formation of soap bubble = 2 × surafce
 Reyonlds defined as a dimensionless number whose value 2
gives one an approximate idea, whether the flow rate would tension × A = 8r S
be turbulent or laminar.
1.4.2 Excess Pressure
This number, called the Reynolds number Re is defined as,
 Excess pressure in a liquid drop or bubble in a liquid is
vD
Re 
 2S
P , S is surface tension
R
where,  = the density of the fluid flowing with a speed
v. 4S
 Excess pressure in a soap bubble is P =
R
D = the diameter of the tube. (because it has two free surfaces)
 = the coefficient of viscosity of the fluid.
1.4.3 Angle of Contact
 It is found that flow is streamline or laminar for Re less
than 1000. The flow is turbulent for Re > 2000. The flow  The angle between the tangent to the liquid surface at the
becomes unsteady for Re between 1000 and 2000. point of contact and the solid surface inside the liquid is
Note:- called the angle of contact. It depends upon nature of
liqiud and solid in contact.
For lower density and higher viscosity fluids laminar flow
is more probable.  If the glass plate is immersed in mercury, the surface is
curved and the mercury is depressed below. Angle of
1.4 Surface Tension
contact is obtuse for mercury.
The surface tension of a liquid is defined as the force per  If the plate is dipped in water with its side vertical, the
unit length in the plane of the liquid surface at right angles water is drawn-up along the plane and assumes the curved
to either side of an imaginary line drawn on that surface. shape as shown. Angle of contact is acute for water.
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 13
1.4.4 Capillary Tube and Capillarity Action In such a case, liquid rises to the top of the capillary tube
of length l (l < h) and adjusts the radius of curvature of its
 A very narrow glass tube with fine bore and open at both
meniscus until the excess pressure is equalised by the
ends is known as capillary tube. When a capillary tube in
pressure of liquid column of length l. (Note liquid does
dipped in a liquid, then liquid will rise or fall in the tube,
not overflow).
this action is termed as capillarity.
2
  g ... (i)
r
If r were the actual radius of curvature,
2
  h g ...(ii)
r
Comparing (i) and (ii)
2Scos  2S
h 
rg Rg
where, S = surface tension,
 = angle of contact,
r = radius of capillary tube,
R = radius of meniscus, and 2
 r   hr
 = density of liquid. g
 Capillary rise in a tube of insufficient length : hr

 r  i.e. radius of curvature r’ can be calculated.
If the actual height to which a liquid will rise in a capillary 
tube is ‘h’ then a capillary tube of length less than ‘h’ can
be called a tube of “insufficient length”.
Adhesion > Cohesion Adhesion = Cohesion Adhesion < Cohesion
1. Liquid will wet the solid. 1. Critical. 1. Liquid will not wet the solid.
2. Meniscus is concave. 2. Meniscus is plane. 2. Meniscus is convex.
3. Angle of contact is acute  < 90°). 3. Angle of contact is 90°. 3. Angle of contact is obtuse  > 90°).
4. Pressure below the meniscus is 4. Pressure below the 4. Pressure below the meniscus
lesser than above it by (2T/r), meniscus is same as more then above it by (2T/r),
i.e. P  P0  2T . above it, i.e. P = P0. i.e., P  P0  2T .

r r
5. In capillary there will be rise. 5. No capillarity. 5. In capillary there will be fall
SCAN CODE
FLUID MECHANICS
FLUID MECHANICS 14
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1
The two thigh bones (femurs) each of cross-sectional area 0.84
2 or h1 = 1.2 h2 = 0.7 h2
10 cm support the upper part of a human body of mass
40 kg. Estimate the average pressure sustained by the From (i),
femurs.
2
h2 – 0.7 h2 = 9
g = 10 m/s .
or
Sol. Total cross-sectional area, 0.3 h2 = 9 or h2 = 30 cm
2 –4 2 and h1 = 0.7 × 30 = 21 cm
A = 2 × 10 cm = 20 × 10 m
Pressure at the common surface
F = 40 kg wt = 40 × 10 N = 400 N = h22g
3
Average pressure, = 0.30 × (0.84 × 10 ) × 10
F 400 = 2520 pa
P= A
5
= 2 × 10 pa.
20 104 Example - 4
Determine height h of oil in the U tube as shown in Fig.
Example - 2 Density of oil = 0.9 g/cc ; Density of liquid is 1.6 g/cc and
What is the pressure on a swimmer 10 m below the surface density of mercury. = 13.6 g/cc.
–2 5
of lake ? g = 10 ms ; atmospheric pressure = 1.01 × 10 Pa.
Sol. Here, h = 10 m,
5
Pa = 1.01 × 10 Pa
Total pressure = Pa +  gh
5
= 1.01 × 10 + 1000 × 10 × 10
5
= 2.01 × 10 Pa = 2 atm.
Example - 3
Two liquids of specific gravity 1.2 and 0.84 are poured into Sol. In equilibrium state, the pressure of liquid at the same level
the limbs of a U tube until the difference in levels of their must be equal. Taking pressure at level C in both arms of U
upper surfaces is 9 cm. What will be heights of their tube, we have
respective surfaces above the common surface in U tube ? Pressure due to h cm of oil + pressure due to (20 – h) cm of
What is the pressure at the common surface ? mercury
-2
(g = 10 ms ). = pressure of 20 cm of liquid
Sol. Let h1, h2 be the heights of denser and lighter liquids above i.e., h × 0.9 × g + (20 – h) × 13.6 × g = 20 × 1.6 × g
the common level. Then or 0.9 h + 272 - 13.6 h = 32
h2 – h1 = 9.0 cm ...(i) or 12.7 h = 240
At the common surface , h11g = h22g or
i.e., h1 × 1.2 × g = h2 × 0.84 × g 240
h = 12.7 = 18.9 cm
FLUID MECHANICS 15
3
Example - 5 (b) Gauge pressure, P = P – Pa = g h = (1.03 × 10 ) × 10 × 1000
5
The vessel shown in Fig. has two sections of area of cross = 103 × 10 Pa.
section A1 and A2. A liquid of density  fills both the (c) The pressure outside the submarine is P = Pa + g h and the
sections, upto a height h in each. Neglect atmospheric pressure inside the submarine is Pa.
pressure. Pressure difference on the window of the submarine = P – Pa
Find (a) the pressure at the base of vessel = g h.
(b) the force exerted by the liquid on the base of the vessel Force on the window = pressure difference × area of window
5 5
(c) the downward force exerted by the walls of the vessel = g h × A = 103 × 10 × (0.04) = 4.12 × 10 N.
at the level B. Example - 7
In a car lift, compressed air exerts a force F1 on a small
piston having a radius of 5.0 cm. This pressure is
transmitted to a second piston of radius 10.0 cm. If the
mass of the car to be lifted is 1350 kg, calculate F1. What is
the pressure necessary to accomplish this task ?
–2
(g = 9.8 ms )
5
Sol. Here, F1 = ? ; r1 = m,
100
F2 = 1350 kg, f = 1350 × 9.8 N ;
10
r2 = m
100
Sol. (a) Pressure at the base of vessel is the pressure due to
height of liquid column = h + h = 2. It is given by F1 F2 1a  r2
1
As,  or F1  a F1   r 2 F2
P = 2 h g. a1 a 2 2 2
(b) The force exerted by the liquid on the base of the vessel,
r2
1 (5 / 100) 2
F = P × A2 = 2 h g A2 or F1  r 2 F2  (10 / 100) 2  1350  9.8  3307 N

2
(c) Since the liquid exerts equal pressure in all directions, so

the force on the wall of vessel at level B in action is equal to F1 F1 3307 5
Pressure, P   = 4.21 × 10 Pa
a1 r12 (22 / 7)(5 / 100) 2
the downward force exerted by the wall of vessel on the
liquid at level B Example - 8
= Pressure × (A2 - A1) = h g × (A2 - A1) –3
A piece of pure gold of density 19.3 g cm is suspected to
Example - 6 be hollow inside. It weighs 38.250 g in air and 33.865 g in
water. Calculate the volume of the hollow portion of the
At the depth of 1000 m in an ocean (a) what is the absolute
gold, if any :
pressure ? (b) What is the gauge pressure ? (c) Find the
force acting on the window of area 20 cm × 20 cm of a Sol. Here, density of pure gold  = 19.3 g cm ;
–3
submarine at this depth, the interior of which is maintained

at sea-level atmospheric pressure. The density of sea water Mass of gold piece, M = 38.250 g
3 –3 –2
is 1.03 × 10 kg m , g = 10 ms . Atmospheric pressure
5
= 1.01 × 10 Pa.  Volume of the gold piece,
Sol. Here, M 38.25 3 3

5 3 –3
V =   19.3 cm = 1.982 cm
Pa = 1.01 × 10 Pa ; = 1.03 × 10 kg m ;
2
h = 1000 m; A = 0.20 × 0.20 = 0.04 m . mass of gold piece in water, = 33.865 g
(a) Absolute pressure P = Pa + g h Therefore apparent loss in weight of the gold piece in water
5 3 5
= 1.01 × 10 + 1.03 × 10 × 10 × 1000 = 104.01 × 10 Pa. = 38.250 – 33.865 = 4.385 g.
FLUID MECHANICS 16
–3
As, density of water is 1 g cm , therefore, the volume of Example - 11
4.385 3
(a) There is a rectangular frame of wire measuring
displaced water = = 4.385 cm 20 cm × 13 cm. Calculate (i) the side of the square and
1
(ii) radius of the circle, which will have the same perimeter
 Volume of the hollow portion of the gold = 4.385 – 1.982 as the rectangular frame. (b) Show that of the three, the
3
= 2.403 cm circle has the maximum surface area.
Example - 9
Sol. (a) Perimeter of the rectangular frame = (20 + 13)2 = 66 cm
The tension in a string holding a solid block below the
Let l be the side of the square and r be the radius of the
surface of a liquid (of density greater than that of solid) as
square having the same perimeter as that of rectangular
shown in Fig. is T0, when the system is at rest. What will
frame.
be the tension in the string if the system has upward
acceleration a ? (i) For square, the perimeter of square = 4 l = 66 cm
or l = 66/4 = 16.5 cm
(ii) For circle, the perimeter of circle = 2 r = 66
66 66
or r =  = 10.5 cm.
2 2  22 / 7
(b) Area of rectangle = 20 × 13 = 260 sq. cm.

Area of square = 16.5 × 16.5 = 272.25 sq. cm.
2 22 2
Sol. Let V be the volume of block of density . Let be the Area of circle = r  × (10.5) = 346.5 sq. cm
7
density of liquid. Mass of block, m = V .
Hence, out of the three, circle encloses the maximum area.
Initially for the equilibrium of block, we have
Example - 12
upward thrust = V g = T0 + V g or T0 = V ()g
If excess of pressure inside a soap bubble of radius 1 cm is
When the lift is accelerated upwards, then g  g + a, balanced by that due to column of oil (sp. gravity 0.8) 2 mm
so, T = V ()(g + a) high, find surface tension of soap bubble.
Therefore, T/T0 = [(g + a)/g] or T = T0[(g + a)/g] –2 3 –3
Sol. Here, r = 1 cm = 10 m ; density of oil,  = 0.8 × 10 kg m
–3
Example - 10 ; h = 2 mm = 2 × 10 m
–3
A wire ring of 30.0 mm radius resting flat on the surface of Pressure due to 2 mm column of oil, p = h  g = (2 × 10 )
3
the liquid is raised. The pull required is 3.03 g f more, before (0.8 × 10 ) × 9.8 = 2 × 0.8 × 9.8 Pa
the film breaks than it is after. Calculate the surface tension
4S
of the liquid. In case of a soap bubble, p = r
Sol. Here, r = 30.0 mm = 3 cm ; F = 3.03 gf = 3.03 × 980 dyne. Since

pr 2  0.8  9.8 102 –2 –1
the liquid is touching the ring, both inside as well as outside, or S =  = 3.92 × 10 Nm
4 4
therefore, force acting on the ring due to surface tension is
given by Example - 13
F’ = 2 (S × circumference of ring) = 2 (S × 2  r) Find the height to which water will rise in a capillary tube of
–3 –1
1.5 mm diameter. Surface tension of water is 7.4 × 10 Nm .
22
=4Sr=4×S× × 3 dyne –3
7 Sol. Here, h = ? ; r = D/2 = 1.5/2 = 0.75 mm = 0.75 × 10 m ;
–3 –1 3 –3
S = 7.4 × 10 Nm . For water,  = 10 kg m and angle of
22 o
As F’ = F  4 × S × × 3 = 3.03 × 980 contact  = 0
7
2Scos  2  7.4 103  cos 0o
3.03  980  7 Now, h =  = 0.0021m
or S= = 78.76 dyne/cm. rg (0.75 103 ) 103  9.8
4  22  3
FLUID MECHANICS 17
Example - 14 Example - 18
The terminal velocity of a copper ball of radius 2.0 mm Water flows through a horizontal pipe of which the cross-
o –1
falling through a tank of oil at 20 C is 6.5 cm s . Compute the section is not constant. The pressure is 1 cm of mercury
–1
o 3 –3
viscosity of the oil at 20 C. Density of oil is 1.5 × 10 kg m , where the velocity is 0.35ms . Find the pressure (in terms
–1
3
density of copper is 8.9 × 10 kg/m .
3 of mercury column) at a point where the velocity is 0.65ms .
–2 –1 –3
Sol. Here, v = 6.5 × 10 ms ; r = 2.0 × 10 m ; g = 9.8 m/s ,
2 Sol. At one point,
3
P1 = 1 cm of Hg = 0.01 m of Hg = 0.01 × (13.6 × 10 ) × 9.8 Pa ;
3 3
 = 8.9 × 10 kg/m . –1
v1 = 0.35 ms
3 3
 = 1.5 × 10 kg/m –1 3 –3
At another point, P2 = ?, v2 = 0.65 ms and  = 10 kg m .
2r 2 (  ) g 2  (2.0 103 ) 2  (8.9  1.5) 103  9.8 According to Bernoulli’s theorem
  
9v 9  (6.5 102 )
1 1
–1
P1  v12  P2  v22
= 9.9 × 10 Pa–s. 2 2
Example - 15 1
or P2 = P1 –  (v 22  v12 )
A rain drop of radius 0.3 mm has a terminal velocity in air 2
–5 –2
1 m/s. The viscosity of air is 18 × 10 dyne cm s. Find the
3 1 3 2 2
viscous force on the rain drops in newton. = 0.01 × 13.6 × 10 × 9.8 – 2 × 10 × [(0.65) – (0.35) ]
–3 –1
Sol. Here, r = 0.3 mm = 0.3 × 10 m ; v = 1 ms 1182.8
 = 18 × 10–5 dyne cm–2 s = 18 × 10–6 Pa-s. = 1182.8 Pa = = 0.00887 m of Hg
9.8  (13.6 103 )
22 –6
Example - 19
Viscous force, F = 6  r v = 6 × × (18 × 10 )
7 Find the velocity of efflux of water from an orifice near the
–3
× (0.3 ×10 ) × 1 = 1.018 × 10 N.
–7 bottom of a tank in which pressure is 500 gf/sq cm above
atmosphere.
Example - 16
At what speed will the velocity head of stream of water be 500 2 –
equal to 40 cm ? Sol. Pressure at orifice, P = 500 gf/sq cm = × 9.8 × (100) Nm
1000
2 –2
= 500 × 98 Nm
v2
Sol. Here, velocity head, = 40 cm Let h be the depth of orifice below the surface.
2g
–1 P 500  98
 v  2g  40  2  980  40 = 280 cm s As, P = h  g,  h =  g  3 =5m
10  9.8
Example - 17
–1
At what speed will the velocity of a stream of water be The velocity of effux, v = 2 gh = 2  9.8  5 = 9.893 ms .
–2
equal to 20 cm of mercury column. Taking g = 10 ms . Example - 20
A bottle full of a liquid is fitted with a tight cork. Explain
Sol. Here, velocity head = 20 cm of Hg = 20 × 13.6 cm of water ; why a slight blow on the cork may be sufficient to break
–2 –2
g = 10 ms = 1000 cm s . the bottle.
v2
As velocity head = Sol. If the blow given to a cork of area of cross-section a exerts
2g a force F on cork, then increase in pressure on liquid is
=  a . According to Pascal’s law, the increase in pressure at
v2
 20 × 13.6 = one part of liquid is communicated equally at all other parts
2 1000 of liquid. So the increase in force on the area A of the vessel
–1
is F’ = (F/a) A. Since A > > a, so F’ > > F. As a result of which
or v= 20 13.6  2 1000 = 737.56 cm/s = 7.3756 ms the bottle may break.
FLUID MECHANICS 18
Example - 21 of a large iron ship, the weight of water displaced by the

A balloon filled with helium does not rise in air indefinitely ship is higher than the weight of ship, hence the ship floats
but halts after a certain height. (Neglect winds). in water.
Example - 26
Sol. In the beginning the balloon filled with helium rises in air
Does Archimede’s principle hold in a vessel in free fall ?
because weight of the air displaced by balloon is more than
the weight of the balloon and helium gas filled inside balloon. Sol. Archimede’s principle does not hold good in this situation
We know that the density of air and the value of acceleration as the vessel in free fall is in a condition of weightlessness,
due to gravity decreases with height. Due to it, the weight where the buoyant force accounting for Archimede’s
of air decreases at greater height. The balloon halts at such principle does not exist.
a height where the weight of the air displaced just equals to
Example - 27
the weight of helium gas and the balloon.
A block of wood floats in a bucket of water in a lift. Will the
Example - 22
block sink more or less if the lift starts accelerating up ?
The force required by a man to move his limbs immersed in
water is smaller than the force for the same movement in air. Sol. When the lift starts accelerating up, the block of wood will
float at the same level in a bucket of water in a lift. It is so
Sol. The upthurst on the limbs of a man is more when immersed because the equilibrium of floating body is unaffected by
in water than in air. As a result of it, the effective weight of variation is acceleration due to gravity ‘g’. However, thrust
limbs of a man is less in water than in air. Hence the force of liquid and weight of body both depend on g and will
required to move his limbs is less in water than that in air. increase equally.
Ice floats in water with about nine tenths of its volume A shot is obtained by pouring molten lead through narrow
submerged. What is the fractional volume submerged for holes into water from certain height. The falling lead
an ice berg floating on a fresh water lake of a (hypothetical) solidifies and takes the form of small spheres. Explain the
planet whose gravity is ten times that of the earth ? phenomenon.
Sol. The fractional volume of ice submerged in water is Sol. The molten lead comes out of a narrow hole in the form of a
independent of the value of acceleration due to gravity ‘g’. fine stream. When it falls from a height into a vessel
So, it is nine tenths on new planet also. containing cold water, it breaks into spherical drops due to
thrust of water and surface tension. These are cooled on
Example - 24
entering the water and thus solidify into small spheres.
What is the fractional volume of an ice cube in a pail of
Example - 29
water produced in an enclosure which is freely falling
under gravity ? Why does oil spread over the surface of water ?
Sol. For a free fall, the effective value of acceleration due to Sol. Surface tension of oil is less than that of water. When oil is
gravity is zero. Therefore, there will be no weight of ice cube dropped on the surface of water, the force of surface tension
and hence no upward thrust on ice cube. As a result of it, of water being larger than that of oil, stretches the oil drops
the ice cube can float with any value of fractional volume on all sides. Hence, the oil spreads over the surface of water.
submerged. Example - 30
Example - 25 Why the tip of the nib of a pen is split ?
Explain why a small iron needle sinks in water while a
large iron ship floats ? Sol. The tip of the nib of a pen is split in order to provide a
capillary which helps the ink to rise to the end of the nib and
Sol. A body will float in a liquid if the weight of the liquid enables it to write continuously.
displaced by the immersed part of the body in liquid is equal
to weight of body. In case of iron needle, the weight of Example - 31
water displaced by needle is much less than the weight of It is better to wash the clothes in hot soap solution.
needle, hence, the iron needle sinks into the water. In case Why ?
FLUID MECHANICS 19
Sol. The soap solution has less surface tension as compared to Sol. Because in strameline flow all particles maiontain their
ordinary water and its surface tension decreases further on constant speed and the relative separation between them
heating. The hot soap solution can, therefore, spread over Example - 37
large surface area and as such it has more wetting power. It
What happens to the pressure of an ideal liquid when it
is on account of this property that hot soap solution can
passes through a region where its speed increases ?
penetrate and clean the clothes better than the ordinary water.
Example - 32 Sol. The pressure of an ideal liquid decreases when it passes
Why surface tension concept is only held for liquids and through a region where it speed increases, according to
not for gases which are also fluids ? Bernoulli’s theorem.
Example - 38
Sol. We know that the intermolecular distance between the gas
molecules is quite large as compared to that of liquid. Due The shapes of cars and planes are streamlined. Why ?
to it, the forces of cohesion in the gas molecules are very
Sol. When a body moves through a fluid, its motion is opposed
small and these are quite large for liquids. Therefore, the
concept of surface tension is applicable to liquids but not by the force of fluid friction, which increases with the speed
to gases. of the body. When cars and planes, move through air, their
motion is opposed by the air friction, which in turn, depend
Example - 33 upon the shape of the body. It is due to this reason that the
Rain drops falling under gravity do not acquire very high cars or planes are given such shapes (known as stream-
velocity. Why ? lined shapes) so that air friction is minimum. Rather the
movement of air layers on the upper and lower side of
Sol. When a rain drop falls under gravity through a viscous
streamlined shaped body provides a lift which helps in
medium (say air) a viscous drag force acts on it in a direction
increasing the speed of the car.
opposite to that of motion. According to Stoke’s law, this
viscous drag force goes on increasing with the increasing Example - 39
velocity of the drop till a stage comes when the total Why two holes are made to empty an oil tin ?
downward force on the drop is just balanced by the upward
viscous drag force. At this stage, there is no net force to Sol. When oil comes out through a tin with one hole, the pressure
accelerate rain drop. Hence the rain drop starts moving with inside the tin becomes less than the atmospheric pressure.
uniform velocity. This velocity is called ‘terminal velocity’. This stops the oil from flowing out. When two holes are
Example - 34 made in the tin, air keeps on entering the tin through the
A bigger rain drop falls faster than smaller one. Why ? other hole and maintains pressure inside.
Example - 40
Sol. When the rain drops of different sizes fall under gravity,
An air bubble of 1 mm diameter rises in water with terminal
they ultimately move with their terminal velocities due to –3
velocity. If viscosity of water is 1.0 × 10 decapoise and
viscous drag force of air. As terminal velocity of a drop –3
density of air is 1.3 kgm , calculate the terminal velocity of
varies as the square of its radius, therefore a bigger drop
the air bubble.
will have greater terminal velocity and hence fall faster than
a small rain drop. –3 3
Sol. Given  = 1.0 × 10 decapoise, density of water  = 10 kg
Example - 35 –3 –3
m , diameter of bubble, d = 1 mm = 1 × 10 m
Machine parts are jammed in winter. Why ?
2 r 2 (  )g
Sol. A lubricating oil is generally used between the various parts Using the formula, V =
9 
of a machine to reduce the friction. In winter, since the
temperature is low, the viscosity of oil between the machine
2 (0.5 103 ) 2 (103  1.3) 9.8
parts increases considerably, resulting in jamming of the We have v 
9 1.0 103
machine parts.
–1
Example - 36 = 0.54 ms .
Two stream lines of fluid can not cut each other. Why ?
FLUID MECHANICS 20
A cylinder of height 20 m is completely filled with water. Why does mercury not wet glass ?
–1
Find the velocity of efflux of water (in ms ) through a
small hole on the side wall of the cylinder near its bottom. Sol. This is because the force of cohesion between mercury
–2
Given g = 10ms . molecules is stronger than the force of adhesion between
the molecules of glass and mercury.
–2
Sol. Given h = 20 m, g = 10ms , Velocity of efflux = ?
Example - 48
Velocity of efflux = 2gh Explain the working of mercury barometer to measure the
atmospheric pressure.
–1
2 10  20 = 20 ms .
Example - 42
How can we suck soft drink through a straw ?
Sol. When we suck the air in the straw, the Pressure inside straw
becomes less than atmospheric preasure. Due to this presure
difference, the soft drink rises up through the straw.
Example - 43
Why does water not flow out of dropper unless the rubber
ball is pressed ?
Sol. The upward air pressure at the tip of the dropper is equal to Sol. (i) The pressure of the atmosphere at any point is equal to
the pressure of the liquid column in it. When we press the the weight of a column per air of unit cross sectional area
rubber ball, the downward pressure increases making the extending from that point to the top of the atmosphere.
liquid flow out.
(ii) A long glass tube closed at one end and filled with mercury
Example - 44 is inverted into a trough of mercury. This device is known
A block of wood is floating in a lake. What is the apparent as mercury barometer.
weight of the floating block ? (iii) The space above the mercury column in the tube contains
only mercury. Vapour whose pressure P is so small that it
Sol. The apparent weight of the block is equal to zero because
may be neglected.
the weight of the block acting vertically downward is
balanced by the buoyant force acting, on the block upward. (iv) The pressure inside the column at point A must be equal to
the pressure at point B which is at the same level.
Example - 45
 Pa = gh
Why is wet ink absorbed by a blotting paper ?
where is the density of mercury and h is height of mercury
Sol. Blotting paper has fine pores which act as capillaries. The column in the tube.
ink rises in these capillarises. Thus, the ink is absorbed by (v) It is found that the mercury column in the barometer has a
the blotting paper. height of about 76 cm at sea level equivalent to one
Example - 46 atmosphere.
Why does water wet glass ? (vi) Hence,
Pa = 0.76 × Density of mercury × g
Sol. This is because the force of adhesion between the 3
molecules of water and the glass is stronger than the force  Pa = 0.76 × 13.6 × 10 × 9.8
5
of cohesion between water molecules.  Pa = 1.013 × 10 pa
Teacher’s Note:
If you are interested in aerospace engineering, you need to
master this chapter. If you want to become a hematologist,
you still need to master this chapter
"Samajh ayega to mazaa ayega,
Mazaa ayega to samajh ayega".
Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing

Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
FLUIDS MECHANICS 22
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
Pressure due to fluids 7. A given shaped glass tube having uniform cross-section is
1. Pressure at a point inside a liquid does not depend on: filled with water and is mounted on a rotatable shaft as
shown in fig. If the tube is rotated with a constant angular
(a) the depth of the point below the surface of the liquid
velocity  then:
(b) the nature of the liquid
(c) the acceleration due to gravity at that point
(d) the shape of the containing vessel
2. Two stretched membranes of area 2 cm2 and 3 cm2 are
placed in a liquid at the same depth. The ratio of the
pressure on them is:
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 22 : 32
3. A dam for water reservoir is built thicker at the bottom (a) water levels in both A and B go up
than at the top because:
(b) water level in section A goes up and that in B comes
(a) pressure of water is very large at the bottom due to its down
large depth
(c) water level in section A comes down and that in B it
(b) water is likely to have more density at the bottom due goes up
to its large depth
(d) water level remain same in both sections.
(c) quantity of water at the bottom is large
(d) none of the above 8. The height to which a cylindrical vessel be filled with a
homogeneous liquid, to make the average force with which
4. A vessel contains liquid of density as shown in fig.
the liquid presses the side of the vessel equal to the force
The gauge pressure at the point P is:
exerted by the liquid on the bottom of the vessel, is equal to:
(a) half of the radius of the vessel
(b) radius of the vessel
(c) one-fourth of the radius of th vessel
(d) three-fourths of the radius of the vessel
9. A uniformly tapering vessel is filled with a liquid of density
(a) hg (b) Hg 900 kg/m3. The force that acts on the base of the vessel due
(c) (H – h)g (d) (H – h) g cos  to the liquid is: (g = 10 m/s2)
5. A tank 5 m high is half filled with water and then is filled
to the top with oil of denisty 0.85 g/cm3. The pressure at
the bottom of the tank, due to these liquids, is:
(a) 1.85 gf/cm2 (b) 89.25 gf/cm2
(c) 462.5 gf/cm2 (d) 500 gf/cm2
6. A piston of cross-sectional area 100 cm2 is used in a
hydraulic press to exert a force of 107 dyne on the water.
The cross-sectional area of the other piston which
supports an object having a mass 2000 kg is:
(a) 3.6 N (b) 7.2 N
(a) 100 cm2 (b) 109 cm2
(c) 9.0 N (d) 14.4 N
(c) 2 × 104 cm2 (d) 2 × 1010 cm2
FLUIDS MECHANICS 23
2
10. In the given figure shown. 14. A tube 1 cm in cross section is attached to the top of a
2
vessel 1 cm high and of cross section 100 cm . Water is
poured into the system filling it to a depth of 100 cm above
the bottom of the vessel as shown in the figure. Take
–2
g = 10 ms . Find the correct statement.
(a) p1 > p0 (b) p > p0

(c) p1 > p2 (d) p = 0
2
11. A cylindrical jar of cross-sectional area 0.01 m is filled
with water to a height of 50 cm. It carries a tight-fitting
(a) The force exerted by the water against the bottom of
piston of negligible mass. What is the pressure at the
the vessel is 100 N.
bottom of the jar when a mass of 1 kg is placed on the
–2
piston ? Take g = 10 ms . (b) The weigth of water in the system is 1.99 N.
5
(a) 10 Pa (b) 6000 Pa (c) Both (a) and (b) are correct
(c) 5000 Pa (d) 1000 Pa (d) Neither (a) nor (b) is correct.
12. Two vessels A and B of different shapes have the same Container in Motion
base area and are filled with water upto the same height h 15. A container containing water has a constant acceleration
(see figure). The force exerted by water on the base is FA for ‘a’ in the horizontal drection. Free surface of water gets
vessel A and FB for vessel B. The respective weights of the sloped with the horizontal at angle:
vessels are WA and WB. Then
1 g
(a) cos  
a
1 g
(b) sin  
a 
1 a
(c) tan  
(a) FA > FB ; WA > WB (b) FA = FB ; WA > WB g
(c) FA = FB ; WA < WB (d) FA > FB ; WA = WB
1 a 
13. A U-tube contains water and oil separated by mercury. (d) sin  
The mercury columns in the two arms are at the same g
level with 10 cm of water in one arm and 12.5 cm of oil in 16. Fig. (A), (B) and (C) show three different situations of the
the other, as shown in figure. What is the relative density surface of liquid contained in a vessel that is moving
of oil ? towards right.
These figures indicate, respectively, that the vessel is:

(a) moving with uniform speed, accelerating, decelerating
(b) moving with uniform speed, decelerating, accelerating
(a) 0.8 (b) 1.0
(c) accelerating, decelerating, moving with uniform speed
(c) 1.25 (d) none of these
(d) decelerating, accelerating, moving with uniform speed
FLUIDS MECHANICS 24
17. The minimum horizontal acceleration of the container so Pascals Law

that the pressure at the point A of the container becomes
20. A hydraulic lift is used to lift a car of mass 3000 kg. The
atmospheric is (the tank is of sufficient height)
cross-sectional area of the lift on which the car is
–2
supported is 5 × 10 m. What is the pressure on the smaller
piston, if both the pistons are at the same horizontal level ?
–2
Take g = 10 ms .
5 5
(a) 6 × 10 Pa (b) 5 × 10 Pa
5 5
(c) 4 × 10 Pa (d) 3 × 10 Pa
21. Figure shown water filled in a symmetrical container. Four
pistons of equal area A are used at the four openings to
keep the water in equilibrium. Now an additional force F is
applied at each piston. The increase in the pressure at the
3 4 centre of the container due to this addition is
(a) g (b) g
2 3
4 3
(c) g (d) g
2 4
18. A sealed tank containing a liquid of density  moves with
horizontal acceleration a as shown in the figure. The
difference in pressure between two points A and B will be
(a) hg (b) lg

F 2F
(c) hg – la (d) hg + la (a) (b)
A A
19. A U-tube of base length ‘l’ filled with same volume of two
liquids of densities  and 2 is moving with an acceleration 4F
(c) (d) 0
‘a’ on the horizontal plane. If the height difference between A
the two surfaces (open to atmosphere) becomes zero, then
BUOYANCY
the height h is given by
22. When a body is wholly or partially immersed in a liquid it
appears to lose weight. This loss of weight is equal to the
weight to:
(a) water displaced by the body
(b) liquid displaced by the body
(c) equal volume of water
(d) equal volume of liquid
23. Two pieces of metal when immersed in a liquid have equal
a 3a upthrust on them; then:
(a)  (b) 
2g 2g (a) both pieces must have equal weights
a 2a (b) both pieces must have equal densities
(c)  (d)  (c) both pieces must have equal volumes
g 3g
(d) both are floating to the same depth
FLUIDS MECHANICS 25
24. When a body is weighed in a liquid, the loss in its weight 31. A beaker containing water weighs 100 g. It is placed on the
depends upon: pan of a balance and a piece of metal weighing 70 g and
(a) volume of the body (b) mass of the body having a volume of 10 cm3 is placed inside the water in the
beaker. The weight of the beaker and the metal would be:
(c) shape of the body (d) CG of the body
(a) 170 g (b) 160 g
25. An iron ball is weighed in air and then in water by a
(c) 100 g (d) 30 g
spring balance:
32. A body carries a fish in one hand and a bucket of water in
(a) its weight in air is more than in water
the other hand; if he places the fish in the bucket, the
(b) its weight in water is more than in air weight now carried by him:
(c) its weight is same both in air and water (a) is less than before
(d) its weight is zero in water (b) is more than before
26. A body weighs 40 g in air. If its volume is 10 cc, in water (c) is the same as before
it will weigh: (d) depends upon his speed
(a) 30 g 33. A block of wood is floating in a lake. The apparent weight
(b) 40 g of the floating block is
(c) 50 g (a) equal to its true weight
(d) data are insufficient to calculate (b) less than its true weight
27. A block of metal (density 7 g/cc) of size 5 cm × 5 cm × 5 cm (c) more than its true weight
is weighed completely submerged in water. What will be (d) equal to zero
its apparent weight (density of water = 1 g/cc)?
9 th
(a) (6 × 5 × 5 × 5)g (b) (4 × 4 × 4 × 7)g 34. An ice cue floats on water in a beaker with of its
10
(c) (7 × 5 × 5 × 5)g (d) (4 × 4 × 4 × 6)g
volume submerged under water. What fraction of its volume
28. A weightless rubber balloon has 100 g of water in it. Its
will be submerged if the beaker of water is taken to the
weight in water will be: th
moon where the gravity is 1/6 that on the earth ?
(a) 100 g (b) 200 g
(a) 9/10 (b) 27/50
(c) 50 g (d) zero
(c) 2/3 (d) zero
29. The reading of a spring balance when a block is
35. When a ship floats on water:
suspended from it in air is 60 N. This reading is changed
to 40 N when the block is submerged in water. The specific (a) it displaces no water
gravity of the block must therefore be: (b) the mass of water displaced is equal to the mass of the
(a) 3 (b) 2 ship
(c) the mass of water displaced is lesser than the mass of
(c) 6 (d) 3/2
the ship
30. A vessel with water is placed on a weighing pan and
(d) the mass of water displaced is greater than the mass of
reads 600 g. Now a ball of 40 g and density 0.80 g/cc is
the ship
sunk into the water with a pin as shown in fig., keeping it
sunk. The weighing pan will show a reading. 36. A hydrogen-filled balloon stops rising after it has attained
a certain height in the sky. This happens because
(a) the atmospheric pressure decreases with height and
becomes zero when maximum height is attained
(b) the temperature of the air at maximum height equals that of
the hydrogen in the balloon
(c) viscous effects become negligible
(d) at the highest point, the density of air is such that the
(a) 600 g (b) 550 g
buoyant force on the balloon equals its weight
(c) 650 g (d) 632 g
FLUIDS MECHANICS 26
37. An iceberg is floating partially immersed in sea water. If 45. A jar is filled with two non-mixing liquids 1 and 2 having
the density of sea water is 1.03 g/cc and that of ice is 0.92 densities 1 and 2 respectively. A solid ball, made of a
g/cc, the fraction of the total volume of iceberg above the material of density 3, is dropped in the jar. It comes to
level of sea water is: equilibrium in the position shown in the fig. Which of the
(a) 8% (b) 11% following is true for 1, 2 and 3 ?
(c) 34% (d) 89%
38. Two solids A and B float in a liquid. It is observed that A
floats with half its volume immersed and B floats with (2/3)
of its volume immersed. Compare the densities of A and B:
(a) 4 : 3 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 3 : 4 (d) 1 : 3
39. A body weights W in air and it loses its weight by 25% in
water. The relative density of the body is
(a) 4 (b) 1/4 (a) 3 < 1 < 2 (b) 1 > 3 > 2
(c) 3/4 (d) 4/3 (c) 1 > 2 > 3 (d) 1 < 3 < 2
40. A body floats with (1/3) of its volume outside water and 46. A wooden piece floats half submerged in a tub of water. If
(3/4) of its volume outside another liquid. The density of the system is transferred to a lift ascending with
the other liquid is: acceleration the wooden piece will:
(a) sink a little more (b) rise a little
(a) (9/4) g/cc (b) (4/9) g/cc
(c) remain half submerged (d) sink to the bottom
(c) (8/3) g/cc (d) (3/9) g/cc 47. A piece of ice, with a stone frozen inside it, is floating in
41. A raft of wood (density 600 g/m3) of mass 120 kg floats in water contained in a beaker. When the ice melts, the level
water. How much weight can be put on the raft to make it of water in the beaker
just sink? (a) rises
(a) 120 kg (b) 200 kg (b) falls
(c) remains unchanged
(c) 40 kg (d) 80 kg
(d) falls at first and then rises to the same height as before.
42. A boat 3m long and 2 m wide is floating in a lake. When a
48. A metallic sphere floats in an immiscible mixture of water
man climbs over it, it sinks 1 cm further into water. The (w = 103 kg/m3) and a liquid (l = 13.5 × 103 kg/m3) such
mass of the man is:
4 1
(a) 60 kg (b) 64 kg that its th portion is in water and th portion is in
5 5
(c) 70 kg (d) 72 kg liquid. Density of the metal is:
43. A man is sitting in a boat which is floating in a pond. If the (a) 4.5 × 103 kg/m3 (b) 4.0 × 103 kg/m3
man drinks some water from the pond, the level of water in 3
(c) 3.5 × 10 kg/m 3
(d) 1.9 × 103 kg/m3
the pond will: 49. A vessel contains an immiscible mixture of water and a
(a) rise a little (b) sink a little liquid of density 0.8 gm/cc. A cube of side 10 cm is placed
in the mixture and it is observed that the water-liquid
(c) remain stationary (d) none of these interface is at the middle of cube height. Mass of the
44. A boat carrying a number of large stones is floating in a cube is:
water tank. What will happen to the water level if the stones (a) 420 gm (b) 680 gm
are unloaded into the water? The water level (c) 225 gm (d) 900 gm
(a) remains unchanged 50. A metal ball of density 7800 kg/m3 is suspected to have a
large number of inner cavities. It weighs 9.8 kg when
(b) rises weighed directly on a balance and 1.5 kg less when
(c) falls immersed in water. The fraction by volume of the cavities
in the metal ball is apporximately:
(d) rises till half the number of stones are unloaded and
then begins to fall (a) 20% (b) 30%
(c) 16% (d) 11%
FLUIDS MECHANICS 27
51. A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in 55. A cylinder of height 20 m is completely filled with water.
–1
water as shown in the figure. The distance h and l are The velocity of efflux of water (in ms ) through a small
shown there: hole on the side wall of the cylinder near its bottom, is
(a) 10 (b) 20
(c) 25.5 (d) 5
56. A sphere of solid material of specific gravity 8 has a
concentric spherical cavity and just sinks in water. Then,
the ratio of the radius of the cavity to the outer radius of
the sphere must be
3 3
3 5
(a) (b)
2 2
After sometime, the coin falls into the water. Then:
(a) both l and h increase
3
7 2
(c) (d) 3
(b) both l and h decrease 2 7
(c) l decreases and h increases Continuity Equation, Bernoulli’s

(d) l increases and h decreases Equation and Torricelli’s Equation
52. A body is just floating on the surface of a liquid. The 57. A piston of a syringe pushes a liquid with a speed of 1 cm/
density of the body is same as that of the liquid. The body sec. The radii of the syringe tube and the needle are R = 1
is slightly pushed down. What will happen to the body? cm and r = 0.5 mm respectively. The velocity of the liquid
(a) It will come back slowly to its earlier position. coming out of the needle is
(b) It will remain submerged where it is left. (a) 2 cm/sec (b) 20 cm/sec
(c) It will sink. (c) 10 cm/sec (d) 400 cm/s
(d) It will come out violently. 58. Bernoulli’s theorem is a consequence of
53. A piece of ice floats in a vessel with water above which a (a) conservation of mass
layer of lighter oil is poured. When the whole of ice melts, (b) conservation of energy
which one of the following statements will be true? (c) conservation of linear momentum
(a) The level of the interface will remain the same.
(d) conservation of angular momentum
(b) The total level of the liquids in the vessel will rise.
59. In the given figure, the velocity v3 will be
(c) The total level of the liquids in the vessel will fall while
the level of interface will go up.
(d) The level of interface as well as the total level of liquids
in the vessel will fall.
54. A cubical block of side 10 cm floats at the interface of an
oil and water. The pressure above that of atmosphere at
the lower face of the block is (a) 2 m/s (b) 4 m/s
(c) 1 m/s (d) 3 m/s
60. The velocity of efflux of a liquid through an orifice in the
bottom of a tank does not depend upon
(a) density of liquid
(b) height of the liquid column above orifice
(c) acceleration due to gravity
2 2
(a) 200 N/m (b) 680 N/m (d) None of these
(c) 400 N/m2 (d) 800 N/m2
FLUIDS MECHANICS 28
61. A hole is made at the bottom of the tank filled with water 66. A water tank standing on the floor has two small holes
(density = 1000 kg/m3). If the total pressure at the bottom punched in the vertical wall one above the other. The holes
of the tank is three atmospheres (1 atmosphere = 105 N/ are 2.4 cm and 7.6 cm above the floor. If the jest of water
m2), then the velocity of efflux is from the holes hit the floor at the same point, then the
height of water in the tank is :
(a) 400 m / s (b) 200 m / s (a) 10 cm (b) 5 cm
(c) 20 cm (d) 48 cm
(c) 600 m / s (d) 500 m / s
67. Water is flowing through two horizontal pipes of different
62.  
A small hole is made at a height of h '  1 / 2 m from the diameters whcih are connected together. The diameter of
the two pipes are 3 cm and 6 cm respectively. If the speed
bottom of a cylindrical water tank and at a depth of of water in the narrower tube is 4 m/s. Then, the speed of
h  2 m form the upper level of water in the tank. The water in the wider tube is :
(a) 16 m/s (b) 1 m/s
distance where the water emerging from the hole strikes
the ground is (c) 4 m/s (d) 2 m/s
68. The pressure of water in a pipe when tap is closed is 5.5 ×
105 N/m2. When tap gets open, pressure reduces to 5 × 105
N/m2. The velocity with which water comes out on opening
the tap is :
(a) 10 m/s (b) 5 m/s
(c) 20 m/s (d) 15 m/s
69. A tank is filled with water up to height H. When a hole is
made at a distance h below the level of water. What will be
horizontal range of water jet ?
(a) 2 2 m (b) 1 m
(a) 2 h (H  h) (b) 4 h (H  h)
(c) 2 m (d) none of these
63. The level of water in a tank is 5 m high. A hole of area 1 cm2 (c) 4 h (H  h) (d) 2 h (H  h)
is made at the bottom of the tank. The rate of leakage of
Viscosity
water from the hole is (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 10–3 m3/s (b) 10–4 m3/s3 70. The ratio of the terminal velocities of two drops of radii R
3 –2 3
and R/2 is
(c) 10 m /s (d) 10 m /s
(a) 2 (b) 1
64. Spherical balls of radius R are falling in a viscous fluid of
(c) 1/2 (d) 4
viscosity  with a velocity . The retarding viscous force
acting on the spherical ball is 71. Units of coefficient of viscosity are
(a) Nms–1 (b) Nm2s–1
(a) directly proportional to R but inversely proportional to .
(c) Nm–2s (d) None of these
(b) directly proportional to both radius R and velocity .
72. The terminal velocity v of a small steel ball of radius r
(c) inversely proportional to both radius R and velocity .
falling under gravity through a column of viscous liquid
(d) inversely proportional to R but directly proportional to of coeffcient of viscosity  depends on mass of the ball m,
velocity . acceleration due to gravity g, coefficient of viscossity 
65. If the terminal speed of a sphere of gold (density and radius r. Which of the following relations is
–3 –1
= 19.5 kgm ) is 0.2 ms in a viscous liquid (density = 1.5 dimensionally correct ?
–3
kgm ), find the terminal speed of a sphere of silver (density mgr
–3
= 10.5 kg/m ) of the same size in the same liquid. (a) v  (b) v  mgr

–1 –1
(a) 0.4 ms (b) 0.133 ms
–1 –1 mg mg
(c) 0.1 ms (d) 0.2 ms (c) v  (d) v 
r 
FLUIDS MECHANICS 29
73. A rain drop of radius r falls in air with a terminal speed vt. Surface Tension
What is the terminal speed of a rain drop of radius 2r ? 80. The water droplets in free fall are spherical due to
(a) vt/2 (b) vt
(a) gravity
(c) 2vt (d) 4vt
74. Eight spherical rain drops of the same mass and radius are (b) viscosity
–1
falling down with a terminal speed of 6 cm s . If they (c) surface tension
coalesce to form one big drop, what will be its terminal (d) intermolecular attraction
speed ? Neglect the buoyancy due to air. 81. Tiny insects can float and walk on the surface of water
–1 –1
(a) 1.5 cms (b) 6 cms
–1 –1 due to
(c) 24 cms (d) 32 cms
(a) buoyancy alone
75. Two equal drops of water are falling through air with a
steady velocity v. If the drops coalesce, then new velocity (b) surface tension alone
will be : (c) both buoyancy and surface tension
(a) 2 v (b) 2v (d) neither buoyancy nor surface tension
82. Two small drops of mercury each of radius r from a single
v large drop. The ratio of surface energy before and after
2/3
(c) 2 v (d)
2 this change is :
76. As the temperature of water increases, its viscosity (a) 2 : 22/3 (b) 22/3 : 1
(a) remains unchanged
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 2
(b) decreases
83. If the angle of contact is less than 90°, then pressure just
(c) increases
(d) increases or decreases depending on the external inside the surface of a meniscus
pressure (a) is less than atmospheric pressure
77. The rate of flow of liquid in a tube of radius r, length l, (b) is greater than atmospheric pressure
whose ends are maintained at a pressure difference p is (c) is same as the atmospheric pressure
4
Qpr (d) none of these
V , where  is coefficient of the viscosity and Q
 84. If two soap bubbles of different radii are connected by a
is : tube
(a) 8 (b) 1/8 (a) air flows from the bigger bubble to the smaller bubble
(c) 16 (d) 1/16 till the sizes become equal
78. Two capillary tubes of the same length but different radii (b) air flows from bigger bubble to the smaller bubble till
r1 and r2 are fitted in parallel to the bottom of a vessel. The the sizes are interchanged
pressure head is p. What should be the radius of a single
tube that can replace the two tubes so that the rate of flow (c) air flows from the smaller bubble to the bigger
is same as before ? (d) there is no flow of air.
r1r1 85. Which of the following is not the unit of surface tension?
(a) r1 + r2 (b) r  r (a) Newton/metre (b) Joule/(metre)2
1 2
(c) kg/(second)2 (d) 3Watt/metre
r1  r2 86. Surface tension is due to
(c) (d) None of these
2
(a) friction forces between molecules
79. A viscous fluid is flowing through a cylindrical tube. The
(b) cohesive forces between molecules
velocity distribution of the fluid is best represented by
the diagram (c) adhesive forces between molecules
(d) gravitational forces
87. A 20 cm long capillary tube is dipped in water. The water
(a) (b) rises upto 8 cm. If the entire arrangement is put in a freely
falling elevator, the length of water column in the capillary
tube will be
(a) 8 cm (b) 10 cm
(c) 4 cm (d) 20 cm
FLUIDS MECHANICS 30
88. The spiders and insects move and run on the surface of 95. The work done to break up a drop of a liquid of radius R
water without sinking, because and surface tension  into eight drops, all of the same size, is
2 2
(a) elastic membrane is formed on water due to property of (a) 4R (b) 2R
surface tension
1 2 1 2
(b) spiders and insects are lighter (c) R (d) R
2 4
(c) spiders and insects swim on water
96. Water is flowing at a speed of 1.5 ms–1 through a horizontal
(d) spiders and insects experience upthrust
tube of cross-sectional area 10–2m2 and you are trying to
89. Small droplets of liquid are usually more spherical in shape
than larger drops of the same liquid because stop the flow by your palm. Assuming that the water stops
immediately after hitting the palm, the minimum force that
(a) force of surface tension is equal and opposite to the
force of gravity you must exert should be (density of water = 103 kgm–3).
(b) force of surface tension predominates the force of (a) 15 N (b) 22.5 N
gravity (c) 33.7 N (d) 45 N
(c) force of gravity predominates the force of surface 97. Two water droplets coalesce to form a large drop. In this
tension process,
(d) force of gravity and force of surface tension act in the (a) energy is liberated
same direction and are equal
(b) energy is absorbed
90. Hair of shaving brush cling together when it is removed
(c) energy is neither liberated nor absorbed
from water due to
(a) force of attraction between hair (d) a small amount of mass is converted into energy in
accordance with Einstein’s mass-energy equivalence
(b) surface tension 2
relation E = mc .
(c) viscosity of water 6
98. A mercury drop of radius 1 cm is sprayed into 10 drops of
(d) characteristic property of hair
equal size. The energy expended in joule is (surface tension
91. A square frame of side L is dipped in a liquid. On taking –3
of mercury is 460 × 10 Nm )
–1
out, a membrane is formed. If the surface tension of the

(a) 0.057 (b) 5.7
liquid is T, then force acting on one side of the frame will –4 –6
be: (c) 5.7 × 10 (d) 5.7 × 10
(a) 8 TL (b) 4 TL 99. If work W is done in blowing a bubble of radius R from
soap solution, then the work done in blowing a bubble of
TL radius 2R from the same solution is
(c) TL (d)
2 (a) W/2 (b) 2W
92. Water does not wet an oily glass, because
1
(a) cohesive force of oil > adhesive force between oil and (c) 4W (d) 2 W
glass 3
(b) cohesive force of oil > cohesive force of water 100. If two soaps bubbles of equal radii r coalesce, then the
(c) oil repels water radius of curvature of interface between two bubble will
(d) cohesive force of water > adhesive force between water be:
and oil molecules (a) r (b) 0
93. If the surface tension of soap solution is , what is the (c) infinity (d) r/2
work done in blowing soap bubble of radius r ? 101. A glass plate is partly dipped vertically in the mercury and
2 2
(a) r  (b) 2r  angle of contact is measured. If the plate is inclined, then
2 2
(c) 4r  (d) 8r  the angle of contact will
94. The average mass of rain drops is 3.0×10–5 kg and their (a) increase (b) remain unchanged
average terminal velocity is 9 m/s. Calculate the energy (c) increase or decrease (d) decrease
transferred by rain to each square metre of the surface at 102. A liquid wets a solid completely. The meniscus of the liquid
a place which receives 100 cm of rain in a year. in a sufficiently long tube is
(a) 4.05 ×104 J (b) 3.5 ×105 J
(a) flat (b) concave
(c) 9.0 ×104 J (d) 3.0 ×105 J (c) convex (d) cylindrical
FLUIDS MECHANICS 31
103. If two soap bubble of different radii are in communication 108. Water rises to a height of 30 mm in a capilary tube. If the
with each other
3
(a) air flow from larger bubble into the smaller one radius of the capillary tube is made th of its previous
4
(b) the size of the bubbles remains the same value. The height to which the water will rise in the tube is:
(c) air flows from the smaller bubble into the large one and (a) 30 mm (b) 20 mm
the larger bubble grows at the expense of the smaller one
(c) 40 mm (d) 10 mm
(d) None of the above
109. When two capillary tubes of different diameters are dipped
104. The excess pressure due to surface tension in a spherical vertically, then rise of the liquid is:
liquid drop of radius r is directly proportional to
(a) same in both the tubes
(a) r (b) r2
(b) more in the tube of larger diameter
(c) r–1 (d) r–2
(c) less in the tube of smaller diameter
105. The excess pressure across a soap bubble of radius r is
(d) more in the tube of smaller diameter
p = 4/r, where  is the surface tension of soap solution.
What is the excess pressure across an air bubble of the 110. Water rises to a height h in a capillary tube held vertically
same radius r formed inside a container of soap solution ? in a beaker containing water. If the capillary tube is inclined
at an angle 30° with the water surface, the length to which
 2 water rises in the capillary will be
(a) (b)
r r (a) h/2 (b) h
4 2h
(c) (d) none of these (c) (d) 2h
r 3
106. Two soap bubbles of radii r1 and r2 equal to 4cm and 5cm 111. Two parallel glass plates are dipped partly in the liquid of
are touching each other over a common surface S1S2 density d keeping them vertical. If the distance between
(shown in figure). Its radius will be : the plates is x surfazce tension for the liquids is T and
angle of contact , then rise of liquid between the plates
due to capillary will be :
T cos  2T cos 
(a) (b) xdg
xd
2T T cos 
(c) xdg cos  (d) xdg
(a) 4 cm (b) 20 cm
(c) 5 cm (d) 4.5 cm
112. Water rises up to 10 cm height in a long capillary tube. If
CAPILLARY RISE OR FALL this tube is immersed in water so that the height above the
water surface is only 8 cm, then
107. If a capillary tube is dippped into liquid and the levels of (a) water flows out continuously from the upper end
the liquid inside and outside are same, then the angle of
(b) water rises upto upper end and forms a spherical surface
contact is :
(a) 0° (b) 90° (c) water only rises upto 6 cm height
(c) 45° (d) 30° (d) water does not rise at all
FLUIDS MECHANICS 32
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
1. A small spherical ball of radius r falls freely under gravity 5. A pendulum clock loses 12 s a day if the temperature is
through a distance h before entering a tank of water. If, 40°C and gains 4s in a day if the temperature is 20°C. The
after entering the water, the velocity of the ball does not temperature at which the clock will show correct time, and
change, then h is proportional to (2015) the coefficient of linear expansion () of the metal of the
(a) r2 (b) r3 pendulum shaft are, respectively. (2016)
(c) r4 (d) r5 (a) 25°C,  = 1.85 × 10–5/°C
2. A cylindrical block of wood (density = 650 kg m-3), of base (b) 60°C,  = 1.85 × 10–4/°C
area 30 cm2 and height 54 cm, floats in a liquid of density (c) 30°C,  = 1.85 × 10–3/°C
900 kg m-3. The block is depressed slightly and then (d) 55°C,  = 1.85 × 10–2/°C
released. The time period of the resulting oscillations of
6. The temperature of an open room of volume 30 m3 increases
the block would be equal to that of a simple pendulum of
from 170C to 270C due to the sunshine. The atmospheric
length (nearly) : (2015)
(a) 52 cm (b) 65 cm pressure in the room remains 1 105 Pa . If ni and n f are
(c) 39 cm (d) 26 cm the number of molecules in the room before and after
3. The excess pressure across a soap bubble of radius r is p heating, then n f  ni will: (2017)
= 4/r, where  is the surface tension of soap solution.
What is the excess pressure across an air bubble of the (a) 1.61  1023 (b) 1.38  10 23
same radius r formed inside a container of soap solution ?
(c) 2.5 1025 (d) 2.5  1025
 2
(a) (b) (2015) 7. A copper ball of mass 100 gm is at a temperature T. It is
r r
dropped in a copper calorimeter of mass 100 gm, filled
with 170 gm of water at room temperature. Subsequently,
4
(c) (d) none of these the temperature of the system is found to be 750C. T is
r
given by :
4. Which of the following option correctly describes the (Given : Room temperature = 300C, Specific heat of copper
variation of the speed v and acceleration ‘a’ of a point = 0.1 cal/gm0C) (2017)
mass falling vertically in a viscous medium that applies a
(a) 885°C (b) 1250°C
force F =”kv, where ‘k’ is a constant, on the body ? (Graphs
are schematic and not drawn to scale) (c) 825°C (d) 800°C
(2016) 8. An external pressure P is applied on a cube at 00C so that

it is equally compressed from all sides. K is the bulk
modulus of the material of the cube and  is its coefficient
of linear expansion. Suppose we want to bring the cube to
(a) (b) its original size by heating. The temperature should be
raised by : (2017)
P P
(a) (b)
3 K K
(c) (d)
3
(c) (d) 3PK 
PK
FLUIDS MECHANICS 33
9. The following observations were taken for determining 13. A small soap bubble of radius 4 cm is trapped inside
surface tension T of water by capillary method : diameter another bubble of radius 6 cm without any contact. Let P2
of capillary, D = 1.25 × 10–2 m rise of water, h = 1.45×10–2 m. be the pressure inside the inner bubble and P0, the pressure
Using g = 9.80 m/s 2 and the simplified relation outside the outer bubble. Radius of another bubble with
pressure difference P2-P0 between its inside and outside
rhg
T 103 N / m, the possible error in surface tension would be: (2018)
2
(a) 12 cm (b) 2.4 cm
is closest to: (2017)
(c) 6 cm (d) 4.8 cm
(a) 10% (b) 0.15%
(c) 1.5% (d) 2.4% 14. A boy’s catapult is made of rubber cord which is 42 cm
long, with 6 mm diameter of cross-section and of negligible
10. Two tubes of radii r 1 and r 2, and lengths l 1 and l 2, mass. The boy keeps a stone weighing 0.02 kg on it and
respectively, are connected in series and a liquid flows stretches the cord by 20 cm by applying a constant force.
through each of them in steam line conditions P1 & P2 are When released, the stone flies off with a velocity of 20 ms1.
pressure differences across the two tubes. Neglect the change in the area of cross-section of the
cord while stretched. The Young’s modulus of rubber is
1
If P2 is 4P1 and l2 is , then the radius r2 will be equal to: closest to: (2019)
4
(a) 106 N/m–2 (b) 104 N/m–2
(2017)
(c) 108 N/m–2 (d) 103 N/m–2
(a) r1 (b) 2r1
15. Water from a pipe is coming at a rate of 100 litres per
r1 minute. If the radius of the pipe is 5 cm, the Reynolds
(c) 4r1 (d) number for the flow is of the order of: (density of water =
2
1000 kg/m3, coefficient of viscosity of water = 1 mPa s)
11. A thin uniform tube is bent into a circle of radius r in the
(2019)
vertical plane. Equal volumes of two immiscible liquids,
3 4
(a) 10 (b) 10
whose densities are 1 and 2  1 > 2  , fill half the 2
(c) 10 (d) 106
circle. The angle  between the radius vector passing
16. If ‘M’ is the mass of water that rises in a capillary tube of
through the common interface and the vertical is : radius ‘r’, then mass of water which will rise in a capillary
(2018) tube of radius ‘2r’ is: (2019)
  M
(a)  = tan -1   1  (b)  = tan -1   2  (a) M (b)
2
 2  2  1 
(c) 4 M (d) 2 M
-1     -    -1   1 + 2  4
(c)  = tan   1 2   (d)  = tan   17. A wooden block floating in a bucket of water has of its
 2  1 + 2   2  1 - 2  5
volume submerged. When certain amount of an oil poured
12. When an air bubble of radius r rises from the bottom to into the bucket, it is found that the block is just under the
5r oil surface with half of its volume under water and half in
the surface of a lake, its radius becomes . Taking the oil. The density of oil relative to that of water is:
4
atmospheric pressure to be equal to 10 m height of water (2019)
column, the depth of the lake would approximately be (a) 0.5 (b) 0.8
(igno re the sur face tension and the effect of (c) 0.6 (d) 0.7
temperature) : (2018 )
18. A cylinder with fixed capacity of 67.2 lit contains helium
(a) 11.2 m (b) 8.7 m gasat STP. The amount of heat needed to raise the
(c) 9.5 m (d) 10.5 m temperatureof the gas by 20°C is closest to (in J): [Given
that R = 8.31 J mol-1 K-1] (2019)
FLUIDS MECHANICS 34
19. A cubical block of side 0.5 m floats on water with 30% of 24. Water flows into a large tank with flat bottom at the rate of
its volume under water. What is the maximum weight that 10–4m3s–1 Water is also leaking out of a hole of area 1 cm2 at
can be put on the block without fully submerging it under its bottom. If the height of the water in the tank remains
3 3 steady, then this height (in cm) is:
water? (Take, density of water  10 kg / m ] (2019)
(2019)
(a) 46.3 kg (b) 87.5 kg 25. A long cylindrical vessel is half filled with a liquid. When
(c) 65.4 kg (d) 30.1 kg the vessel is rotated about its own vertical axis, the liquid
20. A submarine experiences a pressure of 5.05  106 Pa at rises up near the wall. If the radius of vessel is 5 cm and its
rotational speed is 2 rotations per second, then the
depth of d1in a sea. When it goes further to a depth of d2it
difference in the heights between the centre and the sides,
experiences a pressure of 8.08  106 Pa. Then d2 – d1 is in cm, will be
(2019)
approximately (density of water  103 kg / m3 and
(a) 2.0 (b) 0.1
acceleration due to gravity  10 ms 2 ): (2019) (c) 0.4 (d) 1.2
26. A soap bubble, blown by a mechanical pump at the mouth
(a) 300 m (b) 400 m of a tube, increases in volume, with time, at a constant
(c) 600 m (d) 500 m rate. The time dependence of pressure inside the bubble
21. Water from a tap emerges vertically downwards with an is given by :
initial speed of 1.0 ms–1The cross-sectional area of the tap (2019)
is 10–4m2. Assume that the pressure is constant throughout
(a)  t 2 (b)  t –3
the stream of water and that the flow is streamlined. The
cross-sectional area of the stream, 0.15 m below the tap –
1
1
would be: [Take g = 10ms–2] (c)  t 3 (d) 
t
(2019)
27. A cylindrical vessel containing a liquid is rotated about
(a) 2 105 m 2 (b) 5 105 m 2 its axis so that the liquid rises at its sides as shown in the
(c) 5 104 m2 (d) 1105 m2 figure. The radius of vessel is 5 cm an and the angular
22. A solid sphere, of radius R acquires a terminal velocity v1 speed of rotation is  rad s 1. The difference in the height,
when falling (due to gravity) through a viscous fluid h (in cm) of liquid at the centre of vessel and at the side
havinga coefficient of viscosity  . The sphere is broken will be : (2020)
into 27 identical solid spheres. If each of these spheres
acquires a terminal velocity, v2, when falling through the
 v1 
same fluid, the ratio  v  equals: (2019)
 2
1
(a) 9 (b)
27
1
(c) (d) 27
9
23. The top of a water tank is open to air and its water level is
maintained. It is giving out 0.74m3 water per minute through
a circular opening of 2 cm radius in its wall. The depth of
the centre of the opening from the level of water in the
tank is close to: 52 22
(a) (b)
(2019) 2g 25g
(a) 6.0 m (b) 4.8 m
(c) 9.6 m (d) 2.9 m 252 22
(c) (d)
2g 5g
FLUIDS MECHANICS 35
28. A capillary tube made of glass of radius 0.15 mm is dipped 34. In an experiment to verify Stokes law, a small spherical
vertically in a beaker filled with methylene iodide (surface ball of radius r and density  falls under gravity through
tension = 0.05 Nm–1, density = 667 kg m–3) which rises to
a distance h in air before entering a tank of water. If the
height h in the tube. It is observed that the two tangents
terminal velocity of the ball inside water is same as its
drawn from liquid-glass interfaces (from opp. Sides of the
capillary) make an angle of 60º with one another. Then h is velocity just before entering the water surface, then the
close to (g = 10 ms–2). (2020) value of h is proportional to : (ignore viscosity of air)
(a) 0.172 m (b) 0.049m (2020)
(c) 0.087 m (d) 0.137 m (a) r 4
(b) r
29. Pressure inside two soap bubbles are 1.01 and 1.02 (c) r 3
(d) r2
atmosphere, respectively. The ratio of their volumes is :
35. A fluid is flowing through a horizontal pipe of varying
(2020)
cross-section, with speed v ms-1 at a point where the
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 2 : 1
pressure is P pascal. At another point where pressure is
(c) 0.8 : 1 (d) 8 : 1
30. When a long glass capillary tube of radius 0.015 cm is P
Pascal its speed is V ms-1. If the density of the fluid is
dipped in a liquid, the liquid rises to a height of 15 cm 2
within it. If the contact angle between the liquid and glass kg m-3 and the flow is streamline, then V is equal to :
to close to 0º, the surface tension of the liquid, in milli
Newton m–1, is (2020)
[(liquid)  900 kgm 3 , g  10 ms2 ] (Give answer in P P

(a)  v2 (b)  v2
closest integer) ……….. . 2 
(2020)
31. An air bubble of radius 1 cm in water has an upward 2P P
acceleration 9.8 cm s-2. The density of water is 1 gm cm-3 (c)  v2 (d) v
 
and water offers negligible drag force on the bubble. The
mass of the bubble is (g = 980 cm/s2). 36. An ideal fluid flows (laminar flow) through a pipe of non-
(2020) uniform diameter. The maximum and minimum diameters of
(a) 1.52 gm (b) 4.51 gm the pipes are 6.4cm and 4.8cm, respectively. The ratio of
(c) 3.15 gm (d) 4.15 gm minimum and maximum velocities of fluid in this pipe is
32. A cube of metal is subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of (2020)
4 GPa. The percentage changein the length of the side of
the cube is close to : 3 9
(Given bulk modulus of metal, B = 8 × 1010 Pa) (a) (b)
2 16
(2020)
(a) 0.6 (b) 20 3 3
(c) 1.67 (d) 5 (c) (d)
4 2
33. A hollow spherical shell at outer radius R floats just
submerged under the water surface. The inner radius of 37. A leak proof cylinder of length 1 m, made of metal which
the shell is r. If the specific gravity of the shell material is has very low coefficient of expansion is floating in water
at 0o C such that its height above the water surface is 20
27
w.r.t water, the value of r is : (2020) cm. When the temperature of water is increases to 4o C,
8
the height of the cylinder above the water surface becomes
4 8 21 cm. The density of water at T = 4oC relative to the
(a) R (b) R density at T=0o C is close to
9 9
(2020)
1 2
(c) R (d) R (a) 1.01 (b) 1.03
3 3
(c) 1.26 (d) 1.04
FLUIDS MECHANICS 36
38. Consider a solid sphere of density 40. An ideal liquid (water) flowing through a tube of non-
uniform cross-sectional area,where area at A and B are 40
 r2 
  r   0 1   , 0  r  R . The minimum density of a cm2 and 20 cm2respectively. If pressure differencebetween
 R2 
A & B is 700 N/m2, then volume flow rate is (density of
liquid in which it floatisjust (2020) water = 1000kgm–3) (2020)
2 2
(a) 0 (b) 0
5 3
0 0
(c) (d)
5 3
39. Two liquids of density 1 and  2   2  2 1  are filled up (a) 2720 cm3/s (b) 2420 cm3/s
behind a square wall of side 10 as shown in figure. Each (c) 1810 cm3/s (d) 3020 cm3/s
liquid has a height of 5 . The ratio of forces due to these 41. A small spherical droplet of densityd is floating exactly
liquids exerted on the upper part MN to that at the lower half immersed in a liquid of density  and surface tension
part NO is (Assume that the liquids are not mixing)
T. The radius of droplet is (take note that the surface
(2020)
tension applied an upward force on droplet)
(2020)
2T T
(a) r  3    d  g (b) r    d  g
2 1
(a) (b)
3 2 T 3T
1 1 (c) r  d    g (d) r   2d    g
(c) (d)
4 3
FLUIDS MECHANICS 37
EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Single Correct Options 4. A beaker containing water is placed on the platform of a
1. A cube of mass m and density D is suspended form the spring balance. The balance reads 1.5 kg. A stone of mass
3
point P by a spring of stiffness k. The system is kept 0.5 kg and density 500 kg/m is immersed in water without
inside a beaker filled with a liquid of density d. The touching the walls of the beaker. What will be the balance
elongation in the spring, assuming D > d, is reading now?
(a) 2 kg (b) 2.5 kg
(c) 1 kg (d) 3 kg
5. An ornament weighing 36 g in air weighs only 34 g in
water. Assuming that some copper is mixed with gold to
prepare the ornament, find the amount of copper in it.
Specific gravity of gold is 19.3 and that of copper is 8.9.
(a) 2.2 g (b) 4.4 g
mg  d mg  D  (c) 1.1 g (d) 3.6 g

(a) 1   (b) 1  
k  D k  d 6. A uniform cylinder of length L and mass M having cross-
mg  d sectional area A is suspended, with its length vertical from
(c) 1   (d) none of these a fixed point by a massless spring such that it is half
k  D 
submerged in a liquid of density  at equilibrium position.
2. A cubical block of steel of each side equal to  is floating
on mercury in a vessel. The densities of steel and mercury The extension x0 of the spring when it is in equilibrium is
and s and m. The height of the block above the mercury
level is given by
Mg Mg  LA 
      (a) (b) 1  
(a)  1  s  (b)  1  s  k k  M 
  m    m 
      Mg  LA  Mg  LA 
(c)  1  m  (d)  1  m  (c) 1   (d) 1  
  k  2M  k  M 
 s   s 
3. The tension in a string holding a solid block below the 7. A long metal rod of length  and relative density  is held
surface of a liquid (where liquid > block) as in shown in the vertically with its lower end just touching the surface of
figure is T when the system is at rest. water. The speed of the rod when it just sinks in water is
given by
(a) 2g (b) 2g
 1 
(c) 2g 1   (d) 2g  2  1
 2 
8. A large block of ice 5m thick has a vertical hole drilled
Then what will be the tension in the string if the system
through it and is floating in the middle of a lake. The
has upward acceleration a?
minimum length of the rope required to scoop up bucket
 a  a full of water through the hole is
(a) T 1   (b) T 1  
 g  g (the relative density of ice = 0.9)
a  a (a) 1 m (b) 0.9 m
(c) T   1 (d) g T (c) 0.5 m (d) 0.45 m
g 
FLUIDS MECHANICS 38
–3
9. Two identical cylindrical vessels, each of base area A, 14. A vessel contains oil of density 0.8 gcm floating over
–3
have their bases at the same horizontal level. They contain mercury of density 13.6 gcm . A homogeneous sphere
a liquid of density . In one vessel the height of the liquid floats with half its volume immersed in mercury and the
is h1 and in the other h2 > h1. When the two vessels are –3
other half in oil. The density of the sphere in gcm is
connected, the work done by gravity in equalizing the
(a) 3.3 (b) 6.4
levels is
(a) 2 Ag (h2 – h1)
2
(b) Ag (h2 – h1)
2 (c) 7.2 (d) 12.8
1 2 1 2
15. Water from a tap emerges vertically downwards with an
(c) Ag  h 2  h1  (d) Ag  h 2  h1  –1
initial speed of 1.0 ms . The cross-sectional area of the
2 4
–4 2
tap is 10 m . Assume that the pressure is constant
10. Two bodies with volumes V and 2V are equalized on a
throughout the stream of water and that the flow is steady.
balance. The larger body is then immersed in oil of density
The cross-sectional area of the stream 0.15 m below the
d1 = 0.9 g/cm3 while the smaller body is immersed in another –2
tap is (take g = 10 ms )
liquid when it is found that the equilibrium of the balance –4 2 –5 2
is not disturbed. The density of the second liquid is then: (a) 5.0 × 10 m (b) 1.0 × 10 m
–5 2 –5 2
(a) 2.4 g/cm3 (b) 1.8 g/cm3 (c) 5.0 × 10 m (d) 2.0 × 10 m
16. A cubical block of wood of specific gravity 0.5 and a chunk
(c) 0.45 g/cm3 (d) 2.7 g/cm3
of concrete of specific gravity 2.5 are fastened together.
11. If a sample of metal weighs 210 g in air, 180 g in water and
The ratio of mass of wood to the mass of concrete which
120 g in a liquid:
makes the combination to float with its entire volume
(i) RD of metal is 3 (ii) RD of metal is 7 submerged in water is:
(iii) RD of liquid is 3 (iv) RD of liquid is (1/3) (a) 1/5 (b) 1/3
(a) (i, ii) (b) (i, iii)
(c) 3/5 (d) 2/5
(c) (ii, iv) (d) (ii, iii)
17. The figure shows a liquid of density  flowing through a
12. In a test experiment on a model aeroplane in a wind tunnel, tube with velocity v. The h1 and h2 are the heights of liquid
the flow speeds on the lower and upper surfaces of the in the straight and L-shaped tubes, respectively. Choose
wing are v and 2 V respectively. If the density of air is the correct statements.
 and the surface area of the wing is A, the dynamic lift on

the wing is given by
1 1 2
(a) v 2 A (b) v A
2 2
2
(c) 2 v A (d) 2 v 2 A .
(a) The pressure at the point A is gh1
13. The cylindrical tube of a spray pump has a radius R, one (b) The pressure at the point B is gh2
end of which has n fine holes, each of radius r. If the speed
of flow of the liquid in the tube is V, the speed of ejection (c) The velocity of flow is, v  2gh 2
of the liquid through the holes is
(d) The velocity of flow is, v  2g  h 2  h1 
1/ 2
VR VR
(a)   (b)   18. A ball is made of a material of density  where oil <  <
nr n r 
water with oil and water representing the densities of oil
and water, respectively. The oil and water are immiscible.
3/ 2 2
VR VR If the above ball is in equilibrium in mixture of this oil and
(c)   (d)  
nr  nr  water, which of the following pictures represents its
equilibrium position ?
FLUIDS MECHANICS 39
(a) Water will rise above A in the capillary

(b) Water will fall below A in the capillary tube
Water Oil (c) There will be no effect on the level of water in the
capillary tube.
(a) (b) (d) Air will emerge from end B in the form of bubbles.
Oil Water 22. There is a circular tube in a vertical plane. Two liquids
which do not mix and of densities d1 and d2 are filled in the
tube. Each liquid subtends 90° angle at centre. Radius
joining their interface makes an angle  with vertical.
Water d1
Oil Ratio d is :
2
(c) (d)
Oil Water
19. In a cylindrical water tank there are two small holes Q and
P on the wall at a depth of h1 form upper level of water and
at a height of h2 from the lower end of the tank respectively
as shown in the figure. Water coming out from both the
holes strike the ground at the same point. The ratio of h1
1  cos  1  tan 
and h2 is (a) (b)
1  cos  1  tan 
(a) 1 (b) 2
1  sin  1  sin 
(c) > 1 (d) < 1 (c) (d)
1  cos  1  sin 
20. An open glass tube is immersed in mercury in such a way 23. Tanks A and B open at the top contain two different liquids
that a length of 8 cm extends above the mercury level. The upto certain height in them. A hole is made to the wall of
open end of the tube is then closed and sealed and the each tank at a depth ‘h’ from the surface of the liquid. The
tube is raised vertically up by additional 46 cm. What will area of the hole in A is twice that of in B. If the liquid mass
be length of the air column above mercury in the tube flux through each hole is equal, then the ratio of the densities
now? of the liquids respectively, is
(Atmospheric pressure - 76 cm of Hg) (a) 2/1 (b) 3/2
(a) 22 cm (b) 38 cm (c) 2/3 (d) 1/2
(c) 6 cm (d) 16 cm 24. The velocity of the liquid coming out of a small hole of a
vessel containing two different liquids of densities 2 and
21. Water stands at level A in the arrangement shown in figure. as shown in the figure is
What will happen if a jet of air is gently blown into the
horizontal tube in the direction shown in the figure ?
(a) 6gh (b) 2 gh
(c) 2 2gh (d) gh

FLUIDS MECHANICS 40
25. Figure shows two holes in a wide tank containing a liquid 30. The limbs of a glass U-tube are lowered into vessels A and
column. The water streams coming out of these holes strike B, A containing water. Some air is pumped out through the
the ground at the same point. The height of liquid column top of the tube C. The liquid in the left hand limb A and the
in the tank is right hand limb B rise to heights of 10 cm and 12 cm
respectively. The density of liquid B is:
(a) 10 cm (b) 8 cm
(c) 9.8 cm (d) 980 cm
26. Two communicating vessels contain mercury. The diameter
of one vessel is four times larger than the diameter of the
other. A column of water of height h0 = 70 cm is poured
into the left hand vessel (the narrower one). How much (a) 0.75 g/cm3 (b) 0.83 g/cm3
will be mercury level rise in the right hand vessel? (Specific (c) 1.2 g/cm3 (d) 0.25 g/cm3
density of mercury = 13.6)
(a) 0.3 cm (b) 0.7 cm 31. A capillary tube is immersed vertically in water and the
height of the water column is x. When this arrangement is
(c) 0.1 cm (d) 1.0 cm
taken into a mine of depth d, the height of the water column
27. Two capillary tubes A and B of radii ra and rb and lengths a is y. If R is the radius of the earth, the ratio x/y is
and b respectively are held horizontally. The volume of
(a) (1 – d/R) (b) (1 + d/R)
water flowing per second through tube A is Qa when the
(c) (R – d/R + d) (d) (R + d/R – d)
pressure difference across its ends is maintained at P.
When the same pressure difference is maintained across 32. If a number of identical droplets of water, each of radius r,
tube B, the volume of water flowing per second through it coalesce to form a single drop of radius R, the resulting
is Qb. The ratio Qa/Qb is rise in the temperature of water is given by (here  is the
density of water, s its specific heat and  its surface tension)
2
 r   r 
(a) b  a  (b) b  a   1 1  3  1 1 
 a  rb   a  rb  (a)    (b)   
s  r R  s  r R 
3 4
  ra   r   1 1  3  1 1 
(c) b   (d) b  a  (c)    (d)   
a  rb   a  rb  s  r R  s  r R 
28. A U-tube is partially filled with water. Oil, which does not 33. When at rest, a liquid stands at the same level in the tubes
mix with water, is next poured into one side until water as shown in the figure. But as indicated, a height difference
rises by 25 cm on the other side. If the density of oil be 0.8, h occurs when the system is given an acceleration a
the oil level will stand higher than the water level by: towards the right. Then h is equal to
(a) 6.25 cm (b) 12.50 cm
(c) 31.25 cm (d) 20 cm
29. Two capillary tubes A and B of equal radii ra = rb = r and
equal lengths a = b =  are held horizontally. When the
same pressure difference P is maintained across each tube,
the rate of flow of water in each is Q. If the tubes are
connected in series and the same pressure difference P is
maintained across the combination, the rate of flow through aL gL
the combination will be (a) (b)
2g 2a
(a) Q/2 (b) Q
gL aL
(c) 2Q (d) none of these (c) (d)
a g
FLUIDS MECHANICS 41
34. A tiny sphere of mass m nad density x is dropped in a tall jar 37. A siphon tube is used to remove liquid from a container as
of glycerine of density y. When the sphere acquires terminal shown in the figure.
velocity, the magnitude of the viscious force acting on it is
(a) mgx/y (b) mgy/x
(c) mg (1 – y/x) (d) mg (1 + x/y)
35. Two immiscible liquids P and Q of different densities are
contained in a wide U-tube as shown in fig. The heights of
the two liquids above the horizontal line XX` which cuts
the boundary between the liquids are H P and H Q
respectively. The U-tube is transported to a planet where
the acceleration of free fall is 2/3 that on the earth, where
the liquids do not evaporate and where the heights of If the tube is initially filled with liquid, then the speed of
liquid (measured relative to XX`) are hP and hQ respectively. the liquid through the siphon is
Which of the given statements is correct? (a) 2gy (b) 2g  h  y 
(c) 2g  H  h  y  (d) none of the above
38. Water is flowing continuously from a tap having an internal

–3
diameter 8 × 10 m. The velocity as it leaves the tap is
–1
0.4 ms . The water diameter of the water stream at a
–1
distance 2 × 10 m below the tap is close to
–3 –3
(a) 7.5 × 10 m (b) 9.6 × 10 m
–3 –3
(c) 3.6 × 10 m (d) 5.0 × 10 m
2
39. A tank with a square base of area 2.0 m is divided into two
(a) The liquid levels are unchanged, i.e.,
compartments by a vertical partition in the middle. There is
hP = HP and hQ = HQ 2
a small hinged door of face area 20 cm at the bottom of the
(b) Both liquid levels rise up so that hP/HP = hQ/HQ partition. Water is filled in one compartment and an acid of
(c) Both liquid levels rise up so that h P - h Q relative density 1.5 in the other, both to a height of 4 m. If
–2
= HP - H Q g = 10 ms , the force necessary to keep the door closed is
(a) 10 N (b) 20 N
(d) The liquid P falls and liquid Q rises such that
(c) 40 N (d) 80 N
hP 2 HP
 40. In the diagram shown, the difference in the two tubes of
hQ 3 HQ the manometer is 5 cm, the cross section of the tube at A
and B is 6 mm2 and 10 mm2 respectively. The rate at which
36. A cylindrical vessel filled with water is released on an water flows through the tube is :
inclined surface of angle  as shown in the figure. The
(g = 10 ms–2)
friction coefficient of surface with vessel is  (< tan ).
Then the constant angle made by the surface of water
with the incline will be
–1 –1 (a) 10.0 cc/s (b)8.0 cc/s

(a) tan  (b)  – tan 
–1 –1 (c) 7.5 cc/s (d) 12.5 cc/s
(c)  + tan  (d) cot 
FLUIDS MECHANICS 42
Multiple Correct Options 44. Equal volumes of liquid are poured in the three vessels A,
B and C (h1 < h2 < h3). All the vessels have same base area.
41. The figure shows a container filled with a liquid of density
Select the correct alternatives.
. Four points A, B, C and D lie on the vertices of a vertical
square. Points A and C lie on a vertical line and points B
and D lies on a horizontal line. Choose the correct
statement(s) about the pressure at the four points.
(a) The force on the base will be maximum in vessel A.
(b) The force on the base will be maximum in vessel C.
(c) Net force exerted by the liquid in all the three vessels is
equal.
(d) Net force exerted by the liquid in vessel A is maximum.
45. If the velocity head of a stream of water is equal to 10 cm
then its speed of flow is approximately
(a) pD = pB (b) PA < pB = pD < pC (a) 1.0 m/s (b) 1.4 m/s
pC  p A pC  pA (c) 140 m/s (d) 10 m/s
(c) p D  pB  (d) p D  pB 
2 2 46. A circular cylinder of radius r and height H is filled with
42. The vessel shown in the figure has two sections of areas water to a height 2/3 H. It starts rotating about its axis with
of cross section A1 and A2. A liquid of density  fills both constantly increasing angular speed. Choose the correct
the sections, up to a height h in each. Neglect atmospheric alternatives.
pressure.
A1
h
X
A2
(a) At all speeds, shape of the free surface is parabolloid.
h
(b) The free surface touches first the brim of cylinder and
then the base of the cylinder.
(c) The free surface cannot touch the base without
spilling water
(a) The pressure at the base of the vessel is 2hg.
(d) The free surface touches the brim as well as base at
(b) The force exerted by the liquid on the base of the the same instant.
vessel is 2hgA2.
47. A spherical pot is more than half filled with water as shown
(c) The weight of the liquid is < 2hgA2. in the figure. Choose the correct statement(s) about the
(d) The walls of the vessel at the level X exert a downward forces exerted by water on the pot.
force hg(A2–A1) on the liquid.
43. Water flows steadily through a horizontal pipe of a variable
cross-section. If the pressure of water is p at a point where
the velocity of flow is v, what is the pressure at another
point where the velocity of flow is 2v;  being the density
of water ? (a) It is always normal to the surface of pot.
(b) Everywhere it acts in the downward direction.
3 2 3 2 (c) The net horizontal force on the pot is zero.
(a)    v (b)    v
2 2
(d) The net vertical force on the pot is in the downward
2 2
(c)  – 2v (d)  + 2v direction.
FLUIDS MECHANICS 43
48. A tank is filled to a height H. The range of water coming 51. The figure shows a siphon tube removing liquid from a
out of a hole which is a depth H/4 from the surface of container. Choose the correct statements.
water level is
2H 3H
(a) (b)
3 2
3H
(c) 3H (d)
4
49. A wall of length  supports water to a height has shown (a) The siphon tube removes liquid only when h1 > 0
figure. Choose the correct statement(s). Take  as the
density of water. (b) The velocity of flow is v  2g  h1  h 2 
(c) The pressure at the point B is pB = p0 – gh3

(d) The pressure at the point D is p0
52. A tank is filled upto a height h with a liquid and is placed
on a platform of height h from the ground. To get maximum
range xm a small hole is punched at a distance of y from the
free surface of the liquid. Then
(a) The force exerted by water on the wall per unit length
2
is 1/2 gH 
2
(b) The force exerted by water on the wall is 1/2 gH 
(c) The point of application of the resultant force acts
2H/3 below the free surface.
(d) The point of application of the resultant force acts H/3
below the free surface.
50. The tank shown in figure has the base area ( × b). It is
(a) xm = 2 h (b) xm = 1.5 h
filled with a liquid of density  to a height H. Choose the
correct alternative (s). (c) y = h (d) y = 0.75 h
53. A cylindrical vessel of 90 cm height is kept filled up to the
brim. It has four holes 1, 2, 3 and 4 which are, repectively,
at height of 20 cm, 30 cm, 40 cm and 50 cm from the
horizontal floor PQ. The water falling at the maximum
horizontal distance from the vessel comes from
(a) The force at the base of the container is,
F = 1/2gH ( + 2H cot ) b.
(b) The horizontal component of the force acting on the
2
inclined wall is Fh = 1/2 gH b
(c) The vertical component of the force acting on the
1 2
inclined wall is Fv  gbH cos ec.
2 (a) hole number 4
(d) The vertical component of the force acting on the (b) hole number 3
(c) hole number 2
1
inclined wall is Fv  gbH 2 cot . (d) hole number 1
2
FLUIDS MECHANICS 44
54. A cylindrical vessel is filled with a liquid up to a height H. 57. A spherical solid ball of volume V is made of a material of
A small hole is made in the vessel at a distance y below, density 1. It is falling through a liquid of density 2.
the liquid surface as shown in figure. The liquid emerging (2 < 1). [Assume that the liquid applies a viscous
from the hole strike the ground at distance x force on the ball that is proportional to the square of
2
its speed , ie, Fviscous = –kv (k > 0). The terminal
speed of the ball is
Vg 1   2  Vg 1
(a) (b)
k k
(a) x is equal if hole is at depth y or H – y Vg 1 Vg (1   2 )

(c) (d)
H k k
(b) x is maximum for y 
2 58. A rectangular metal plate has dimensions of 10 cm × 20cm.
(c) Both (a) and (b) are correct A thin film of oil separates the plate from a fixed horizontal
(d) Both (c) and (d) are wrong surface. The separation between the rectangular plate and
the horizontal surface is 0.2 mm. An ideal string is attached
55. An open vessel containing liquid is moving with constant to the plate and passes over an ideal pulley to a mass m.
acceleration a on a levelled horizontal surface. For this When m = 125 g, the metal plate moves at constant speed
situation mark out the correct statement(s).
of 5 cm/s across the horizontal surface. Find the coefficient
–1 2 2
of viscosity of oil in 10 dyne-s/cm . [g = 10 m/s ]
(a) The maximum pressure is at the leftmost bottom corner.

(b) Along a horizontal line within the liquid as we move 59. The liquid in the capillary tube will rise, if the angle of
from left to right the pressure decreases. contact is
(c) The pressure at all points on a line making an angle of (a) 0° (b) 90°
a (c) obtuse (d) acute
tan 1   with horizontal would be same.
g 60. What is the excess pressure inside a bubble of soap solutions
(d) Along a horizontal line within the liquid as we move of radius 5.00 mm ? Given that the surface tension of soap
–2
from left to right, the pressure remains same. solution at the temperature (20°C) is 2.50 × 10 N/m. If an air
Integer Type Questions bubble of the same dimension were formed at a depth of 4.0
56. A tube with both ends open floats vertically in water. Oil cm inside a container containing soap solution (relative
3
with a density 800 kg/m is poured into the tube. The tube density 1.20), what would be the pressure inside the
–2 5
is filled with oil upto the top end while in equilibrium. The bubble (in 10 atm) ? (1 atm = 1.01 × 10 Pa)
length of the tube outside the water is 10 cm. Determine
the depth (in cm) upto which the oil will be filled in tube. ASSERTION REASON
(A) Statement I is true, Statement II is true and Statement II is
a correct explanation for Statemetn I.
(B) Statement I is true, Statement II is true and Statement II is
NOT the correct explanation for Statement I.
(C) Statement I is true, Statement II is false.
(D) Statement I is false, Statement II is true.
FLUIDS MECHANICS 45
61. Statement I : To float, a body must displace liquid whose 67. Statement I : In taking into account the fact that any object,
weight is greater than the actual weight of the body. which floats, must have an average density less than that
Statement II : The body will experience no net downward of water, during World War I, a number of cargo vessels
force, in the case of floating.
were made of concrete.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D Statement II : Concrete cargo vessels were filled with air.
62. Statement I : All the raindrops hit the surface of the earth (a) A (b) B
with the same constant velocity.
(c) C (d) D
Statement II : An object falling through a viscous medium
eventually attains a terminal velocity. Match the Column
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D 68. Match the column I and column II -
63. Statement I : Tiny drops of liquid resist deforming forces Column-I Column-II
better than bigger drops. (A) If the radius of soap bubble A is (P) 16 : 9
Statement II : Excess pressure inside a drop is directly fource times that of another soap
proportional to surface tension. bubble B, then the ratio of excess
(a) A (b) B pressuren (PB/PA) will be
(c) C (d) D 1/3
(B) If two small drops of mercury, each (Q) 2 : 1
64. Statement I : A block is immersed in a liquid inside a beaker,
of radius R coalesce to form a single
which is falling freely. Buoyant force acting on block is
zero. large drop, the ratio of the total surface
Statement II : In case of freely falling liquid there is no energy before and after change will be
pressure difference between any two points. (C) The enrgy required to blow a bubble (R) 4 : 1
of radius 4 cm and 3cm in the same
liquid is in the ratio of
(D) Two soap bubbles are blown. In the (S) 1 : 4
first bubble excess pressure in 4 times
that of the second soap bubble. The
(a) A (b) B
ratio of radii of first to second soap
(c) C (d) D
65. Statement I : Pascal’s law is the working principal of a bubble.
hydraulic lift. COMPREHENSION TYPE QUESTIONS
Statement II : Pressure is equal to thrust acting per unit Passage - 1
area.
(a) A (b) B Using the following Passage, solve Q. 69 to Q. 73
(c) C (d) D If the container filled with liquid gets accelerated
66. Statement I : When a body floats such that its parts are horizontally or vertically, pressure in liquids gets changed.
immersed into two immiscible liquids then force exerted In case of horizontally accelerated liquid (ax), the free
by liquid I is of magnitude 1v1g. surface has the slope ax/g. In case of vertically accelerated
Statement II : Total buoyant force = 1v1g + 2v2g. liquid (ay) for calculation of pressure, effective g is used.
A closed box with horizontal base 6 m by 6m and a height
2m is half filled with liquid. It is given constant horizontal
acceleration g/2 and vertical downward acceleration g/2.
69. The angle of the free surface with the horizontal is equal to
–1
(a) 30 (b) tan (2/3)
–1
(c) tan (1/3) (d) 45º
70. Length of exposed portion of top of box is equal to -
(a) A (b) B (a) 2m (b) 3m
(c) C (d) D (c) 4m (d) 2.5 m
FLUIDS MECHANICS 46
71. Water pressure at the bottom of centre of box is equal 78. The velocity profile for above problem :
to (atmospheric pressure = 105 N / m 2 , density of water
= 1000 kg / m3 , g  10 m / sec 2 )
(a)
(a) 1.1 MPa (b) 0.11 MPa
(c) 0.101 MPa (d) 0.011 MPa
72. Maximum value of water pressure in the box is equal to -
(a) 1.4 MPa (b) 0.14 MPa
(c) 0.104 MPa (d) 0.014 MPa
(b)
73. What is the value of vertical acceleration of box for given
horizontal acceleration (g/2), so that no part of bottom of
box is exposed -
(a) g/2 upward (b) g/2 downward
(c) g/4 upward (d) not possible
(c)
Passage - 2
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 74 to Q. 78

The space between two large horizontal metal plates 6 cm
2
apart is filled with a liquid of viscosity 0.8 N sec/m . A thin
2
plate of surface area 0.01 m is moved parallel to the length (d)
of the plate with constant speed 1 m/sec such that :
74. It is equidistant from the two stationary plates then the
force exerted by the liquid on the plate is approximately : Passage - 3
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 79 to 81
(a) 0.53 N (b) 0.26 N
(c) 0.72 N (d) zero A dam of width w = 10 m is filled with water up to height
75. A barometer kept in an elevator reads 76 cm when it is at H = 22 m as shown in the figure. As we go down in the
rest. If the elevator goes up with increasing speed, then dam, pressure increases, so the thickness of the wall also
reading will be increases from top to bottom. There is a stony glass
(a) zero (b) 76 cm window of radius r = 10 cm at a height h = 2 m from the
(c) > 76 cm (d) < 76 cm bottom as shown in the figure. The other side of the glass
window is open to the atmoshphere.
76. If the thin plate moves such that the plate is at a distance
of 2 cm from one of the plates and 4 cm from the other, now
the force exerted by the luqid on the plate is :
(a) 0.6 N (b) 0.4/3 N
(c) 1.6/3 N (d) None
77. Two capillary of length L and 2L and of radius R and 2R
are connected in series. The net rate of flow of fluid through
them will be (given rate of the flow through single capillary,
3 2
X = pR4/8L) (density of water = 1000 kg/m , g = 10 m/s , atmospheric
5 2
pressure = 1 × 10 N/m )
8 9
(a) X (b) X 79. The net force on the glass window due to fluid pressure
9 8
on both sides is
5 7 (a) kN (b) kN
(c) X (d) X
7 5 (c)  N (d)  N
FLUIDS MECHANICS 47
80. The net force on the wall due to fluid pressure on both 84. Minimum and maximum values of F to keep the cylinder in
sides is static equilibrium just after the water starts to spill through
(a) 44000 kN (b) 12100 kN the hole, if the coefficient of static friction between contact
surfaces is 0.01, are
(c) 24200 kN (d) 48400 kN
(a) 0, 40 N (b) 5.4 N, 52.2 N
81. If the glass window breaks, speed of water at this instant
coming out through the window is (c) 0, 70 N (d) 0, 52.2 N
(a) 20 m/s (b) 6 m/s Passage - 5
(c) 20.2 m/s (d) 14 m/s Using the following Passage, solve Q. 85 & 86
Passage - 4 A rod of length 6 m has a mass 12 kg. It is hinged at one

end A at a distance of 3 m below the water surface. The
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 82 to 84
2
specific gravity of the material of rod is 0.5.
A cylindrical tank having cross sectional area A = 0.5 m is
–3
filled with two liquids of density 1 = 900 kg m and
–3
2 = 600 kg m , to a height h = 60 cm each as shown in the
2
figure. A small whole having area a = 5 cm is made in right
vertical wall at a height y = 20 cm from the bottom. A
horizontal force F is applied on the tank to tank to keep it
in static equilibrium. The tank is lying on a horizontal
surface. Neglect mass of cylindrical tank in comparison to
–2
mass of liquids (take g = 10 ms ).
85. What weight must be attached to the other end B so that
5 m of the rod is immersed in water?
(a) 7 kgf (b) 20kgf
7 7
(c) kgf (d) kgf
5 2
86. Find the magnitude and direction of the force exerted by
the hinge on the rod.
17
82. The velocity of efflux is (a) kgf in the downward direction
3
–1 –1
(a) 10 ms (b) 20 ms
–1 –1
(b) 8 kgf in the downward direction
(c) 4 ms (d) 35 ms
(c) 4 kgf in the downward direction
83. Horizontal force F to keep the cylinder in static equilibrium,
(d) 5 kgf in the downward direction
if it is placed on a smooth horizontal plane, is
(a) 7.2 N (b) 10 N
(c) 15.5 N (d) 20.4 N
FLUIDS MECHANICS 48
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

Single Correct Options
1. A hemispherical portion of radius R is removed from the
bottom of a cylinder of radius R. The volume of the
remaining cylinder is V and mass M. It is suspended by a
string in a liquid of density , where it stays vertical. The
upper surface of the cylinder is at a depth h below the
liquid surface. The force on the bottom of the cylinder by
the liquid is (2001)
(a) Find the total force exerted by liquid A on the cylinder.

(b) Find h, the length of the part of the cylinder in air.
(c) The cylinder is depressed in such a way that its top
surface is just below the upper surface of liquid A and is
then released. Find the acceleration of the cylinder
immediately after it is released.
4. Water is filled in a cylindrical container to a height of 3 m.

(a) Mg The ratio of the cross-sectional area of the orifice and the
(b) Mg – Vg beaker is 0.1. The square of the speed of the liquid coming
2 2
(c) Mg + R hg out from the orifice is (g = 10 m/s ) (2005)
2
(d) g (V + R h)
2. A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top, floats in
water as shown in figure. The distance l and h are shown
there. After sometime the coin falls into the water. Then
2 2 2 2
(a) 50 m /s (b) 50.5m /s
2 2 2 2
(c) 51m /s (d) 52 m /s
5. A glass tube of uniform internal radius (r) has a value

separating the two identical ends. Initially, the valve is in
(a) l decreases and h increases (2002) a tightly closed position. End 1 has a hemispherical soap
(b) l increases and h decreases bubble of radius r. End 2 has sub-hemispherical soap
(c) Both l and h increase bubble as shown in figure.
(d) Both l and h decrease Just after opening the valve. (2008)
2
3. A uniform solid cylinder of density 0.8 g/cm floats in
equilibrium in a combination of two non-mixing liquids A
and B with its axis vertical. The densities of the liquids A
and B are 0.7 g/cm3 and 1.2 g/cm3 respectively. The height
of liquid A is hA = 1.2 cm. The length of the part of the
cylinder immersed in liquid B is hB = 0.8 cm. (2002)
FLUIDS MECHANICS 49
(a) air from end 1 flows towards end 2. No change in the 8. Two spheres P and Q of equal radii have densities  and
volume of the soap bubbles , respectively. The spheres are connected by a massless
(b) air from end 1 flows towards end 2. Volume of the soap string and placed in liquids L1 and L2 of densities  & 
bubble at end 1 decreases. and viscosities  and , respectively. They float in
equilibrium with the sphere P in L1 and sphere Q in L2 and
(c) no change occurs
the string being taut (see figure). If sphere P alone in L2
(d) air from end 2 flows towards end 1. Volume of the soap 
bubble at end 1 increases. has terminal velocity VP and Q alone in L1 has terminal
6. A glass capillary tube is of the shape of a truncated cone 
velocity VQ , then (2015)
with an apex angle  so that its two ends have cross
sections of different radii. When dipped in water vertically,
water rises in it to a height h, where the radius of its crosss
section is b. If the surface tension of water is S, its density
is , and its contact angle with glass is , the value of h
will be (g is the acceleration due to gravity) (2014)
 
VP  VP 
(a) V  1 (b) V  2
Q
 2 Q
1
   
(c) VP .VQ  0 (d) VP .VQ  0
9. A uniform capillary tube of inner radius r is dipped
vertically into a beaker filled with water. The water rises
to a height h in the capillary tube above the water surface
2S 2S in the beaker. The surface tension of water is  . The
(A) cos      (B) cos     
b g b g angle of contact between water and the wall of the capillary
2S 2S tube is . Ignore the mass of water in the meniscus. Which
(C) bg cos    /2  (D) cos    /2  of the following statements is (are) true? (2018)
bg
(a) For a given material of the capillary tube, h decreases
Multiple Answer Question
with increase in r
7. A spherical body of radius R consists of a fluid of constant (b) For a given material of the capillary tube, h is
density and is in equilibrium under its own gravity. If P(r) independent of 
is the pressure at r(r < P), then the correct option(s) is
(c) If this experiment is performed in a lift going up with a
(are). (2015)
constant acceleration, then h decreases
(a) P(r = 0) = 0
(d) h is proportional to contact angle 
P  r  3R / 4  63 10. A cylindrical capillary tube of 0.2 mm radius is made by
(b) P r  2R / 4  80
  joining two capillaries T1 and T2 of different materials
having water contact angles of 0° and 60° respectively.
P  r  3R / 5 16 The capillary tube is dipped vertically in water in two
(c) P r  2R / 5  21 different configurations, case I and II as shown in figure.
 
Which of the following option(s) is (are) correct?
P  r  R / 2  20 [Surface tension of water = 0.075 N/m , density of water =

(d) P r  R / 3  27 1000 kg/m3, take g = 10m/s2]
 
(2019)
FLUIDS MECHANICS 50
13. A cylindrical vessel of height 500 mm has an orifice (small

hole) at its bottom. The orifice is initially closed and water
is filled in it upto height H.Now the top is completely sealed
with a cap and the orifice at the bottom is opened. Some
water comes out from the orifice and the water level in the
vessel becomes steady with height of water column being
200 mm. Find the fall in height (in mm) of water level due to
opening of the orifice.
5 –2
(a) For case I, if the joint is kept at 8 cm above the water [Take atmospheric pressure = 1.0 × 10 Nm , density of
–3 –2
surface, the height of water column in the tube will be 7.5 water = 1000 kg m and g = 10 ms . Neglect any effect of
surface tension.] (2009)
cm. (Neglect the weight of the water in the meniscus)
14. Consider two solid spheres P and Q each of density 8gm
(b) For case I, capillary joint is 5cm above the water
cm–3 and diameters 1 cm and 0.5cm, respectively. Sphere P
surface, the height of water column raised in the tube will
is dropped into a liquid of density 0.8gm cm–3 and viscosity
be more than 8.75 cm. (Neglect the weight of the water in  = 3 poiseulles. Sphere Q is dropped into a liquid of
the meniscus) density 1.6gm cm–3 and viscosity  = 2 Poiseulles. The
(c) The correction in the height of water column raised in ratio of the terminal velocities of P and Q is (2016)
the tube, due to weight of water contained in the
4
meniscus, will be different for both cases. 15. A beaker of radius r is filled with water (refractive index )
3
(d) For case II, the capillary joint is 5 cm above the water
up to a height H as shown in the figure on the left. The
surface, the height of water column raised in the tube will
beaker is kept on a horizontal table rotating with angular
be 3.75 cm. (Neglect the weight of the water in the
speed  . This makes the water surface curved so that
meniscus) the difference in the height of water level at the center
Integer Type and at the circumference of the beaker is(h << H, h <<
r), as shown in the figure on the right. Take this surface
11. A horizontally oriented tube AB of length 1m rotates with to be approximately spherical with a radius of curvature s.
Which of the following is/are correct? (g is the
a constant angular velocity 10 3 rad/s about a stationary
acceleration due to gravity) (2020)
vertical axis O1O2 passing through the end A. The tube is
filled with an ideal fluid. The end A is open and end B has
a very small hole. Find the velocity of the fluid (in m/s)
from hole when the length of the liquid column is half the
length of tube.
h2 + r2
(a) R =
2h
12. Two soap bubbles A and B are kept in a closed chamber 3r 2
–2
where the air is maintained at pressure 8 Nm . The radii of (b) R =
2h
bubbles A and B are 2 cm, respectively. Surface tension of
–1 (c) Apparent depth of the bottom of the beaker is close
the soap-water used tomake bubbles is 0.04 Nm . Find
-1
nB 3H  2 H 
to 1+ 
the ratio n , where nA and nB are the number of moles of 2  2g 
A
ain in bubbles A and B, respectively. [Neglect the effect of (d) Apparent depth of the bottom of the beaker is close to
gravity] (2009) -1
3H  2 H 
1+ 
4  4g 
FLUIDS MECHANICS 51
16. A train with cross-sectional area St is moving with speed List List II
P. Lift is accelerating vertically up. 1. d = 1.2 m
 t inside a long tunnel of cross-sectional area
Q. Lift is accelerating vertically down 2. d > 1.2 m
S0 (S0 = 4St ) . Assume that almost all the air (density  )
with an acceleration less than the
in front of the train flows back between its sides and the
walls of the tunnel. Also, the air flow with respect to the gravitational acceleration.
train is steady and laminar. Take the ambient pressure R. Lift is moving vertically up with 3. d < 1.2 m
and that inside the train to be p0 .If the pressure in the constant speed
region between the sides of the train and the tunnel walls S. Lift is falling freely. 4. No water leaks out
7 of the jar
is p, then p 0 - p = Vt2 . The value of N is ________.
2N (A) P -2, Q-3, R-2, S-4 (B) P-2, Q-3, R-1, S-4
(2020) (C) P-1, Q-1, R-1, S-4 (D) P-2, Q-3, R-1, S-1
17. A hot air balloon is carrying some passengers, and a few
sandbags of mass 1 kg each so that its total mass is 480 Comprehension Type
kg. Its effective volume giving the balloon its PASSAGE - 1
buoyancy is V. The balloon is floating at an equilibrium
height of 100 m. When N number of sandbags are thrown A wooden cylinder of diameter 4r, height h and density
out, the balloon rises to a new equilibrium height close to /3 is kept on a hole of diameter 2r of a tank, filled with
150 m with its volume V remaining unchanged. If the liquid of density  as shown in the figure.
variation of the density of air with height h from the
h
-
ground is (h) =  e h 0 , where 0 = 1.25 kg m-3 and
0
h 0 = 6000 m, the value of N is _________.

(2020)
Assertion Reason 20. Now level of the liquid starts decreasing slowly. When
18. Statement–I : The stream of water flowing at high speed the level of liquid is at a height h1 above the cylinder the
from a garden hose pipe tends to spread like a fountain block starts moving up. At what value of h1, will the block
when held vertically up, but tends to narrow down when
rise? (2006)
held vertically down. (2003)
(a) 4h/9 (b) 5h/9
Statement–II : In any steady flow of an incompressible
fluid, the volume flow rate of the fluid remains constant. 5h
(a) If Statement I is true. Statement Ii is true; Statement Ii is (c) (d) Remains same
3
the correct explanation for Statement I.
21. The block in the above question is maintained at the
(b) If Statement I is true, Statement Ii is true; Statement Ii is
not a correct explanation for Statement I. position by external means and the level of liquid is lowered.
The height h2 when this external force reduces to zero is
(c) If Statement I is true; Statement II is false.
(d) If Statement I is false; Statement II is true.
Match the Column
19. A person in a lift is holding a water jar, which has a small
hole at the lower end of its side. When the lift is at rest, the
water jet coming out of the hole hits the floor of the lift at
a distance d of 1.2 m from the person. In the following, 4h 5h
state of the lift’s motion is given in List I and the distance (a) (b) (2006)
9 9
where the water jet hits the floor of the lift is given in List
II. Match the statements from List I with those in List II 2h
(c) remains same (d)
and select the correct answer using the code given below 3
the lists. (2014)
FLUIDS MECHANICS 52
22. If height h2 of water level is further decreased, then 26. If the piston is pushed at a speed of 5mms–1, the air comes
(2006) out of the nozzle with a speed of (2014)
(a) cylinder will not move up and remains at its original (A) 0.1 ms–1 (B) 1 ms–1
position
(C) 2ms–1 (D) 8 ms–1
(b) for h2 = h/3, cylinder again starts moving up
27. If the density of air is a and that of the liquid l then for a
(c) for h2=h/4, cylinder again starts moving up given piston speed the rate (volume per unit time) at which
(d) for h2 = h/5, cylinder again starts moving up the liquid is sprayed will be proportional to (2014)
PASSAGE - 2
a
When liquid medicine of density  is to be put in the eye, (A) (B) a l
l
it is done with the help of a dropper. As the bulb on the top
of the dropper is pressed, a drop forms at the opening of
the dropper. We wish to estimate the size of the drop. l
(C) a (D) l
We first assume that the drop formed at the opening is
spherical because that requires a minimum increase in its Analytical & Descriptive Question
surface energy. To determine the size, we calculate the net
vertical force due to the surface tension T when the radius 28. A container of width 2a is filled with a liquid. A thin wire of
of the drop is R. When this force becomes smaller than the weight per unit length  is gently placed over the liquid
weight of the drop, the drop gets detached from the dropper. surface in the middle of the surface as shown in the fig. As
23. If the radius of the opening of the dropper is r, the vertical a result, the liquid surface is depressed by a distance y
force due to the surface tension on the drop of radius R (y <<a). Determine the surface tension of the liquid.
(assuming r << R) is (2010) (2004)
(a) 2rT (b) 2 RT
2r 2 T 2R 2 T
(c) (d)
R r
–4 3 –3 –2 –1
24. If r = 5 × 10 m,  = 10 kg m , g = 10 ms , T = 0.11 Nm ,
the radius of the drop when it detaches from the dropper
is approximately
–3 –3
(a) 1.4 × 10 m (b) 3.3 × 10 m
–3 –3
(c) 2.0 × 10 m (d) 4.1 × 10 m 29. Consider a horizontally oriented syringe containing water
25. After the drop detaches, its surface energy is located at a height of 1.25m above the ground. The diameter
–6 –6
(a) 1.4 × 10 J (b) 2.7 × 10 J of the plunger is 8mm and the diameter of the nozzle is
–6 –9
(c) 5.4 × 10 J (d) 8.1 × 10 J 2mm. The plunger is pushed with a constant speed of 0.25
PASSAGE - 3 m/s. Find the horizontal range of water stream on the
2
A spray gun is shown in the figure where a piston pushes ground. (Take g = 10m/s ). (2004)
air out of a nozzle. A thin tube of uniform cross section is
connected to the nozzle. The other end of the tube is in a
small liquid container. As the piston pushes air through
the nozzle, the liquid from the container rises into the nozzle
and is sprayed out. For the spray gun shown, the radii of
the piston and the nozzle are 20 mm and 1 mm respectively.
The upper end of the container is open to the atmosphere.
30. A small sphere falls from rest in a viscous liquid. Due to

friction, heat is produced. Find the relation between the
rate of production of heat and the radius of the sphere at
terminal velocity. (2004)
FLUIDS MECHANICS 53
31. A U-shaped tube contains a liquid of density  and it is

rotated about the line as shown in the figure. Find the
difference in the levels of liquid column. (2005)
32. What is the excess pressure inside a bubble of soap

solutions of radius 5.00 mm ? Given that the surface tension
–2
of soap solution at the temperature (20°C) is 2.50 × 10 N/m.
If an air bubble of the same dimension were formed at a
depth of 4.0 cm inside a container containing soap
solution (relative density 1.20), what would be the
–2
pressure inside the bubble (in 10 atm) ? (1 atm = 1.01
5
× 10 Pa) (2007)
FLUIDS MECHANICS 54
FLUIDS MECHANICS
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
02
ELASTICITY
Chapter 02 56
ELASTICITY THEORY
1. ELASTICITY
Deforming force
1.1 Rigid body stress 
area of cross section
A body whose size and shape cannot be changed how-
ever large the applied force may be Unit N / m 2 or pascal
1.2 Deforming Force and Restoring Force  The deformation of the solid is described in terms of a
 Deforming force is the external force applied to a body physical quantity strain, that is created in the body as a
which tends to change the size or shape of the body. result of deformation force.
 Under the action of deforming force, a body opposes any

change in dimension
change in its shape & size due to the net effect of internal strain 
original dimension
(molecular) forces. The resulting force which opposes the
deformation is known as restoring force.
It has no unit.
1.3 Elasticity
1.4 Hooke’s Law
 The property of a body due to which it opposes the action
If the deforming forces are within a limit (known as elastic
of the deforming forces is called Elasticity.
limit), the stress created in the body is proportional to the
 A material is said to be elastic if it returns back to its original resulting strain.
shape or size, when the deforming forces are removed.
i.e. stress  strain.
 Plastic materials on the other hand, remain permanently
distorted when the deforming forces are removed. This stress
The ratio is known as modulus of Elasticity..
property is called Plasticity. strain
 Some of the examples of elestic materials are rubber bond, According to various types of stresses, we have
steel, etc. corresponding modulii of elasticity.
 The deforming force is measured (described) in terms of a Units of modules of elesticity is same as the unit of stress
physical quantity, the stress, that it develops in the body.
1.5 Stress, Strain and Various Elastic Moduli
Type of stress Stress Strain Elastic Name of State of

modulus modulus Mater
FL
Longitudinal (Tensile or compressive) Two equal and opposite Elongation or Y Young’s Solid
AL
forces perpendicular to compression modulus
opposite faces (L/L)
= F/A)
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
ELASTICITY 57
Type of stress Stress Strain Elastic Name of State of

modulus modulus Mater
x FL
Shearing Two equal and opposite tan   G Shear modulus Solid
L A.x
forces parallel to
opposite surfaces
( = F/A)
 PV
Hydraulic/volume Forces perpendicular Volume change B Bulk modulus Solid, liquid
V
everywhere to the (V/V) and gas
surface, force per unit
area (pressure) same
everywhere.
1.6 Stress-strain Curve  Point E is known as elastic limit or yield–point.

If by gradually increasing the load on a vertically  The region OPE represents the elastic behaviour of the material
suspended metal wire, a graph is plotted between stress of wire.
(or load) and longitudinal strain (or elongation) we get the
curve as shown in figure. From this curve it is clear that :  Yield point is the stress beyond which the material becomes
plastic.
(c) If the wire is stretched beyond the elastic limit E (i.e.,

Breaking
strength between EA)
Elastic limit  the strain increases much more rapidly
P
 if the stretching force is removed the wire does not come
Stress
back to its natural length. Some permanent increase in length

O Strain
takes place.
(a) When the strain is small (< 2%) (i.e., in region OP) (d) If the stress is increased further,
 Stress is proportional to strain.  A very small increase in stress produces a very large
 Hooke’s law is obeyed. increase in strain (region AB).
 The point P is called limit of proportionality and  After reaching point B, the strain increases even if the
 Slope of line OP gives the Young’s modulus of the material wire is unloaded and ruptures at C.
of the wire. Y = tan .
 In the region BC the wire literally flows. The maximum
Note: Electric limit
stress corresponding to B after which the wire begins to
The maximum value of the stress within which the body flow and breaks is called breaking or tensile strength.
regains its original shape and size.
 The region EABC represents the plastic behaviour of the
(b) If the strain is increased a little bit (i.e., in the region PE)
material of wire.
 The stress is not proportional to strain.
 The wire still regains its original length after the removal  Stress-strain curve for different materials.
of stretching force.
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
ELASTICITY 58
1.8 Poisson’s Ratio

Elastic Hysteresis :
The strain persists even when the stress is removed. This When a rod or bar is subjected to a longitudinal stress,
lagging behind of strain is called elastic hysteresis. This not only its length changes but its transverse dimensions
is the reason why the values of strain for same stress also change and thus giving rise to transverse or lateral
are different while increasing the load and while strain in additional to longitudinal strain.
decreasing the load.
g
sin
load or stress
rea
g
sin
nc
rea
di
ec
loa
dd
loa
b
extension or strain Transverse or lateral strain is
b
Brittle material
The plastic region between E and C is small for brittle The ratio of transverse to longitudinal strain is termed as
Poisson’s ratio, .
material and it will break soon after the elastic limit is
crossed. b / b

Ductile material  / 
The material of the wire have a good plastic range and
such materials can be easily changed into different shapes transverse strain
Since, σ 
and can be drawn into thin wires. longitrdinal strain
Elastomers
Negative sign is introduced to make  a positive quantity.
Stress strain curve is not a straight line within the elastic
Since, an increase in length always results in a decrease in
limit for elastomers and strain produced is much larger transverse dimensions and vice-versa.
than the stress applied. Such materials have no plastic
Note:
range and the breaking point lies very close to elastic
limit. eg. rubber. (1)  has no units, as its a ratio
(2) 0    0.5
1.7 Elastic Energy
When an elastic body is deformed, work is done by the

applied force. This work is stored as elastic potential energy
and is released when the body returns back to its original
shape or size.
Elastic energy stored per unit volume
1
= (stress) (strain)
2
1 2
= (modulus of elasticity) (strain)
2
2
1  stress 
=
2 modulus of elasticity
 In case of a longitudinal stress (compressive or tensile)

2
Energy stored 1  Δl 
= Y 
volume 2  l 
1 YA 2 1
Total energy = .  Δl  = F Δl
2 l 2
SCAN CODE
ELASTICITY
ELASTICITY 59
SOLVED EXAMPLES
What is more elastic rubber or steel ? Explain. A metallic wire is stretched by suspending weight to it. If
 is the longitudinal strain and Y its Young’s modulus of
Sol. Consider two rods of rubber and steel each of length l and elasticity, show that the elastic potential energy per unit
2
area of cross section a. Let Yr, Ys be the Young’s modulus of volume is given by Y  /2.
elasticity or rubber and steel respectively. When a stretching
force F is applied on each rod, let lr, ls be the extension in Sol. Stress = Young’s modulus × strain = Y × 
the rubber rod and steel rod respectivley; where lr > ls Elastic potential energy per unit volume is
F F  1
Then, Yr  and Ys  u= × stress × strain
a  r a  s 2
Ys  r 1 1 2
 = × Y  ×  = Y .
 Yr  s > 1 i.e. Ys > Yr 2 2
Example - 6
Therefore steel is more elastic the rubber.
Example - 2 A structural steel rod has a radius of 10 mm and a length of
1m. A 100 k N force stretches it along its length. Calculate
An elastic wire is cut to half its original length. How would (a) the stress (b) elongation, and (c) percentage strain on
it affect the maximum load that the wire can support ? the rod. Given that the Young’s modulus of elasticity of
11 –2
the structural steel is 2.0 × 10 Nm .
Sol. Since breaking load = breaking stress × area, is free from the
length of elastic wire, therefore, if the cable is cut to half of Sol. Here;
its original length, there is no change in its area of cross
–3 –2
section and breaking stress. Hence thre is no effect on the r = 10 mm = 10 × 10 m = 10 m; l = 1 m;
maximum load (breaking load), the cable can support. 3 5
F = 100 kN = 100 × 10 N = 10 N;
11 2
Example - 3 Y = 2.0 × 10 N/m
Why is a spring made of steel, not of copper ?
F F 105
Stress =  2 
Sol. A spring will be better one, if a large restoring force is set up A r  22 / 7   102  
in it on being deformed, which in turn depends upon the 8 –2
elasticity of the material of the spring. Since the Young’s = 3.18 × 10 Nm
modulus of elasticity of steel is more than that of copper, The elongation,
hence steel is preferred in making the springs.
Example - 4  
F / A 

 3.18 10  1 8
Y 2  1011
Why are the bridges declared unsafe after long use ?
–3
= 1.59 × 10 m = 1.59 mm
Sol. A bridge during its use undergoes alternating stresses and
strains for a large number of times each day, depending  1.59  103
The strain =   1.59  10 3
upon the movement of vehicles on it. When a bridge is used  1
for long time, it loses its elastic strength. Therefore, the Percentage strain in rod
amount of strain in the bridge for a given stress will become –3
large and ultimately, the bridge may collapse. That is why = 1.59 × 10 × 100
the bridges are declared unsafe after long use. = 0.159%  0.16%
ELASTICITY 60
Example - 7
Four identical cylindrical columns of steel support a big
structure of mass 50,000 kg. The inner and outer radii of
each column are 30 cm and 40 cm respectively. Assume
the load distribution to be uniform, calculate the
compressional strain of each column. The Young’s
11
modulus of steel is 2.0 × 10 Pa.
Sol. Here, M = 50,000 kg; r1 = 0.30 m and r2 = 0.40 m;

11
Y = 2.0 × 10 Pa.
Area of cross section of each column;
2 2
 
A   r22  r12    0.4    0.3    0.07 m 2
 
Whole weight of the structure = Mg = 50000 × 9.8 N Sol. Here, the pulling force F (= mg) is same on both the wires.
Let l1, l2 be the elongations in the two wires.
This weight is equally shared by four columns,
F F
5000  9.8 As, Y  or  
 Compressional force on one column, F  N  r 2  Y  r2
4
F/ A mg
For wire A, 1 
Now, Y  compressional strain Y  r2
F 5000  9.8 / 4 mg  2   mg

Fow wire B,  2  
 Compressional strain = AY    0.07  2.0  1011 Y   2r 
2
2 Y  r2
 
–7
= 2.785 × 10 mg 1 mg
Total elongation = 1   2  
Example - 8 Y  r2 2 Y  r2
Find the greatest length of copper wire, that can hang
7 2
without breaking. Breaking stress = 7.2 × 10 N/m . Density 3 mg
2
 .
of copper 7.2 g/cc. g = 10 m/s . 2 Y  r2
7 2 Example - 10
Sol. Given, breaking stress, S = 7.2 × 10 N/m ; Density of wire, 
3 3
= 7.2 g/cc = 7.2 × 10 kg/m . A copper wire of length 2.2 m and a steel wire of length
Let l be the greatest length of wire that can hang without 1.6 m, both of diameter 3.0 mm are connected end. When
breaking and a be the area of cross section of the wire. stretched by a load, the net elongation is found to be
0.70 mm. Obtain the load applied. Young’s modulus of
Weight of wire = (a l)  g. 11 –2
copper is 1.1 × 10 N m and Young’s modulus of steel is
11 –2
2.0 × 10 Nm .
Breaking stress, S=
weight of wire a g
=
area of cross section a –3
Sol. For copper wire, l1 = 2.2 m; r1 = 1.5 mm = 1.5 × 10 m;
11 –2
Y1 = 1.1 × 10 Nm
S 7.2  107
or    1000 m For steel wire, l2 = 1.6 m; r2 = 1.5 mm = 1.5 × 10 m,
–3
 g 7.2  103  10
11 2
Y2 = 2.0 × 10 N/m .
Example - 9
Also, l1 + l2, = 0.70 mm ...(i)
Two wires A and B of length l, radius r and length 2l,
radius 2r having same Young’s modulus Y are hung with a Since both the wires have same tension and same area of
weight mg, Figure. What is the net elongation in the two cross section, hence have the same tensile stress S.
wires ? Thus, S = Y × longitudinal strain
ELASTICITY 61
F   Example - 13
  Y1  1  Y2  2
a 1 2 The average depth of Indian ocean is about 3000 m.
Calculate the fractional compression, V/V, of water at the
1 1 Y2 2.2 2.0  1011 bottom of the ocean, given that the bulk modulus of water
or      2.5 9 –2
is 2.2 × 10 Nm . Take g = 10 ms .
–2
 2  2 Y1 1.1 1.1 1011
or l1 = 2.5 l2. Sol. Here, h = 3000 m; B = 2.2 × 10 N/m ,

9 2
From (i) 2.5 l2 + l2 = 0.70 or l2 = 0.2 mm 3

p = h  g = 3000 × 10 × 10 = 3 × 10 N m
7 –3
–4
 l1 = 0.5 mm = 5 × 10 m
V p 3 107
1   Compessional strain,    1.36 102 .
Thus, F  aY1  r12 Y1 1 V B 2.2  109
1 1
Example - 14
22 2 5 104 A square lead slab of side 50 cm and thickness 10.0 cm is

7

 1.5 103  1.1 1011 
2.2 subjected to a shearing force (on its narrow face) of
4
2 2 magnitude 9.0 × 10 N. The lower edge is riveted to the
= 1.77 × 10  1.8 × 10 N.
floor as shown in figure. How much is the upper edge
9
Example - 11 displaced, if the shear modulus of lead is 5.6 × 10 Pa ?
3
Find the change in volume which 1 m of water will undergo F
when taken from the surface, to the bottom of sea 1 km
deep. Given the elasticity of water is 20,000 atmosphere. 1
5
atmosphere = 1.013 × 10 N m .
–2 50 cm
3 3 3 6 –2
Sol. Here, V = 1 m ; p = h  g = 10 × 10 × 9.8 = 9.8 × 10 Nm
4 5 –2 9
B = 20,000 atm. = 2 × 10 × 1.013 × 10 × N m = 2.026 × 10
–2
Nm m
Sol. Here, L = 50 cm = 50 × 10–2 ;
As, B 
pV
or V 
pV

9.8 10  1  6
 9
G = 5.6 × 10 Pa, F = 9.0 × 10 N.
4
V B 2.026  109 Area of the face on which force is applied,

–3 3 2
= 4.83 × 10 m a = 50 × 10 = 500 sq cm = 0.5 m .
Example - 12 If L is the displacement of the upper edge of the slab due
A solid ball 3 cm in diameter is submerged in a lake to a to tangential force F applied, then
3 –2
depth, where the pressure is 10 kg f m . Find the change
in volume of the ball, if bulk modulus of the material of the F/a FL 9  104  50  10 2
G or L  
7 2
ball is 10 dyne/cm . L / L Ga 5.6  109  0.05
–4
–2 –2 = 1.6 × 10 m
Sol. Here, 2 r = 3 cm = 3 × 10 m or r = (3/2) × 10 m
3 2 3 2 7 2 6 2 Example - 15
p = 10 kg f/m = 10 × 9.8 N/m , B = 10 dyne/cm = 10 N/m
3 Two parallel and opposite forces, each 500 kgf are applied
4 3 4 22  3 
Volume of the ball, V   r      10 2  m 3 tangentially to the upper and lower faces of a cubical metal
3 3 7 2  block 25 cm on a side. Find the angle of shear and the
pV displacement of the upper surface relative to the lower
Now, B  10
surface. The shear modulus of the metal is 8 × 10 Nm ;
–2
V –2
g = 10 ms .
3
4 22  3 
   102   103  9.8
Vp 3 7  2
–2
 Sol. Here F = 500 kgf = 500 × 10N; L = 25 × 10 m;
or V  
B 106 –2 2
a = (25 × 10 ) = 6.25 × 10 m ;
–2 2
–6 3 3
= 0.1386 × 10 m = 0.1386 cm 10
G = 8 × 10 Nm
–2
ELASTICITY 62
Angle of shear or shear strain, Example - 18
F 500 10 A wire of radius r stretched without tension along a straight

–6
  = 10 rad lie is tightly fixed at A and B. Figure. What is the tension in
aG  2
6.25  10  8 10  
10
 the wire when it is pulled in the shape ACB ? Assume
Young’s modulus of material of the wire to by Y.
L –2 –6
Now,   or L = L = (25 × 10 ) × 10 rad
L
–7
= 25 × 10 m.
Example - 16
When load on the wire is increased slowly from 2 kg to
4 kg, the elongation increases from 0.5 mm to 0.9 mm. If Sol. Let 2 l be the original length of wire AB, i.e., L = 2l. When
–2
g = 10 , find the work done during the extention of the wire. wire is pulled into shape ACB, the increase in length,
2 2 1/2
L = (AC + CB) – AB = 2 (l + d ) – 2l.
Sol. Here, F1 = 2 kgf = 2 × 10 N; F2 = 4 kgf = 4 × 10 N
–3 –3
l1 = 0.5 mm = 0.5 × 10 m; l2 = 0.9 mm = 0.9 × 10 m 1/ 2
Longitudinal strain  L 
2 2  d2    2
1 1 L 2
Work done, W  F2   2  F1  1
2 2
2l[(1  d 2 / l 2 )1 / 2  1]
=
1 –3 –3 2l
 [4 × 10 × 0.9 × 10 –2 × 10 × 0.5 × 10 ]
2
–3
= 13 × 10 J.  1 d2  d2
 1   1  2
 2   2
2
Example - 17
2
A 45 kg boy whose leg bones are 5 cm in area and 50 cm tension F
long falls through a height of 2 m without breaking his leg Longitudinal stress   2
8 –2
area r
bones. If the bones can stand a stress of 0.9 × 10 Nm ,
calculate the Young’s modulus for the material of the bone.
–2 longitudinal stress
Use, g = 10 ms .  Young’s Modulus, Y 
longitudinalstrain
–4 2
Sol. Here, m = 45 kg; h = 2m; L = 0.50 m; A = 5 × 10 m
F / r 2
Loss in gravitational energy = gain in elastic energy in both 
d 2 / 2 2
leg bones.
2 2 2
 Tension in the wire, F = Y × r × d /2l .
1 
So, mgh  2    stress  strain  volume 
2  Example - 19
–4
Here, volume = AL = 5 × 10 × 0.50 = 2.5 × 10 m
–4 3 What happens to the work done during stretching of a wire?
1  Sol. The work done in stretching the wire is stored in it in the

 45 × 10 × 2 = 2 ×   0.9 108  strain  2.5  104  form of the elastic potential energy.
 2 
Example - 20
45  10  2
or strain =  0.04
0.9  2.5  10  4 What is meant by saying that crystalline solids are
anisotropic ?
stress 0.9  108
 Y  Sol. The physical properties like thermal conductivity, electrical
strain 0.04
conductivity, compressibility, etc. have different values in
9 –2
= 2.25 × 10 N m different directions.
ELASTICITY 63
Example - 21 F L F YA
Sol. Y  . 
Do liquids possess rigidity ? A   L
Sol. No, liquids do not possess rigidity, because they have no F YA
shapes of their own. Force constant, K   .
 L
How does young’s modulus change with the rise of How does young’s modulus change with the rise of
temperarure ? temperature ?
F/A 1 Sol. Young’s modulus decreases with the rise in temperature.

Sol. As Y  Y 
 /  
Example - 31
So, as temperature increase, lenght also increase Hence,
Young’s modulus decreases with the rise in temperature. Distinguish between elasticity and plasticity of materials.
Example - 23 Sol.
Give two examples which are nearly perfectly plastic. Elasticity Plasticity
1. It is the property of the 1. It is the property of the
Sol. Putty and paraffin wax.
body due to which the body due to which it
Example - 24 body regains its original does not regain to its
The length of a wire is cut to half. What will be the effect configuration (length, original configuration;
on the increase in its length under a given load ? volume or shape) when when the deforming
Sol. Increase in length will be reduced to half as l  l. the deforming forces are force is removed from
removed. it.
Example - 25
2. The bodies, which has 2. The body, which has
Write copper, glass, rubber and steel in the order of
increasing coefficient of elasticity. this property, are called this property is called
elastic bodies, e.g., Iron, plastic body, e.g., clay
Sol. Rubber, glass, copper and steel.
copper, gold etc. etc.
Example - 26
Example - 32
Which is more elastic-water or air ? Why ?
What is elastic hysteresis ?
Sol. Water is more elastic than air, because bulk modulus of
elasticity is reciprocal of the compressibility and air is more Sol. When a deforming force is applied on a body, then the strain
compressible than water. does not change simultaneously with stress, rather it lags
behind the stress. The lagging of strain behind the stress is
Example - 27
called the elastic hysteresis. This is the reason why the
What is the value of Bulk modulus for an incompressible values of strains for the same stress are different while
liquid ? increasing the load and while decreasing the load as shown
Sol. Infinite. in the figure.
Example - 28
What is the limitation of the Hooke’s low ?
Sol. It holds good, when a wire is loaded within its elastic limit.
Example - 29
A wire of length L and of area of cross-section A is stretched

through a certain length l. If Y is the Young’s modulus of
elasticity of the material of the wire, what is the force
constant of the wire ?
ELASTICITY 64
Example - 33 Sol. Given M = 15 kg, L = 2.0 m each.
A steel wire of length 4.7 m and cross-section 3.0 × 10 m

–5 2 Let T be the tension in each wire. As the bar is supported
stretches by the same amount as a copper wire of length symmetrically by thethree wires, the increasesin length L
–5 2
3.5 m and cross-section 4.0 × 10 m under a given load. of each wire should be same.
What is the ratio of the Young’s modulus of steel to that The expression for Young’s modulus is
of copper ?
FL TL
–5 2
Y 
Sol. Given steel : LS = 4.7 m, AS = 3.0 × 10 m , LC = 3.5 m, A L A L
–5 2
A = 4.0 × 10 m
Now, for all wires, L, L, and T is same, therefore, we have
Applied force F and extension L are same for both wires.
Young’s modulus of steel, 1 D 2 1
A or 
Y 4 Y
FLS F  4.7
YS   Hence,
AS L 3.0  105  L
Young’s modulus for copper D Cu YFe 1.9  1011

   1.3
D Fe YCu 1.1 1011
FL C F  3.5
YC  
A C L 4.0  10 5  L Example - 36
Hence, What is the density of ocean water at a depth, where the

pressure is 80.0 atm, given that its density at the surface is
YS F  4.7 4 105  L 3 –3
1.03 × 10 kg m ? Compressibility of water = 45.8 × 10
–11
 5
 = 1.79
YC 3.0  10  L F  3.5 –1 5
Pa . Given, 1 atm = 1.013 × 10 Pa.
Example - 34 –11 –1
Sol. Given, compressibility of water = 1/K = 45.8 × 10 Pa ,
9 –2 13 5
The breaking stress for a metal is 7.8 × 10 Nm . Calculate p = 80.0 atm = 80.0 × 1.0 × 10 Pa, density of water at the
3 –3
the maximum length of the wire made of this metal which surface,  = 1.03 × 10 kg m .
may be suspended without breaking. The density of the Suppose that a volume V of the ocean water is taken to a
3 –3 –2
metal = 7.8 × 10 kg m . Take g = 10 ms . depth where the pressure is 80.0 atm. Let V be the decrease
9 –2 in volume.
Sol. Given Breaking stress = 7.8 × 10 N m , L = ?,
3 –3 pV
 = 7.8 × 10 kgm . Then K 
V
When the wire is suspended vertically, it tends to break
under its own weight. Let its length be L and cross-sectional pV –11
area be A. or V   80  1.013 105  V × 45.8 × 10
K
Weight of wire = mg = volume × density × g = ALg
= 0.0037 V
weight ALg If V’ is volume of the water, when taken to the depth, then
Stress =   Lg
area A
V’ = V – V = V – 0.0037 V
For the wire not to break, this must be equal to the breaking = 0.9963 V
stress, therefore, we have
Let ’ be the density of water at the depth, where the pressure
7.8  10 9 is 80.0 atm. Since the mass of water remains same, therefore,
Lg  7.8  109 or L   105 m
7.8  103  10 we have
Example - 35 V’ ’ = V
3
A rigid bar of mass 15 kg is supported symmetrically, by or 0.9963 V × ’ = V × 1.03 × 10
3 –3
three wires each 2.0 m long. Those at each end are of or ’ = 1.034 × 10 kg m
copper and the middle one is of iron. Determine the ratios
of their diameters if each is to have the same tension.
ELASTICITY 65

Stress, Strain, Hooke’s Law,
10 2
6. Young’s modulis of brass and steel are 10 × 10 N/m and
Modulus of Elasticity
11 2
2 × 10 N/m , respectively. A brass wire and a steel wire of the
same length are extended by 1 mm under the same force. The
1. The force constant of a wire does not depend on
radii of the brass and steel wires are RB and RS respectively.
(a) Nature of the material Then
(b) Radius of the wire R
(c) Length of the wire (a) RS = 2 RB (b) R S  2B
(d) none of these
R
2. The ratio of radii of two wire of same material is 2 : 1. (c) RS = 4RB (d) R S  4B
Stretched by same force, then the ratio of stress is
7. Two blocks of masses 1 kg and 2 kg are connected by a metal
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 wire going over a smooth pulley as shown. The breaking
(c) 1 : 4 (d) 4 : 1 40 2
stress of the metal is 3  106 N / m 2 . If g = 10 m/s , then what
3. One end of a uniform rod of mass m1 and cross-sectional
area A is hung from a ceiling. The other end of the bar is should be the minimum radius of the wire used if it is not to
supporting mass m2. The stress at the midpoint is break?
g m 2  2m1  g m 2  m1  (a) 0.5 mm (b) 1 mm

(a) (b)
2A 2A (c) 1.5 mm (d) 2 mm
8. A wire elongates by l mm when a load w is hanged from it. If
g 2m 2  m1  g m 2  m1  the wire goes over a pulley and two weights w each are hung
(c) (d)
2A 2A at the two ends, the elongation of the wire will be
4. A wire of cross section A is stretched horizontally between (in mm)
two clamps located 2 metres apart. A weight W kg is (a) l (b) 2 l
Suspended from the mid-point of the wire. If the mid-point (c) zero (d) l/2
sags vertically through a distance x < 1 the strain produced 9. Two wires are made of the same material and have the same
is: volume. However, wire 1 has cross-sectional area A and wire-
2 has cross sectional areal 3A. If the length of wire 1 in-
2x 2 x2
creases by x on aplying force F, how much force is needed
(a) (b) to stretch wire 2 by the same amount ?
2 2
(a) F (d) 4F
x2 (c) 6F (d) 9F
2 2 10. A metal rod of Young’s modulus Y and coefficient of thermal
expansion  is held at its two ends such that its length remains
5. A wire fixed at the upper end stretches by length l by
invariant. If its temperature is raised by t°C, the linear stress
applying a force F. The work done in stretching is : developed in it is
F t Y
(a) (b) F l (a) (b)
2 Y t
1
F (c) Yt (d)
(c) 2F l (d) Yt
2
ELASTICITY 66
16. Two wires of the same material and same mass are stretched
 4MLg  by the same force. Their lengths are in the ratio 2 : 3. Their
11. In the determination of Young’s modulus  Y   by
 d 2  elongations are in the ratio
using Searle’s method, a wire of length L = 2 m and diameter (a) 3 : 2 (b) 2 : 3
d = 0.5 mm is used. For a load M = 2.5 kg, an extension l = (c) 4 : 9 (d) 9 : 4
0.25 mm in the length of the wire is observed. Quantities d 17. The length of a wire is increased by 1 mm on the application
and l are measured using a screw gauge and a micrometer, of a given load. In a wire of the same material, but of length
repectively. They have the same pitch of 0.5 mm. The number and radius twice that of the first, on application of the same
load, extension is
of divisions on their circular scale is 100. The contributions
to the maximum probable error of the Y measurement is (a) 0.25 mm (b) 0.5 mm
(c) 2 mm (d) 4 mm
(a) due to the errors in the measurements of d and l are the Longitudinal Strain
same
18. If equal and opposite forces applied to a body tend to
(b) due to the error in the measurement of d is twice that due elongate it, the stress so produced is called
to the error in the measurement of l. (a) Tensile stress (b) Compressive stress
(c) due to the error in the measurement of l is twice that due (c) Tangential stress (d) Working stress
to the error in the measurement of d. 19. The longitudinal extension of any elastic material is very
small. In order to have an appreciable change, the material
(d) due to the error in the measurement of d is four times that must be in the form of
due to the error in the measurement of l. (a) Long thick wire (b) Short thick wire
12. One end of a horizontal thick copper wire of length 2L and (c) Long thin wire (d) Short thin wire
radius 2R is welded to an end of another horizontal thin 20. You are given three wires A, B and C of the same length and
copper wire of length L and radius R. When the arrangement cross section. They are each stretched by applying the same
is stretched by applying forces at two ends, the ratio of the force to the ends. The wire A is stretched least and comes
back to its original length when the stretching force is
elongation in the thin wire to that in the thick wire is removed. The wire B is stretched more than A and also comes
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.50 back to its original length when the stretching force is
(c) 2.00 (d) 4.00 removed. The wire C is stretched most and remains stretched
even when stretching force is removed. The greatest
6 2
13. A cylindrical tree has a breaking stress of 10 N/m . The Young’s modulus of elasticity is possessed by the material
maximum possible height of the tree is 5 m. the density of of wire
2
material of the tree is (take g = 10 m/s ) (a) A (b) B
3
(a) 10 kg/m
3 4
(b) 10 kg/m
3 (c) C
4 3 3 (d) All have the same elasticity
(c) 2 × 10 kg/m (d) 1 kg/m
14. The length of a steel cylinder is kept constant by applying Shearing Strain
pressure at its two ends. When the temperature of rod is 21. The face EFGH of the cube shown in the figure is displaced
5
increased by 100°C from its initial temperature, the increase 2 mm parallel to itself when forces of 5 × 10 N each are
in pressure to be applied at its ends is applied on the lower and upper faces. The lower face is
fixed. The strain produced in the cube is
11 2 –6 5 2
(Ysteel = 2 × 10 N/m , steel = 11 × 10 /°C, 1 atm = 10 N/m )
7 3
(a) 22 × 10 atm (b) 2.2 × 10 atm
3
(c) zero (d) 4.3 × 10 atm
15. A wire can sustain the weight of 20 kg before breaking. If
the wire is cut into two equal parts, each part can sustain a
weight of
(a) 10 kg (b) 20 kg
(a) 2 (b) 0.5
(c) 40 kg (d) 35 kg 8
(c) 0.05 (d) 1.2 × 10
ELASTICITY 67
22. The reason for the change in shape of a regular body is

(a) Volume stress (b) Shearing strain
(c) Longitudinal strain (d) Metallic strain
Volumetric strain
23. If a rubber ball is taken at the depth of 200 m in a pool. Its

volume decreases by 0.1%. If the density of the water is
3 3 2
1 × 10 kg/m and g = 10 m/s , then the volume elasticity in (a) Elasticity of wire P is maximum
2
N/m will be (b) Elasticity of wire Q is maximum
8 8
(a) 10 (b) 2 × 10 (c) Elasticity of R is maximum
9 9
(c) 10 (d) 2 × 10 (d) None of the above is true
–5
24. The compressibility of water is 4 × 10 per unit atmospheric 28. The figure shows the stress-strain graph of a certain
pressure. The decrease in volume of 100 cubic centimetre of substance. Over which region of the graph is Hooke’s law
water under a pressure of 100 atmosphere will be obeyed
–5
(a) 0.4 cc (b) 4 × 10 cc
(c) 0.025 cc (d) 0.004 cc
Stress – Strain Curve
25. The stress versus strain graphs for wires of two materials A
E
and B are as shown in the figure. If YA and YB are the Young’s
modulii of the materials, then (a) AB (b) BC
(c) CD (d) ED
2
29. Which one of the following is the Young’s modulus (in N/m )
for the wire having the stress-strain curve shown in the
figure
(a) YB = 2YA (b) YA = YB

(c) YB = 3YA (d) YA = 3YB
26. The stress-strain curves for brass, steel and rubber are
shown in the figure. The lines A, B and C are for
11 11
(a) 24 × 10 (b) 8.0 × 10
11 11
(c) 10 × 10 (d) 2.0 × 10
Springs
30. If the potential energy of a spring is V on stretching it by 2
cm, then its potential energy when it is stretched by 10
cm will be
(a) V/25 (b) 5V
(a) Rubber, brass and steel respectively (c) V/5 (d) 25V
(b) Brass, steel and rubber 31. Two wires of the same material and length but diameters in
(c) Steel, brass and rubber respectively the ratio 1 : 2 are stretched by the same force. The potential
(d) Steel, rubber and brass energy per unit volume for the two wires when stretched
27. The strain stress curves of three wires of different materials will be in the ratio
are shown in the figure. P, Q and R are the elastic limits of (a) 16 : 1 (b) 4 : 1
the wires. The figure shows that (c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
ELASTICITY 68
32. What amount of work is done in increasing the length of a

wire through unity?
YL YL2
(a) 2A (b)
2A
YA YL
(c) 2L (d) A
33. When the load on a wire is slowly increased from 3 to 5 kg

wt, the elongation increases from 0.61 to 1.02 mm. The work
done during the extension of wire is
(a) 0.16 J (b) 0.016 J
(c) 1.6 J (d) 16 J
Elastic Energy and Energy Density
34. Two wires of same diameter of the same material having

the length  and 2. If the force F is applied on each, the
ratio of the work done in the two wires will be
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 4
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
35. A wire suspended vertically from one of its ends is
stretched by attaching a weight of 200 N to the lower end.
The weight stretches the wire by 1 mm. Then the elastic
energy stored in the wire is :
(a) 0.2 J (b) 10 J
(c) 20 J (d) 0.1 J
36. If S is stress and Y is Young’s modulus of material of a wire,
the energy stored in the wire per unit volume is
2
S2
(a) 2 S Y (b)
2Y
2Y S
(c) 2 (d) 2 Y
S
ELASTICITY 69

1. A pendulum made of uniform wire of cross sectional area 5. A uniformly tapering conical wire is made from a material
A has time period T. When an addition mass M is added of Young’s modulus Y and has a normal, unextended
to its bob, the time period changes to TM. If the Young’s length L. The radii, at the upper and lower ends of this
1 conical wire, have values R and 3 R, respectively. The
modulus of the material of the wire is Y then is equal upper end of the wire is fixed to a rigid support and a
Y
to: (g = gravitational acceleration) (2015) mass M is suspended from its lower end. The equilibrium
extended length, of this wire, would equal
  TM 2  A   T 2  A (2016)
(a) 1   T   Mg (b) 1   T   Mg
      M  
 2 Mg   1 Mg 
(a) L 1   (b) L 1  
 9 YR 2   3 YR 2 
 TM 2  A  TM 2  Mg
(c)  T   1 Mg (c)  T   1 A
       1 Mg   2 Mg 
(c) L 1   (d) L 1  
2. A man grows into a giant such that his linear dimensions  9 YR 2   3 YR 2 
increase by a factor of 9. Assuming that his density 6. A bottle has an opening of radius a and length b. A cork
remains same, the stress in the leg will change by a factor
of length b and radius (a + a ) where (a  a) is
of : (2017)
compressed to fit into the opening completely (See figure).
1 If the bulk modulus of cork is B and frictional coefficient
(a) (b) 9
81 between the bottle and cork is  then the force needed
to push the cork into the bottle is : (2016)
1
(c) (d) 81
9
3. An external pressure P is applied on a cube at 0°C so that

it is equally compressed from all sides. K is the bulk
modulus of the material of the cube and  is its coefficient
of linear expansion. Suppose we want to bring the cube
to its original size by heating. The temperature should be
raised by : (2017)
(a) (B b) a (b) (2B b) a
P
(a) 3PKa (b)
3K (c) (B b) a (d) (4B b) a
7. A compressive force, F is applied at the two ends of a
P 3
(c) (d) long thin steel rod. It is heated, simultaneously, such that
K PK
its temperature increases by T . The net change in its
2
4. A steel rail of length 5m and area of cross section 40 cm length is zero. Let l be the length of the rod, A its area of
is prevented from expanding along its length while the cross-section, Y its Young’s modulus, and  be its
temperature rises by 10ºC, If coefficient of linear expansion coefficient of linear expansion. Then, F is equal to :
and Young’s modulus of steel are 1.2 × 10–5 K–1 and 2 × (2017)
1011 Nm–2 respectively, the force developed in the rail is
(a) 2 Y  T (b)  AY  T
approximately : (2017)
(a) 2×107 N (b) 1×105 N AY
(c) 2×109 N (d) 3×10–5 N (c) AY  T (d)  T
ELASTICITY 70
8. A solid sphere of radius r made of a soft material of bulk 12. Young’s moduli of two wires A and B are in the ratio 7 : 4.
modulus K is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical
Wire A is 2 m long and has radius R. Wire B is 1.5 m longand
container. A massless piston of area a floats on the surface
of the liquid, covering entire cross section of cylindrical has radius 2 mm. If the two wires stretch by the samelength
container. When a mass m is placed on the surface of the for a given load, then the value ofR is close to :
piston to compress the liquid, the fractional decrement in
(2019)
 dr 
the radius of the sphere,   is (2018) (a) 1.5 mm (b) 1.9 mm
 r 
(c) 1.7 mm (d) 1.3 mm
mg mg 13. In an environment, brass and steel wires of length 1 m
(a) (b)
3K a Ka
each with areas of cross section 1mm2 are used. The
Ka Ka
(c) mg (d) 3mg wires are connected in series and one end of the combined
wire is connected to a rigid support and other end is
9. As shown in the figure, forces of 105 N each are applied in subjected to elongation. The stress required to produce a
opposite directions, on the upper and lower faces of a net elongation of 0.2 mm is:
cube of sides 10 cm, shifting the upper face parallel to
[Given, the Young’s modulus for steel and brass are,
itself by 0.5 cm. If the side of another cube of the same
material is 20 cm, then under similar conditions as above, respectively, 120  109 N / m 2 and 60  109 N / m 2 ]
the displacement will be : (2018)
(2019)
(a) 1.2  106 N / m 2 (b) 4.0  106 N / m2
(c) 8 106 N / m2 (d) 0.2 106 N / m2
14. The elastic limit of brass is 379 M Pa. What should be the
(a) 0.25 cm (b) 0.37 cm
minimum diameter of a brass rod if it is to support a 400 N
(c) 0.75 cm (d) 1.00 cm load without exceeding its elastic limit? (2019)
10. A boy’s catapult is made of rubber cord which is 42 cm (a) 1.00 mm (b) 1.15 mm
long, with 6 mm diameter of cross-section and of negligible (c) 0.90 mm (d) 1.36 mm
mass. The boy keeps a stone weighing 0.02 kg on it and 15. A load of mass M kg is suspended from a steel wire of
stretches the cord by 20 cm by applying a constant force. length 2m and radius 1.0 mm in Searle’s apparatus
When released, the stone flies off with a velocity of 20 ms1. experiment. The increase in length produced in the wire is
Neglect the change in the area of cross-section of the cord 4.0 mm. Now the load is fully immersed in a liquid of relative
density 2. The relative density of the material of load is 8.
while stretched. The Young’s modulus of rubber is closest
The new value of increase in length of the steel wire is
to: (2019)
_____.
(a) 106 N/m–2 (b) 104 N/m–2 (2019)
8 –2 3 –2
(c) 10 N/m (d) 10 N/m (a) 3.0 mm (b) 4.0 mm
11. A steel wire having a radius of 2.0 mm, carrying a load of 4 (c) 5.0 mm (d) Zero
–2
kg, is hanging from a ceiling. Given that g = 3.1 ms , what 16. Two steel wires having same length are suspended from a
will be the tensile stress that would be developed in the ceiling under the same load. If the ratio of their energy
wire? (2019) stored per unit volume is 1: 4, the ratio of their diameters is:
6 –2 6 –2 (2020)
(a) 6.2 × 10 Nm (b) 5.2 × 10 Nm
(c) 3.1 × 106 Nm–2 (d) 4.8 × 106 Nm– (a) 2 :1 (b) 1: 2
(c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 : 1
ELASTICITY 71

1. The length of an elastic string is a meter when the 6. A small but heavy block of mass 10 kg is attached to a wire
7 2
longitudinal tension is 4 N and b metre when the tension 0.3mlong. Itsbreaking stressis4.8 × 10 N/m . The area of
–6 2
is 5 N. The length of the string (in metre) when the cross section of the wire is 10 m . The maximum angular
longitudinal tension is 9 N is velocity with which the block can be rotated in the
(a) a – b (b) 5b – 4a horizontal circle is
(c) 2b – a/2 (d) 4a – 3b (a) 4 rad/s (b) 8 rad/s
2. A uniform rod of mass m, length L, area of cross-section A (c) 10 rad/s (d) 32 rad/s
is rotated about an axis passing through one of its ends
7. Two bars A and B of circular cross section and same volume
and perpendicular to its length with constant angular
and made of the same material are subjected to tension. If
velocity  in a horizontal plane. If Y is the Young’s
the diameter of A is half that B and if the force applied to
modulus of the material of rod, the increase in its length
due to rotation of rod is both the rod is the same and it is in the elastic limit, the
ratio of extension of A to that of B will be
m2 L2 m2 L2 (a) 16 (b) 8
(a) (b)
AY 2AY (c) 4 (d) 2
2 2 2 2 5
m L 2m L 8. A substance breaks down under a stress of 10 Pa. If the
(c) (d) 3 3
3AY AY density of the wire is 2 × 10 kg/m , find the minimum
length of the wire which will break under its own weight
3. A slightly conical wire of length L and end radii r1 and r2 is 2
stretched by two forces F, F applied parallel to length in (g = 10 m/s ).
opposite directions and normal to end faces. If Y denotes (a) 10 m (b) 2.5 m
the Young’s modulus, then extension produced is (c) 4 m (d) 5 m
FL FL 9. A 5 kg rod of square cross section 5 cm on a side and 1 m
(a) r 2 Y (b) r Y long is pulled along a smooth horizontal surface by a force
1 1
applied at one end. The rod has a constant acceleration of
FL FLY 2
2 m/s . Determine the elongation in the rod. (Young’s
(c) r r Y (d) r r 9 2
1 2 1 2 modulus of the material of the rod is 5 × 10 N/m )
4. A uniform rod of length L has a mass per unit length  and (a) Zero, as for elongation to be there, equal and opposite
area of cross section A. The elongation in the rod is  due force must act on the rod
to its own weight if it is suspended from the ceiling of a (b) Non-zero but can’t be determine from the given
room. The Young’s modulus of the rod is situation
2gL2 gL2 (c) 0.4 m
(a) (b)
A 2A (d) 16 m
10. A solid sphere of radius R, made up of a material of bulk
2gL g 2
(c) (d) modulus k is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical
A AL
container. A massless piston of area A floats on the surface
5. One end of uniform wire of length L and of weight W is of the liquid. When a mass M is placed on the piston to
attached rigidly to a point in the roof and a weight W1 is compress the liquid, the fractional change in the radius of
suspended from its lower end. If s is the area of cross the sphere is
section of the wire, the stress in the wire at a height (3L/4)
from its lower end is Mg Mg
(a) (b) 3AK
W
AK
W  
(a) s 1 (b)  W1  4  s
 
3Mg Mg
(c) (d)
 3W  W1  W AK 2AK
(c)  W1  4  / s (d) s

ELASTICITY 72
11. A bar of cross section A is subjected to two equal and 15. A heavy block of mass 150 kg hangs with the help of three
opposite tensile force as shown. Consider a cross section vertical wires of equal length and equal cross sectional
BB as shown in figure. The shearing stress at this point is area as shown in the figure.
Fcos 2  F
(a) (b) A
A
Fsin 2
(c) 2A
(d) zero Wire is attached to the mid-point (centre of mass) of block.
Take Y2 = 2Y1. For this arrangement mark out the correct
Multiple Answer Questions statment(s).
12. A metal wire length L, cross section area A, and Young’s (a) The wire I and III should have same Young’s modulus.
modulus Y is stretched by a variable force F. F is varying (b) Tension in I and III would be always equal.
in such a way that F is always slightly greater than the (c) Tension in I and III would be different.
elastic forces of resistance in the wire. When the elongation
(d) Tension in II is 75 g.
in the wire is l, up to this instant
16. Two wires A and B have the same cross-section and are
YA 2 made of the same material, but the length of wire A is twice
(a) the work done by F is
2L that of B. Then, for a given load
(a) the extension of A will be twice that of B
YA 2
(b) the work done by F is
L (b) the extensions of A and B will be equal
(c) the strain in A will be half that in B
YA2
(c) the elasitc potential energy stored in wire is (d) the strains in A and B will be equal
2L
(d) no energy is lost during elongation 17. Figure shows the stress-strain graphs for materials A
13. A composite rod consists of a steel rod of length 25 cm and B.
and area 2A and a copper rod of length 50 cm and area A.
The composite rod is subjected to an axial load F. If the
Young’s mouduli of steel and copper are in the ratio 2 : 1,
then
(a) the extension produced in copper rod will be more
(b) the extension in copper and steel parts will be in the
ratio 1 : 8
(c) the stress applied to copper rod will be more From the graph it follows that
(d) no extension will be produced in the steel rod (a) material A has a higher Young’s modulus
14. Choose the correct statements from the following : (b) material B is more ductile
(a) Steel is more elastic than rubber. (c) material A is more brittle
(b) The stretching of a coil spring is determined by the (d) material A can withstand a greater stress
Young’s modulus of the wire of the spring.
Integer Type Questions
(c) The frequency of a tuning fork is determined by the
shear modulus of the material of the fork. 18. A block of mass m produces an extension of 9 cm in an
elastic spring of length 60 cm when it is hung by it, and the
(d) When a material is subjected to a tensile (stretching)
system is in equilibrium. The spring is cut in two parts of
stress the restoring forces are caused by interatomic 40 cm and 20 cm lenghts. The same block hangs in
attraction. equilibrium with the help of these two parts. Find the
extension (in cm) in this case.
ELASTICITY 73
Assertion Reason (C) Longitudinal stress (R) Internal developed forces

(A) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true and reason are attractive in nature.
is the correct explanation of the assertion. (D) Lateral strain (S) Internal developed forces
(B) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true but reason is are repulsive in nature
not the correct explanation of the assertion. COMPREHENSION
(C) If ASSERTION is true but REASON is false. Passage - 1
(D) If both ASSERTION and REASON are false.
Using the following Passage, Solve Q. 22–23
(E) If ASSERTION is false but REASON is true.
A light rod of length L = 2 m is suspended horizontally
19. Assertion : The stress–strain graphs are shown in the from the ceiling by two wires A and B of equal lengths.
figure for two materials A and B are shown in figure. Young’s The wire A is made of steel with the area of cross section
modulus of A is greater than that of B. –5 2
As = 1×10 m , while the wire B is made of brass of cross
–5 2
sectional area Ab = 2 × 10 m . A weight W is suspended at
a distance x from the wire A as shown in figure.
Take, Young’s modulus of steel and brass as
11 –2 11 –2
Ys = 2 × 10 Nm and Yb = 1 × 10 Nm .
Reason : The Young’s modules for small strain is,

stress
Y  slope of linear portion, of graph; and slope
strain
of A is more than slope that of B.
(a) A (b) B
22. Determine the value of x so that equal stresses are
(c) C (d) D produced in each wire.
(e) (E) (a) 1.33 m (b) 2.5 m
(c) 3.6 m (d) 2.1 m
20. Assertion : Young’s modulus for a perfectly plastic body
is zero. 23. Determine the value of x so that equal strains are produced
in each wire.
Reason : For a perfectly plastic body, restoring force is
zero. (a) 1 m (b) 2 m
(a) A (b) B (c) 3 m (d) 2.2 m

(c) C (d) D Passage - 2
(e) E Using the following Passage, Solve Q. 24 to 26
–5 2
Match the Column A steel bolt of cross sectional area Ab = 5 × 10 m is
passed through a cylindrical tube made of aluminium.
21. In the Column I type of stresses or strains are mentioned –4 2
and some effect of these stresses within the body are Cross sectional area of the tube material is At = 10 m and
mentioned in Column II. Match the entries of Column-I its length is l = 50 cm. The bolt is just taut so that there is
with the entries of Column-II. no stress in the bolt. And temperature of the assembly is
increased through  = 10° C. Given, coefficient of linear
Column-I Column-II –5
thermal expansion of steel, b = 10 /°C.
(A) Compressive stress (P) Intermolecular separation in
stresssed state is greater
than equilibrium separation.
(B) Tensile stress (Q) Intermolecular separation in Young’s modulus of steel Yb = 2 × 10 N/m .
11 2
stressed state is less than 11 2

Young’s modulus of Al, Yt = 10 N/m , coefficient of linear
equilibrium separation. –5
thermal expansion of Al t = 2 × 10 /°C.
ELASTICITY 74
24. The compressive strain in tube is

–4 –5
(a) 10 (b) 5 × 10
–3 –6
(c) 2 × 10 (d) .10
25. The compressive stress in tube is

6 2 5 2
(a) 5 × 10 N/m (b) 10 N/m
8 2 3 2
(c) 10 N/m (d) 10 N/m
26. The tensile stress in bolt is
4 2 7 2
(a) 10 N/m (b) 10 N/m
8 2 10 2
(c) 2 × 10 N/m (d) 10 N/m
Passage - 3
Using the following Passage, Solve Q. 27 to 29
According to Hooke’s law, within the elastic limit stress/
strain = constant. This constant depends on the type of
strain or the type of force acting. Tensile stress might
result in compressional or elongative strain; however, a
tangential stess can only cause a shearing strain. After
crossing the elastic limit, the material undergoes elongation
and beyond a stage beaks. All modulus of elastically are
basically constants for the materials under stress.
27. Two wires of same material have length and radius (l, r)
 r
and  2, 2  . The ratio of their Young’s modulus is
 
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
28. Just on crossing the yield region, the material will have
(a) reduced stress
(b) increased stress
(c) breaking stress
(d) constant stress
stress
29. If strain be x in elastic region and y in the region of yield,
then
(a) x = y (b) x > y
(c) x < y (d) x = 2y
ELASTICITY 75

Single Correct Options 4. One end of a horizontal thick copper wire of length 2L and
radius 2R is welded to an end of another horizontal thin
1. The adjacent graph shows the extension (l) of a wire of copper wire of length L and radius R. When the
length 1m suspended from the top of a roof at one end and arrangement is stretched by applying forces at two ends,
with a load W connected to the other end. If the cross- the ratio of the elongation in the thin wire to that in the
sectional area of the wire is 10–6 m2, calculate from the graph thick wire is (2013)
the Young’s modulus of the material of the wire. (2003)
(a) 0.25 (b) 0.50
(c) 2.00 (d) 4.00
Multiple Correct Options
5. In plotting stress versus strain curves for two materials P

and Q, a student by mistake puts strain on the y-axis and
stress on the x-axis as shown in the figure. Then the
correct statement(s) is (are). (2015)
(a) 2 × 1011 N/m2 (b) 2 × 10–11 N/m2

(c) 3 × 1012 N/m2 (d) 2 × 1013 N/m2
5
2. The pressure of a medium is changed from 1.01 × 10 Pa to
5
1.165 × 10 Pa and change in volume is 10% keeping
temperature constant. The bulk modulus of the medium is
(2005)
5 5
(a) 204.8 × 10 Pa (b) 102.4 × 10 Pa
5 5
(c) 51.2 × 10 Pa (d) 1.55 × 10 Pa (a) P has more tensile strength than Q
 4MLg  (b) P is more ductile than Q
3. In the determination of Young’s modulus  Y  
 d 2  (c) P is more brittle than Q
by using Searle’s method, a wire of length L = 2 m and (d) The Young’s modulus of P is more than that of Q.
diameter d = 0.5 mm is used. For a load M = 2.5 kg, an
extension l = 0.25 mm in the length of the wire is observed. Integer Type
Quantities d and l are measured using a screw gauge and
6. A block of weight 100 N is suspended by copper and
a micrometer, repectively. They have the same pitch of 0.5
steel wires of same cross sectional area 0.5 cm2 and, length
mm. The number of divisions on their circular scale is 100.
The contributions to the maximum probable error of the Y 3 m and 1 m, respectively. Their other ends are fixed on
measurement is (2012) a ceiling as shown in figure. The angles subtended by
(a) due to the errors in the measurements of d and l are the copper and steel wires with ceiling are 30° and 60°,
same respectively. If elongation in copper wire is ( c) and
(b) due to the error in the measurement of d is twice that
due to the error in the measurement of l. c
elongation in steel wire is (s) , then the ratio is
(c) due to the error in the measurement of l is twice that  s
due to the error in the measurement of d. ___ . (Young’s modulus for copper and steel are 1 × 1011
(d) due to the error in the measurement of d is four times N/m2 and 2 × 1011 N/m2, respectively)
that due to the error in the measurement of l. (2019)
ELASTICITY 76
Analytical & Descriptive Questions

8. In Searle’s experiment, which is used to find Young’s
modulus of elasticity, the diameter of experimental wire is
D = 0.05 cm (measured by a scale of least count 0.001 cm)
and length is L = 110 cm (measured by a scale of least
count 0.1 cm). A weight of 50 N causes an extension of
l = 0.125 cm (measured by a micrometer of least count
dP 0.001 cm). Find maximum possible error in the values of
7. A cubical solid aluminium (bulk modulus =  V = 70
dV Young’s modulus. Screw gauge and meter scale are free
GPa) block has an edge length of 1 m on the surface of the from error. (2004)
earth. It is kept on the floor of a 5 km deep ocean. Taking
the average density of water and the acceleration due to
gravity to be 103 kg m 3 and 10 ms 2 , respectively, the
change in the edge length of the block in mm is _____.
(2020)
ELASTICITY 77
ELASTICITY
03
OSCILLATION & WAVES
Chapter 03 79
OSCILLATION & WAVES

THEORY
1. INTRODUCTION 2 m m
Time period (T) =  2 as  
(1) A motion which repeats itself over and over again after a  k k
regular interval of time is called a periodic motion.
3. Frequency
(2) Oscillatory or vibratory motion is that motion in which a
The frequency of a particle executing S.H.M. is equal to
body moves to and fro or back and forth repeatedly about
the number of oscillations completed in one second.
a fixed point in a definite interval of time.
(3) Simple harmonic motion is a specific type of oscillatory  1 k
 
motion, in which 2 2 m
(a) particle moves in one dimension, 4. Phase
(b) particle moves to and fro about a fixed mean position The phase of particle executing S.H.M. at any instant is its
(where Fnet = 0), state as regard to its position and direction of motion at
(c) net force on the particle is always directed towards that instant. It is measured as argument (angle) of sine in
means position, and the equation of S.H.M.
(d) magnitude of net force is always proportional to the Phase = (t + )

displacement of particle from the mean position at that At t = 0, phase = ; the constant  is called initial phase of
instant. the particle or phase constant.
So, Fnet = –kx 1.2 Important Relations
where, k is known as force constant
1. Position
 ma = – kx
k
 a x or a  2 x +a
m
where,  is known as angular frequency. T/2 T
O
d2 x
  2 x –a
dt 2
This equation is called as the differential equation of If mean position is at origin the position (X coordinate)
S.H.M. depends on time in general as :
The general expression for x(t) satisfying the above x (t) = sin (t + )
equation is :
• At mean position, x = 0
x (t) = A sin (t + )
• At extremes, x = + A, –A
1.1 Some Important terms
2. Velocity
1. Amplitude
The amplitude of particle executing S.H.M. is its maximum Vmax
displacement on either side of the mean position.
T/2 T
A is the amplitude of the particle. O
2. Time Period
Time period of a particle executing S.H.M. is the time taken
to complete one cycle and is denoted by T. • At any time instant t, v (t) = A  cos (t + )
SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
OSCILATION AND WAVES 80
• At any position x, v (x) = ±  A 2  x 2 1 2 1

Ux  kx  mA 2 2 sin 2  t   
2 2
• Velocity is minimum at extremes because the particles
is at rest.
U max
i.e., v = 0 at extreme position.
• Velocity has maximum magnitude at mean position.

T/2 T
|v|max = A at mean position.
3. Acceleration
1 2
• U is maximum at extremes, Umax = kA
2
Amax
• U is minimum at mean position
T/2 T
O Total Energy
T.E.
• 2
At any instant t, a (t) = –  A sin (t + )
• At any position x, a (x) = – 2x
• Acceleration is always directed towards mean position.
• The magnitude of acceleration is minimum at mean 1 2 1
T.E.  kA  mA 2 2
position and maximum at extremes. 2 2
|a|min = 0 at mean position. and is constant at all time instant and at all positions.
2
|a|max =  A at extremes. Energy position graph
4. Energy
Kinetic energy Energy
Total energy (E)
1 1
• K  mv2  K  m2 A 2  x 2
2 2
  Potential energy (U)
1
 m2 A 2 cos 2  t    Kinetic energy (K)
2
x=–a x=0 x=+a
K max
2. TIME PERIOD OF S.H.M.
T/2 T To find whether a motion is S.H.M. or not and to find its
time period, follow these steps :
• K is maximum at mean position and minimum at extremes. (a) Locate the mean (equilibrium) position mathematically by
balancing all the forces on it.
1 1
• K max  m 2 A 2  kA 2 at mean position (b) Displace the particle by a displacement ‘x’ from the mean
2 2 position in the probable direction of oscillation.
• Kmin = 0 at extemes. (c) Find the net force on it and check if it is towards mean
position.
Potential Energy
(d) Try to express net force as a proportional function of its
If potential energy is taken as zero at mean position,
displacement ‘x’.
then at any position x,
SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
• If step (c) and step (d) are proved then it is a simple

m
harmonic motion. • Time period : T  2
k
(e) Find k from expression of net force (F = – kx) and find time
(c) Combination of springs :
m
period using T  2 . 1. Springs in series
k
2.1 Oscillations of a Block Connected to a Spring When two springs of force constant K1 and K2 are
connected in series as shown, they are equivalent to a
(a) Horizontal spring :
single spring of force constant K which is given by
Let a block of mass m be placed on a smooth horizontal
surface and rigidly connected to spring of force constant 1 1 1
 
K whose other end is permanently fixed. K K1 K 2
K1 K 2
K
K1  K 2
block in equilibrium
mean position
K1 K
x
block displaced K2
K1K2
K = ––––––
K1 + K2
• Mean position : when spring is at its natural length.
m 2. Springs in parallel
• Time period : T  2
k
For a parallel combination as shown, the effective
(b) Vertical Spring : spring constant is K = K1 + K2
If the spring is suspended vertically from a fixed point

and carries the block at its other end as shown, the
block will oscillate along the vertical line.
elongation block elongation

=d displaced =d+x
downwards
by x K1 K2
block in equilibrium
K1 + K2
mg
• Mean position : spring in elongated by d 
k
SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
2.2 Oscillation of a Cylinder Floating in a liquid R

• Time period : T  2 = 84.6 minutes
Let a cylinder of mass m and density d be floating on g
the surface of a liquid of density . The total length of where, R is radius of earth.
cylinder is L.
2.5 Angular Oscillations
Instead of straight line motion, if a particle or centre of

mass of a body is oscillating on a small arc of circular
L path then it is called angular S.H.M.
l l+x For angular S.H.M., = – k
 I = –k
cylinder in equilibrium cylinder displaced downwards I

 Time period, T  2
by a distance x k
Ld
• Mean position : cylinder is immersed upto   2.5.1 Simple Pendulum

Ld  
• Time period : T  2  2 • Time period : T  2
g g g
2.3 Liquid Oscillating in a U–Tube • Time period of a pendulum in a lift :
Consider a liquid column of mass m and density  in a U- 

T  2 (if acceleration of lift is upwards)
tube of area of cross section A. ga

x T  2 (if acceleration of lift is downwards)
ga
x
• Second’s pendulum
Time period of second’s pendulum is 2s.
Length of second’s pendulum on earth surface  1m.
In equilibrium liquid displaced by x 2.5.2 Physical Pendulum
I
• Mean position : when height of liquid is same in both limbs. Time period : T  2
mg
m (2L  A) L
• Time period : T  2  2  2
2Ag 2Ag 2g
O
where, L is length of liquid column.
2.4 Body Oscillation in tunnel along any chord of earth l
mg
• Mean position : At the centre of the chord
SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
where, I is moment of inertia of object about point of

2π
suspension, and • Angular frequency () : It is defined as w = = 2πn
Τ
l is distance of centre of mass of object from point of
suspension. • Phase : Phase is a quantity which contains all information
related to any vibrating particle in a wave. For equation y
3. DAMPED AND FORCED OSCILLATIONS = A sin (t – kx); (t – kx) = phase.
1. Damped Oscillation :
2π
• Angular wave number (k) : It is defined as k =
(i) The oscillation of a body whose amplitude goes on λ
decreasing with time is defined as damped oscillation.
(ii) In this oscillation the amplitude of oscillation   1 k
• Wave number (  ) : It is defined as  = = = number
λ 2π
decreases exponentially due to damping forces like
frictional force, viscous force etc. of waves in a unit length of the wave pattern.
• Particle velocity, wave velocity and particle's
+a acceleration : In plane progressive harmonic wave
particles of the medium oscillate simple harmonically
about their mean position. Therefore, all the formulae what
O t we have read in SHM apply to the particles here also. For
x
example, maximum particle velocity is ± A at mean
–a position and it is zero at extreme positions etc. Similarly
maximum particle acceleration is ±2A at extreme positions
(iii) Due to decrease in amplitude the energy of the and zero at mean position. However the wave velocity is
oscillator also goes on decreasing exponentially. different from the particle velocity. This depends on certain
2. Forced Oscillation : characteristics of the medium. Unlike the particle velocity
(i) The oscillation in which a body oscillates under the which oscillates simple harmonically (between + A and
influence of an external periodic force are known as – A) the wave velocity is constant for given
forced oscillation. characteristics of the medium.
(ii) Resonance : When the frequency of external force is • Particle velocity in wave motion :
equal to the natural frequency of the oscillator, then
The individual particles which make up the medium do
this state is known as the state of resonance. And this
frequency is known as resonant frequency. not travel through the medium with the waves. They
simply oscillate about their equilibrium positions. The
4. WAVES instantaneous velocity of an oscillating particle of the
• Wavelength () [length of one wave] medium, through which a wave is travelling, is known as
Distance travelled by the wave during the time, any one "Particle velocity".
particle of the medium completes one vibration about its
mean position. We may also define wavelength as the
distance between any two nearest particles of the medium,
vibrating in the same phase.
• Frequency (n): Number of vibrations (Number of complete
wavelengths) complete by a particle in one second.
• Time period (T) : Time taken by wave to travel a distance
equal to one wavelength.
• Wave velocity : The velocity with which the disturbance,
• Amplitude (A): Maximum displacement of vibrating
or planes of equal phase (wave front), travel through the
particle from its equilibrium position.
medium is called wave (or phase) velocity.
SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
• Relation between particle velocity and wave velocity : beyond the particle 1, the particles start oscillating. If the
speed of the wave be v, then it will reach particle 6, distant
Wave equation :- y = A sin (t – kx), Particle velocity v
x from the particle 1, in x/v sec. Therefore, the particle 6
y will start oscillating x/v sec after the particle 1. It means
= = A cos (t – kx). that the displacement of the particle 6 at a time t will be the
t
same as that of the particle 1 at a time x/v sec earlier i.e.
λ ω ω y at time t – (x/v). The displacement of particle 1 at time t
Wave velocity = vP= =λ = , – (x/v) can be the particle 6, distant x from the origin
T 2π k x
(particle 1), at time t is given by
A 1 y  x
= –Ak cos (t – kx) = –
ω
k cos (t – kx) = – v
p t
y = a sin   t  
 v
y 1 y
 =–  
x v P t But  = 2 n, y = a sin (t – kx) k  v  ...(ii)
 
y
Note : represent the slope of the string (wave) at the  2   
x y = a sin  t  x Also k = ...(iii)
T   
point x.
Particle velocity at a given position and time is equal to  t x
y = a sin 2    ...(iv)
negative of the product of wave velocity with slope of T 
the wave at that point at that instant.
This is the equation of a simple harmonic wave
travelling along +x direction. If the wave is travelling
Equation of a Plane Progressive Wave along the –x direction then inside the brackets in the
If, on the propagation of wave in a medium, the particles above equations, instead of minus sign there will be
of the medium perform simple harmonic motion then the plus sign. For example, equation (iv) will be of the
wave is called a 'simple harmonic progressive wave'.  t x
Suppose, a simple harmonic progressive wave is following form : y = a sin 2  +  . If f be the
T λ
propagating in a medium along the positive direction of
the x-axis (from left to right). In fig. (a) are shown the phase difference between the above wave travelling
equilibrium positions of the particles 1, 2, 3 ....... along the +x direction and an other wave, then the
equation of that wave will be
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (a)
  t x 

y = a sin  2π  –  ±  
3   T λ  
4
2
a (a) Speed of longitudinal wave
y
1 5 9 x
• Speed of longitudinal wave in a medium is given by
x 6 8
E
7 (b) v

Direction of wave
When the wave propagates, these particles oscillate where, E is the modulus of elasticity,  is the density
about their equilibrium positions. In Fig. (b) are shown of the medium.
the instantaneous positions of these particles at a • Speed of longitudinal wave in a solid in the form of rod
particular instant. The curve joining these positions is given by
represents the wave. Let the time be counted from the
instant when the particle 1 situated at the origin starts Y
oscillating. If y be the displacement of this particle after v

t seconds, then y = a sin t...(i)
where a is the amplitude of oscillation and  = 2 n, where where, Y is the Young’s modulus of the solid,  is the
n is the frequency. As the wave reaches the particles density of the solid.
SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
• Speed of longitudinal wave in fluid is given by • Nodes : Amplitude = 0
B 2A sin kx = 0
v
 x = 0, /k, 2/k.......
x = 0, /2, , 3/2, 2........
where, B is the bulk modulus,
• Antinodes : Amplitude is maximum.
 is the density of the fluid.
(b) Newton’s formula sin kx = ± 1
• Newton assumed that propagation of sound wave in x = /2k, 3/2k

gas is an isothermal process. Therefore, according to x = /4, 3/4, 5/4
P • Nodes are completely at rest. Antinodes are oscillating

Newton, speed of sound in gas is given by v  with maximum amplitude (2A). The points between a

node and antinode have amplitude between 0 and 2 A.
where P is the pressure of the gas and  is the density
of the gas. • Separation between two consecutive (or antinodes)
= /2.
• According to the Newton’s formula, the speed of sound
in air at S.T.P. is 280 m/s. But the experimental value of • Separation between a node and the next antinode=/4.
the speed of sound in air is 332 ms–1. Newton could not • Nodes and antinodes are alternately placed.
explain this large difference. Newton’s formula was
corrected by Laplace.
t=0 t = T/2
(c) Laplace’s correction
• Laplace assumed that propagation of sound wave in t = T/8 t = 3T/8
gas in an adiabatic process. Therefore, according to
Laplace, speed of sound in a gas is given by
t = T/4
N1 N2 t = T/4 N N
P
v

t = 3T/8 t = T/8
• According to Laplace’s correction the speed of sound
in air at S.T.P. is 331.3 m/s. This value agrees farily well t = T/2 t=0
with the experimental values of the velocity of sound
in air at S.T.P.
• It is clear from the figure that since nodes are, at rest
5. WAVES TRAVELLING IN OPPOSITE SIDECTIONS they don’t transfer energy. In a stationary wave, energy
is not transferred from one point to the other.
• When two waves of same amplitude and frequency
travelling in opposite directions 5.1 Vibrations in a stretched string
y1 = A sin (kx – t) • Law of length : For a given string, under a given tension,
y2 = A sin (kx + t) the fundamental frequency of vibration is inversely
interfere, then a standing wave is produced which is 1

proportional to the length of the string, i.e, n  (T and
given by, 
y = y1 + y2 m are constant)
 y = 2A sin kx cos t • Law of tension : The fundamental frequency of vibration
• Hence the particle at location x is oscillating in S.H.M. of stretched string is directly proportional to the square
with angular frequency  and amplitude 2A sin kx. As root of the tension in the string, provided that length and
the amplitude depends on location (x), particles are mass per unit length of the string are kept constant.
oscillating with different amplitude.
n  T (  and m are constant)
SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
• Law of mass : The fundamental frequency of vibration of

a stretched string is inversely proportional to the square T = Mg
root of its mass per unit length provided that length of
the string and tension in the string are kept constant, i.e., M
1
n (  and T are constant)
m Thus if p loops are formed in the thread, then the
• Melde's experiment : In Melde's experiment, one end of a 2p T

frequency of the tuning fork is n =
flexible piece of thread is tied to the end of a tuning fork. 2 m
The other end passed over a smooth pulley carries a pan
which can be loaded. There are two arrangements to SONOMETER :
vibrate the tied fork with thread. Sonometer consists of a hollow rectangular box of light
Transverse arrangement : wood. One end of the experimental wire is fastened to one
end of the box. The wire passes over a frictionless pulley
Case 1. In a vibrating string of fixed length, the product
P at the other end of the box. The wire is stretched by a
of number of loops and square root of tension are
tension T.
constant or p T = constant.
B1 B2
A
T = Mg P
M
The box serves the purpose of increasing the loudness of
Case 2. When the tuning fork is set vibrating as shown in the sound produced by the vibrating wire. If the length
fig. then the prong vibrates at right angles to the thread. the wire between the two bridges is , then the frequency
As a result the thread is set into motion. The frequency
l T
of vibration of the thread (string) is equal to the frequency of vibration is n =
2 m
of the tuning fork. If length and tension are properly
adjusted then, standing waves are formed in the string. To test the tension of a tuning fork and string, a small
(This happens when frequency of one of the normal paper rider is placed on the string. When a vibrating
modes of the string matched with the frequency of the tuning fork is placed on the box, and if the length between
tuning fork). Then, if p loops are formed in the thread, the bridges is properly adjusted, then when the two
then the frequency of the tuning fork is given by frequencies are exactly equal, the string quickly picks up
the vibrations of the fork and the rider is thrown off the wire.
p T
n= 1. Fixed at both ends.
2 m
• Transverse standing waves with nodes at both ends
Case 3. If the tuning fork is turned through a right angle,
of the string are formed.
so that the prong vibrates along the length of the thread,
then the string performs only a half oscillation for each n
complete vibrations of the prong. This is because the • So, length of string,   if there are (n + 1) nodes
2
thread only makes node at the midpoint when the prong
and n antinodes.
moves towards the pulley i.e. only once in a vibration.
• Frequency of oscillations is
Longitudinal arrangement :
The thread performs sustained oscillations when the v nv
  
natural frequency of the given length of the thread under  2
tension is half that of the fork.
SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
L L nv
• So, Frequency of oscillations is  
2
A A A
N N
N N N
• Fundamental frequency (x = 1)
v
0 
2L
It is also called first harmonic.
• Second harmonic or first overtone
2v 2. Closed organ pipe (One end closed)


2L
• The open end becomes antinode and closed end
• The nth multiple of fundamental frequency is known become a node.
as nth harmonic or (n – 1)th overtone.
• If there are n nodes and n antinodes,
2. Fixed at one end
L = (2n – 1) /4
• Transverse standing waves with node at fixed end and
• So frequency of oscillations is
antinode at open end are formed.
 v  2n  1 v
• So, length of string    2n  1 if there are n nodes  
4  4L
and n antinodes.
• Frequency of oscillations
v  2n  1 v
  
 4
v
• Fundamental frequency, (n = 1)  0 
4L
It is also called first harmonic.
• First overtone or third harmonic.
3v
  3 0 • There are only odd harmonics in a tube closed at one end.
4
• Only odd harmonics are possible in this case. 5.3 Waves having different frequencies
5.2 Vibrations in an organ pipe Beats are formed by the superposition of two waves of
slightly different frequencies moving in the same
1. Open Organ pipe (both ends open) direction. The resultant effect heard in this case at any
• The open ends of the tube becomes antinodes because fixed position will consist of alternate loud and weak
the particles at the open end can oscillate freely. sounds.
• If there are (n + 1) antinodes in all, Let us consider net effect of two waves of frequencies
n  1 and  2 and amplitude A at x = 0.
length of tube,  
2
SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
y1  A sin 21 t Sing Convention. All velocities along the direction S

to L are taken as positve and all velocities along the
y 2  A sin 2 2 t direction L to S are taken as negative.
When the motion is along some other direction the
 y = y1 + y2
component of velocity of source and listener along the
 y = A  sin 21t  sin 2 2 t  line joining the source and listener is considered.
Special Cases :
y   2A cos   1   2  t  sin   1   2  t (a) If the source is moving towards the listener but the
listener is at rest, then vs is positive and vL = 0 (figure
Thus the resultant wave can be represented as a
a). Therefore,
   2 
travelling wave whose frequency is  1  and v
 2      i.e. ’ > 
v  vs
amplitude is 2A cos  ( 1–  2) t.
As the amplitude term contains t, the amplitude varies (b) If the source is moving away from the listener, but the
periodically with time. listener is at rest, then vs is negative and vL = 0 (figure
b). Therefore,
For Loud Sounds : Net amplitude = ± 2A
 cos  ( 1 –  2) t = ± 1 v v
    i.e. ’ < 
v    vs  v  vs
  (1 – 2) t = 0, , 2, 3 .......
(c) If the source is at rest and listener is moving away from
1 2 ........
 t  0, , the source, the vs = 0 and vL is positive (figure c).
1   2 1   2
Therefore,
Hence the interval between two loud sounds is given as :
1

1   2
 the number of loud sounds per second =  1 –  2

 beat per second =  1 –  2
Note that  1 –  2 must be small (0 – 16 Hz) so that
sound variations can be distinguished.
Note:-
• Filling a tuning fork increases its frequency of vibration.
• Loading a tuning fork decreases its frequency of vibration.
6. DOPPLER EFFECT
According to Doppler’s effect, whenever there is a relative
motion between a source of sound and listener, the apparent
frequency of sound heard by the listener is different from
 v  vL 
the actual frequency of sound emitted by the source.    i.e. ’ < 
v
Apparent frequency,
(d) If the source is at rest and listener is moving towards
v  vL
   the source, then vs = 0 and vL is negative (figure d).
v  vs Therefore,
SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
v   vL  v  vL
    i.e. v’ > 
v v
(e) If the source and listener are approaching each other,

then v s is positive and v L is negative (figure e).
Therefore,
v   vL   v  vL 
     i.e. ’ > 
v  vs  v  vs 
(f) If the source and listener are moving away from each
other, then vs is negative and vL is positive, (figure f).
Therefore,
v  vL v  vL
    i.e. ’ < 
v    vs  v  vs
(g) If the source and listener are both in motion in the

same direction and with same velocity, then vs = vL = v’
(say) (figure g). Therefore,
 v  v 
   i.e. ’ = 
 v  v 
It means, there is no change in the frequency of sound

heard by the listerner.
Apparent wavelength heard by the observer is
v  vs
 
v
Note:-
If case the medium is also moving, the speed of sound
 
with respect to ground is considered. i.e. v  v m
7. CHARACTERISTICS OF SOUND
• Loudness : of sound is also called level of intensity of
sound.
In decibel the loudness of a sound of intensity I is
given by
 I 
L = 10 log10   . (I0 = 10–12 w/m2)
 I0 
• Pitch : It is pitch depends on frequency, higher the

frequency higher will be the pitch and shriller will be
the sound.
SCAN CODE
OSCILLATION & WAVES
SOLVED EXAMPLES
OSCILLATIONS
Example - 1 A = 4.00 m ,  =  rad/s, 0 = /4
Write the displacement equation representing the following (a) Displacement at t = 1.00 s i.e.,
conditions obtained in a simple harmonic motion. Amplitude
x = (4.00 m)cos( × 1 + /4) = (4.00) (–cos /4)
= 0.01 m, frequency = 600 Hz, initial phase = /6.
= (4.00) (–0.707) = –2.83 m
Sol. Here A = 0.01 m, v = 600 Hz, 0 = /6 (b) Velocity at t = 1.00 s, i.e., v = – A sin (t + 0)
The displacement equation of simple harmonic motion is or v = – (rad/s)(4.00 m)sin [ × 1 + /4]
y = A sin (t + 0) = A sin(vt + 0) = –(4.00 )(–sin /4) m/s
or y = (0.01 m) sin (1200 t + /6) = (4.00 × 3.14)(0.707) m/s
Example - 2 = 8.89 m/s
A particle executes SHM of amplitude 25 cm and time period (c) Acceleration,
3 s. What is the minimum time required for the particle to 2
a = –  A cos (t + 0)
move between two points 12.5 cm on either side of the 2
= –  × 4.00 cos ( × 1 + /4)
mean position ?
2 2
= – (4.00  )(–cos /4)m/s
Sol. With usual notation, we are given that amplitude A = 25 cm, 2 2
time period T = 3s = 4.00 × (3.14) × 0.707 m/s
2
= 27.9 m/s
Displacement from the mean position, y = 12.5 cm
(d) Maximum velocity, vmax = A =  × 4.00 = 12.6 m/s
If t is the time taken by the particle to move from the mean
2 2
position to a point 12.5 cm on any side of the mean position, Maximum acceleration, amax =  A =  × 4.00
2
= 39.5 m/s
 2   2 
y = A sin t = A sin  t  or 12.5 = 25 sin  t 
 T   3    9
(e) Phase, (t + 0) = (rad/s) × 2s + = 2 + = .
4 4 4
 2  1   2   Example - 4
or sin  t    sin or  t  
 3  2 6  3  6
A block is resting on a piston which is moving vertically
or t = 0.25 s with a SHM of period 1.0 s. At what amplitude of vibration
Obviously, time taken by the particle to move between two will the block and the piston separate ? What is the
points 12.5 cm on either side of the mean position. maximum velocity of the piston at this amplitude ?
= 2t = 2 × 0.25 = 0.5 s. Sol. We are given that T = 1.0 s

Further, the maximum acceleration in SHM, i.e.,
Example - 3
2
amax =  A
A body oscillates with SHM along with X-axis. Its
displacement varies with time according to the equation : For the block and the piston to separate,
2
x = (4.00 m) cos(t + /4) amax  g or  A  g
Calculate at t = 1.00 s : (a) displacement (b) velocity gT 2
2
(c) acceleration (d) Also calculate the maximum speed and or (2/T) A  g or A 
4 2
maximum acceleration and (e) phase at t = 2.00 s.
Sol. By comparing the given equation with the general equation (9.8 m / s 2 )(1.0 s) 2 2
or A (as 4 = 39.48)
for SHM along X-axis, i.e., 39.48
x = Acos (t + 0), we get or A  0.248 m

Thus, the block and the piston separate, when

T'
A = 0.248 m or = (1 + 0.005) = 1.005
T
Clearly,
or T’ = (1.005)T = 1.005 × 2
 2   2  3.14  (as for a second pendulum, T = 2s)
vmax = A =   A    (0.248 m) = 1.56 m/s
 T   1.0 s  or T’ = 2.01 s
Example - 5 Since the time period has increased, the pendulum will make
lesser number of vibrations per day. In other words, it will
A point particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM of amplitude run slow.
0.1 m. When the particle passes through the mean position,
–3
its kinetic energy is 8 × 10 J. Obtain the equation of motion Loss in time in 2 s = 0.01 s
o
of this particle if the initial phase of oscillations is 45 .
0.01s
Sol. Here, m = 0.1 kg, A = 0.1 m, Loss in 1 day (i.e., 86400 s) = 2 s × 86400 s = 432 s
–3
K0 (kinetic energy at mean position) = 8 × 10 J, Example - 7
o
0 = 45 = /4 A spring compressed by 10 cm develops a restoring force
of 10 N. A body of mass 9 kg is placed on it. What is the
1 2 2 1 2 2 –3 force constant of the spring ? What is the depression in
Since K0 = m A ,  (0.1 kg) (0.1 m) = 8 × 10 J
2 2 the spring under the weight of the body ? What is the
period of oscillation if the body is disturbed from its
or  = 4 rad/s
equilibrium position ? [Take g = 10 N/kg]
The equation of motion of a particle executing SHM is given
by Sol. Here, F = 10 N, y = 10 cm = 0.1 m
y = Asin(t + 0)
F 10 N
or y = (0.1 m)sin [(4 rad/s) t + /4] Force constant, k = y = 0.1m = 100 N/m
Example - 6
Further, when F = weight of the body = 9 kg wt = 90 N,
If the length of a second pendulum is increased by 1%,
how many seconds will it lose in a day ? F 90 N
y = k  100 N / m = 0.9 m
Sol. If l be the length of the second pendulum and T be its time
period, then m
Time period, T = 2
k
l
T = 2 ...(i)
g 9  3
= 2 s = 2   s
When length is increased by 1%, i.e., by 1/100, 100  10 
new length = l + (l/100) = l (1 + 1/100) 3
or T= s = 1.88 s.
If T’ be its changed time period, 5
Example - 8
l (1  1/100)
T’ = 2 ...(ii) Write the values of amplitude and angular frequency in the
g
following simple harmonic motion :
From eqns. (i) and (ii),
x = 0.70 cos (180t + 0.23)
1/ 2
T'  1   1  where the various quantities are in SI units.
 1    1  
T  100   100 
Sol. Comparing the given simple harmonic motion with the
T'  1  standard SHM equation
or  1   (applying binomial theorem)
T  200  x = Acos(t + 0), we have A = 0.70 m,  = 180 rad/s
Example - 9 Sol. We are given that time period of a simple pendulum on Earth,
i.e., TE = 3.5 s
Two simple harmonic motions are represented by the 2
equations y1 = 10 sin (3t + /4) and Acceleration due to gravity on Earth, i.e., gE = 9.8 m/s
2
Acceleration due to gravity on Moon, i.e., gM = 1.7 m/s .
y2 = 5 (sin 3t + 3 cos 3t)
Let TM be the time period of the simple pendulum on Moon.
Find the ratio of their amplitudes. Clearly,
Sol. We are given that l l

y1 = 10 sin (3t + /4) ...(i) TE = 2 and TM = 2
gE gE
y2 = 5 (sin 3t + 3 cos 3t)
TM 2 l / g M gE 9.8
or   
= 10[(1/2)sin 3t + ( 3 / 2) cos 3t] TE 2 l / g E gM 1.7 = 2.4
= 10 [cos (/3) sin 3t + sin (/3) cos 3t] Clearly, TM = 2.4 TE = 2.4 × 3.5 = 8.4 s
= 10 sin [3t + (/3)] ...(ii) Example - 12
From eqns. (i) and (ii), it is clear that the amplitudes of both
A body of mass 1 kg is made to oscillate in turn on two
SHM’s are equal i.e., these are in the ration of 1 : 1.
springs, one of force constant 1 N/m and another of 16 N/m.
Example - 10 Calculate the time period in each case.
How will the time period of a simple pendulum change if its
length is doubled ? Sol. For the first spring, m = 1 kg and k = 1 N/m
m 1
Sol. For a simple pendulum, Thus, T1 = 2   = 2 s
k 1
l For the second spring, m = 1 kg, k = 16 N/m
T = 2
g
m 1 
Thus, T2 = 2    s .
For two pendulums of lengths l1 and l2, let their time periods k 16  2 
be T1 and T2. Example - 13
A spring balance has a scale that reads from 0 to 50 kg. The
l1
Clearly, T1 = 2 length of the scale is 20 cm. A body suspended from this
g
spring, when displaced and released, oscillates with a
period of 0.60 s. What is the weight of the body ?
l2
and T2 = 2 Sol. If k is the spring constant of the spring balance,
g
F 50 kg wt  50  9.8 N
T2 l2 k= = 0.2 m 0.20 m = 2450 N/m
Thus, T  l  2 (as l2/ l1 = 2) l
1 1
Let  be the angular frequency of the spring balance.
or T2 = 2 T1
2 2
Clearly,  =  = 10.47 rad/s
Thus, the time period of the simple pendulum increases by T 0.60
a factor of 2. If m is the mass of the body,
Example - 11
k k 2450
or m = 2  (10.47)2 = 22.35 kg
2
The acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the Moon  =
2 m
is 1.7 m/s . What is the time-period of a simple pendulum
on the Moon if its time period on the Earth is 3.5 s ? Weight of the body = mg = 22.35 kg wt
2
(g on Earth = 9.8 m/s ) = 22.35 × 9.8 N = 219 N
Example - 14 Sol. With usual notations, we are given that

A small trolley of mass 2.0 kg resting on a horizontal m = 3.0 kg, k = 1200 N/m, A = 2.0 cm = 0.02 m
turntable is connected by a light spring to the centre of (a) The frequency of oscillation of the mass m is given as
the table. When the turntable is set into rotation at a speed
of 300 rpm, the length of the stretched spring is 40 cm. If 1 k 1 1200 20 –1 –1
the original length of the spring is 35 cm, determine the f=  or f = s = 3.2 s
2 m 2  3.14 3 6.28
force constant of the spring.
(b) The maximum acceleration of the mass, i.e.,
Sol. We are given that 2 2 2 2
amax =  A = (2f) A = 4 f A
mass of the trolley, m = 2.0 kg 2 2 2
or amax = [(39.48)(3.2) (0.02)]m/s = 8.1 m/s
frequency of rotation of the turntable,
(c) The maximum speed of the mass, i.e.,
300 vmax = A = 2fA
v= = 5 rps
60 or vmax = (2 × 3.14 × 3.2 × 0.02) m/s = 0.4 m/s
length of the stretched spring, Example - 16
r = 40 cm = 0.4 m In above problem, what is
original length of the spring, (a) the speed of the mass when the spring is compressed
L = 35 cm = 0.35 m by 1.0 cm ?
extension produced in the spring, (b) potential energy of the mass when it momentarily
comes to rest ?
l = r – L = 0.05 m
tension in the spring = centripetal force, (c) total energy of the oscillating mass ?
mv2 2 2 Sol. (a) Speed v =  A 2  x 2  2f A 2  x 2

Fc = = 4 v mr
r
= 2 × 3.14 × 3.2 (0.02) 2  ( 0.01) 2
If k is the spring constant of the spring,
F = kl = 0.35 m/s (as f = 3.2, A = 0.02 m, x = –0.01 m)
F 4 2 v 2 mr (b) PE of the mass when it momentarily comes to rest (at the

or k=  extreme position), i.e.,
l l
4  9.87  (5) 2  2  0.4 1 1

U0 = m2 A 2  m(2f)2A2 = 22mf2A2
or k= 2 2
0.05
2 2
= 15792 N/m = 1.6 × 10 N/m
4 = 2 × 9.87 × 3 × (3.2) × (0.02) = 0.24 J
Example - 15 (c) Total energy of the oscillating mass (E) = its potential energy
at the extreme position (U0) = 0.24 J
A spring of force constant 1200 N/m is mounted on a
horizontal table as shown in Figure. A mass of 3.0 kg, Example - 17
attached to the free end of spring, is pulled sideways to a In above problem, let us take the position of the mass
distance of 2.0 cm and released. when the spring is unstretched as x = 0, and the direction
from left to right is the positive direction of X-axis. Give x
as a function of time t for the oscillating mass. If at the
moment we start the stop watch (t = 0) ; the mass is
(a) at the mean position
(b) at the maximum stretched position
Determine : (a) the frequency of oscillations,
(c) at the maximum compressed position.
(b) the maximum acceleration of the mass,
In what way do these different functions for SHM differ ?
(c) the maximum speed of the mass. Frequency ? Amplitude ? Or initial phase ?
Sol. For SHM along X-axis,

We know that, V =  a 2  y 2
x = Acos(t + 0) ...(i)
(a) When at t = 0, x = 0, Case (I) 4 =  a 2  32 ...(i)
0 = Acos( × 0 + 0)
Case (II) 3 =  a 2  4 2 ...(ii)
or cos 0 = 0 or 0 = – /2
From eqn. (i), x = A cos(t – /2) = A sin t Dividing (i) by (ii), we get
or x = 2 sin (20 t) 2
4  a 9 16 a 2  9
–1  or 9  a 2  16
(as A = 2 cm,  = 2f = 2 × 3.142 × 3.2 = 20 s ) 3  a 2  16
(b) When at t = 0, x = A, 2 2 2
or 16 a – 256 = 9 a – 81 or 7 a = 256 – 81 = 175
A = Acos( × 0 + 0)
2 175
or cos 0 = –1 or 0 = 0 or a = = 25 or a = 25 = 5
7
From eqn. (i) x = A cos t = 2cos (20t)
Substituting it in (i), we get
(c) When at t = 0, x = –A,
–A = Acos( × 0 + 0) 4 =  52  32   25  9 =  × 4
–1
or cos 0 = – 1 or 0 =  or w = 4/4 = 1 rad s
From eqn. (i), x = Acos(t + ) When the particle is at a distance 2.5 m from the extreme
= –A cos t position, then its distance from the mean position,
or x = –2cos(20 t) x = 5 – 2.5 = 2.5 m
Example - 18 Since, the time is to be noted from the extreme postion for
SHM therefore, we shall use the relation
A spring compressed by 0.1 m develops a restoring force
10 N. A body of mass 4 kg is placed on it. Deduce (i) the x = a cos t
force constant of the spring (ii) the depression of the spring
2.5 1 
under the weight of the body (take g = 10 N/kg) and (iii) the or 2.5 = 5 cos 1 × t = 5 cos t or cos t =   cos
5 2 3
period of oscillation, if the body is disturbed.
 22
Sol. Here, F = 10 N ;  l = 0.1 m ; m = 4 kg or t = 3  7  3 = 1.048 s.
F 10 –1 Example - 20
(i) k = = = 100 Nm
l 0.1 A simple harmonic oscillation is represented by the
equation y = 0.40 sin (440 t + 0.61) here, y and t are in m
mg 4 10 and s respectively. What are the values of (i) amplitude
(ii) y =  = 0.4 m
k 100 (ii) angular frequency (iii) frequency of oscillations
(iv) time period of oscillations and (v) initial phase ?
m 22 4
(iii) T = 2 =2× = 1.26 s Sol. The given equation is y = 0.40 sin (440 t + 0.61)
k 7 100
Comparing it with the equation of SHM y = a sin (t + 0)
Example - 19
We have, (i) Amplitude, a = 0.40 m
A particle executing SHM along a st. line has a velocity of
–1
4 ms , when at a distance of 3 m from its mean position (ii) Angular frequency,  = 440 Hz
–1
and 3 ms , when at a distance of 4 m from it. Find the time  440
it takes to travel 2.5 m from the positive extremity of its (iii) Frequency of oscillations, f = 2  2  22 / 7 = 70 Hz.
oscillation.
1 1
–1 (iv) Time period of oscillations, T =  = 0.0143
Sol. Here (case i), V1 = 4 ms ; y1 = 3m ; f 70
–1
(case ii), V2 = 3 ms ; y2 = 4m. (v) Initial phase angle, 0 = 0.61 rad.
Example - 21 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
A particle executes SHM of time period 10 s. The Sol. K.E. = m (a –y ) and P.E. = m y
2 2
displacement of particle at any instant is given by the
relation x = 10 sin t (in cm). (i) Find the velocity of body 1 2 2 2 1 2 2
2 s after it passes through the mean position and (ii) the As, K.E. = P.E.  m (a –y ) = m  y
2 2
acceleration 2 s after it passes the mean position.
2 2 2 2 2
or a – y = y or y = a /2 or y = a/ 2 = 0.71 a
2 2 –1
Sol. Here ; T = 10 s ;  =  rad/s ; amplitude, r = 10 cm. Example - 24
T 10
A mass of 1 kg is executing SHM which is given by,
Velocity of the particle at any instant t is given by V = r  cos t
x = 6.0 cos (100 t + /4) cm. What is the maximum kinetic
2  2  energy ?
(i) When t = 2 s, V = 10 × cos   2  = 2  cos (0.4 ) =
10  10  Sol. Here, m = 1 kg.
1.942 cm/s.
The given equation of SHM is x = 6.0 cos (100 t + /4)
(ii) Acceleration at any time t is given by
Comparing it with the equation of SHM x = a cos (t + ),
2 –1
2  2   2  2 we have, a = 6.0 cm = 6/100 m and  = 100 rad s
A = – r sin t = –   × 10 × sin   2  = –3.754 cm/s
10
   10 
2
1 2
In fact, the acceleration is 3.754 cm/s and is directed towards Max. kinetic energy = m(Vmax)
2
the mean position.
2
Example - 22 1 2 1  6 
= m(a) = × 1 ×  100  = 18 J
A particle executes simple harmonic motion with a time 2 2  100 
period of 16 s. At time t = 2 s, the particle crosses the mean
–1 Example - 25
position while at t = 4 s, its velocity is 4 ms . Find its
amplitude of motion. An 8 kg body performs SHM of amplitude 30 cm. The
restoring force is 60 N, when the displacement is 30 cm.
Sol. Here, T = 16 s ; At t = 2 s, y = 0 and at t = 4 s ; Find (a) time period (b) the acceleration, P.E and K.E., when
–1
displacement is 12 cm.
V = 4 ms ; a = ?
2 Sol. Here, m = 8 kg ; a = 30 cm = 0.30 m ;
For simple harmonic motion, y = a sin t = a sin t
T (a) F = 60 N ; y = 0.30 m
When t = 4 s, the time taken by particle to travel from the
F 60
mean position to a given position = 4 – 2 = 2 s. The F = ky or k = y  0.30 = 200 Nm
–1
displacement,
 2   a k 200
y = a sin   2  = a sin    ...(i) As  =  = 5 rad/s
–1
 16  4 2 m 8
Velocity, V =  a 2  y 2
2 2  22 44
Time period, T =   7  5  35 = 1.256 s
 2  2 2  a
 4 =   a a / 2  
16
  8 2 (b) Here, y = 12 cm = 0.12 m
2 2 –2
32 2  Acceleration, A =  y = (5) × 0.12 = 3.0 ms
or a= = 14.4 m.
 1 2 1 2
P.E. = ky = × (200) × (0.12) = 1.44 J
Example - 23 2 2
A particle executes SHM of amplitude a. At what distance
from the mean position is its K.E. equal to its P.E. ? 1 2 2 1 2 2
K.E. = k (a – y ) = × 200 × [(0.30) – (0.12) ] = 7.56 J
2 2
–1
Example - 26 Sol. (a) Here m = 200 g = 0.2 kg, k = 90 Nm
Two identical springs of spring constant k are attached to k 90 –1 –1
a block of mass m and to fixed supports as shown in Figure.   = 450 Nm kg
m 0.2
Show that when the mass is displaced from its equilibrium
position on either side, it executes a simple harmonic
b2 (0.04) 2
motion. Find the period of oscillation.  2 –2
4m 4  (0.2) 2 = 0.01 kg s
2
m
k k k b2 k b2 k
As,  , therefore, ’ =  2

m 4m 2 m 4m m
2 m 22 0.2
T=  2  2  0.3 s.
' k 7 90
Sol. Let the mass m be displaced by a small distance x to the (b) If T is the time, when amplitude drops to half value then
right as shown in Figure. Due to it, the spring on the left amplitude of the damped oscillations at time t is
–bt/2m
hand side gets stretched by length x and the spring on the a = x0 e
right hand side gets compressed by length x. The forces when t = T, a = x0/2
acting on the mass due to springs are
F1 = – kx towards left hand side x0 –bT/2m
 = x0 e
F2 = – kx towards left hand side 2
bT/2m bT
or 2=e or log e 2 =
F1 F2 2m
2m 2.3026  2m
or T= loge2 = log102
b b
2.3026  2  0.2  0.3010

x =
0.04
Therefore, total restoring force on mass m is
= 6.93 s.
F = F1 + F2 = – kx + (– kx) = –2 kx ...(i)
(c) If T’ is the time, when mechanical energy drops to half its
Here –ve sign shows that force F is directed towards the
mechanical energy E0, then mechanical energy E of the
equilibrium position O and F  x. Therefore, if the mass m is
damped oscillations at an instant t is given by
left free, it will execute linear SHM.
–bt/m
E = E0 e
Comparing (i) with the relation, F = – kx, we have Spring
factor, K = 2 k E0 –bT’/m
When t = T’, E = E0/2 then = E0e
Here, interia factor = mass of the block = m 2
bT’/m
or 2=e
inertia factor m
As time period, T = 2  2
spring factor 2k bT '
or loge2 =
Example - 27 m
For the damped oscillator shown in Figure, the mass m of m

–1
the block is 200 g, k = 90 Nm and the damping constant b or T’ = 2.3026 log102 ×
–1
b
is 40 gs . Calculate (a) the period of oscillation, (b) time
taken for its amplitude of vibrations to drop to half of its 0.2
initial value and (c) the time taken for its mechanical energy or T’ = 2.3026 × 0.3010 × = 3.46 s.
0.04
to drop to half its initial value.
WAVES (a) The reflected sound is travelling in air.
Example - 28 Therefore if a is the wavelength of the reflected wave,
An observer standing at the sea coast observes 54 waves va 340 m / s

a   –4
reaching the coast per minute. If the wavelength of the f 106 s 1 = 3.4 × 10 m
wave is 10m, find the speed. What types of waves did he
observe? Explain (b) Further, the transmitted wave is travelling through water
Sol. Since 54 waves reach the coast in 1 min (i.e., 60 s), and as such wavelength of the transmitted wave, i.e.,
54 v w 1486 m / s
w   –3
= 1.49 × 10 m
frequency of the waves, i.e., f = = 0.9 Hz f 106 s 1
60
As  = 10 m, speed of the waves Example - 31
2
v = f = (0.9 × 10) m/s = 9 m/s A travelling harmonic wave on a string is described by :
The waves are transverse. Strictly speaking, these waves y = 7.5 sin (0.0050 x + 12t + /4)
are ripples, which are neither entirely transverse nor (a) What are the displacement and velocity of oscillation
longitudinal. This is due to the reason that the water particles of a point at x = 1 cm and t = 1 a ? Is this speed equal to
while moving up and down, also move back and forth the speed of wave propagation ?
horizontally. Thus, water waves are wrongly classified as (b) Locate the points of the string which have the same
transverse waves. transverse displacements and velocity as the x = 1 cm
Example - 29 point at t = 2 s, 5 s, 11 s.
How far does the sound travel in air when a tuning fork of
Sol. We are given that
frequency 560 Hz makes 30 vibrations ? Given speed of
sound in air = 336 m/s. y = 7.5 sin (0.0050 x + 12t + /4) ...(i)
(a) At x = 1 cm and t = 1 s, displacement,
Sol. Here, speed of sound in air,
y = 7.5 sin (0.0050 × 1 + 12 × 1 + /4)
v = 336 m/s
or y = 7.5 sin (12.7904 rad)
frequency of the tuning fork, f = 560 Hz
Time taken to complete 30 vibrations, i.e.,  180 
or y = 7.5 sin 12.7904  
  
30 3
t=  s = 7.5 sin 732.83°
560 56
y = 7.5 sin (720° + 12.83°)
Distance travelled by sound,
= 7.5 sin 12.83°
 3  or y = (7.5 × 0.2215) cm = 1.666 cm
s = vt = (336 m/s)  s  = 18 m
 56  Speed of oscillation at a point,
Example - 30
dy
A bat emits ultrasonic sound of frequency 1000 kHz in air. vp 
dt
If this sound meets a water surface, what is the wavelength
of : (a) the reflected sound (b) the transmitted sound ? or v p = 7.5 × 12 × cos (0.0050 x + 12t + /4)
Speed of sound in air = 340 m/s and in water = 1486 m/s.
= 90 cos (0.0050 x + 12t + /4)
Sol. We are given that frequency of the ultrasonic sound, When x = 1 cm and t = 1 s,
6
f = 1000 kHz = 10 Hz v p = (90 cos 12.83°) cm/s
speed of sound in air, va = 340 m/s
= (90 × 0.9751) cm/s = 87.75 cm/s
speed of sound in water,
The general equation of the travelling harmonic wave
vw = 1486 m/s (travelling towards left) is
y = A sin [t + kx + 0] ...(ii) Sol. We are given that

Comparing eqns. (i) and (ii), we get frequency of the fundamental mode, f = 45 Hz
–2
A = 7.5 cm,  = 12 rad/s linear density of the wire,  = 4 × 10 kg/m
–2
k = 0.0050 rad/cm mass of the wire, M = 3.5 × 10 kg
Speed of wave propagation, Clearly, length of the wire,
–2 –2
L = M/ = (3.5 × 10 kg)/ (4 × 10 kg/m) = 0.875 m
 12 rad / s
v = k  0.0050 rad / cm = 2400 cm/s = – 24 m/s (a) When the string is vibrating in its fundamental mode,
L = /2
(Negative sign has been taken as the wave travels towards left)
or  = 2L = (2 × 0.875) m = 1.75 m
We thus find that vp (particle speed) is not equal to v (wave-
If v is the speed of transverse wave on the string,
speed*).
v = f = (45 × 1.75) m/s = 79 m/s
 2 2 (b) If T is the tension in the string,
(b) As k = ,   = 12.6 m
 k 0.0050
All points located at distances, x = n (where n = + 1, +2, + 3, ...) T 2
v= or T = v 
from the point x = 1 cm have the same displacement and velocity. 
Example - 32 or
2 –2
T = (79) (4 × 10 ) = 248 N
A uniform rope of length 12 m and mass 6 kg hangs
Example - 34
vertically from a rigid support. A block of mass 2 kg is
One end of a long string of linear mass d ensity
attached to the free end of the rope. A transverse pulse of –3
= 8.0 × 10 kg/m is connected to an electrically driven
wavelength 0.06 m is produced at the lower end of the
tuning fork of frequency 256 Hz. The other end passes
rope. What is the wavelength of the rope when it reaches
over a pulley and is tied to a pan containing a mass of
the top of the rope ?
90 kg. The pulley end absorbs all the incoming energy so
Sol. Tension at the lower end, T1 = 2 kg wt that reflected waves at this end have negligible amplitude.
Tension at the top end T2 = 2 kg wt + 6 kg wt = 8 kg wt At t = 0, the left end (fork end) of the string x = 0 has zero
transverse displacement (y = 0) and is moving along
Speed of the wave at the lower end,
positive y-direction. The amplitude of the wave is 5.0 cm.
v1 = T1 /  Write down the transverse displacement y as a function
of x and t that describes this wave on the string.
Speed of the wave at the top end,
Sol. We are given that,
v2 = T2 / 
tension in the string, T = (90 × 9.8) N = 882 N
mass per unit length of the string,
v1 T1 2 1
Thus, v  T  8  2
–3
 = 8.0 × 10 kg/m
2 2
frequency of the wave, f = 256 Hz
or v2 = 2v1 or f2 = 2 (f1) or 2 = 21
amplitude of the wave, A = 5.0 cm = 0.05 m
(as frequency remains the same) Since the wave propagation along the string is a transverse
As 1 = 0.06 m, travelling wave, the velocity of the wave is given by
2 = 2 (0.06 m) = 0.12 m
T 882 N 2
Example - 33 v=  = 3.32 × 10 m/s
 8 103 kg / m
A wire stretched between two rigid supports vibrates in its
3
fundamental mode with a frequency of 45 Hz. The mass of Now,  = 2f = (2 × 3.14 × 256) rad/s = 1.61 × 10 rad/s
–2 –2
the wire is 3.5 × 10 kg and its linear density is 4 × 10 kg/m.
What is : (a) speed of a transverse wave on the string and   1.61103 rad / s
As v = ,k   = 4.84 rad/m
(b) the tension in the string ? k v 3.32 102 m / s
As the wave travels towards the positive direction of X- Example - 36

axis, the equation of the wave is : Calculate the speed of sound in a liquid of density
3 9 2
y = Asin(t – kx) 8000 kg/m and bulk modulus 2 × 10 N/m .
where x, y and A are in metres. Thus, 3
3
Sol. Here,  = 8000 kg/m
y = 0.05 sin (1.61 × 10 t – 4.84 x) 9 2
and B = 2 × 10 N/m
Example - 35
A uniform rope of mass 0.1 kg and length 2.45 m hangs B 2 109 N / m 2
Thus,  = 
from a ceiling.  8000 kg / m 3
(a) Find the speed of transverse wave in the rope at a point
= 500 m/s
0.5 m distant from the lower end.
Example - 37
(b) Calculate the time taken by a transverse wave to travel a 10
full length of the rope. For aluminium, the bulk modulus of elasticity is 7.5 × 10
2 3 3
N/m and density is 2.70 × 10 kg/m . Deduce the speed of
Sol. (a) If L is the length of the rope and m is its mass, then mass longitudinal waves in aluminium.
per unit length of the rope, i.e.,
Sol. We are given that
m 10 2
B = 7.5 × 10 N/m ,  = 2.7 × 10 kg/m
3 3
=
L
Tension at a point distant y from the lower end, i.e., B 7.5 1010 N/m 2
Thus,  = 
 2.70 103 kg/m3
T = weight of the rope of length y = yg
3
If  is the speed of the transverse wave set up in the rope, = 5.3 × 10 m/s.
Example - 38
yg
= T/   yg The prongs of a tuning fork A, originally in unison with

tuning fork B are filed. Now the tuning forks on being
When y = 0.5 m, sounded together produce 2 beats/s. What is frequency
of A after filing, if frequency of B is 250 Hz ?
= (0.5 m)(9.8 m / s 2 ) = 2.2 m/s
Sol. On filing, the frequency of tuning fork A increases.
dy dy dy
(b) As  = therefore  yg or dt = The new frequency of A after filing
dt dt gy
= (250 + 2) Hz = 252 Hz
Integrating both sides within proper limits, we get
Example - 39
t L L
1 dy 1 1/ 2 A sitar wire and a tabla when sounded together give four
 dt 
0 g
0 y

g
y0
dy
beats/s. What do we conclude from this ? As the tabla
membrane is tightened, the beat rate may decrease or
L increase. Explain.
1  y1 / 2 
or t=  
g  (1/ 2)  0 Sol. Let f1 and f2 be the frequencies of the sitar wire and the tabla
membrane respectively. Since in this case 4 beats/s are heard,
2 L f1 = f2 + 4
= [ L  0]  2
g g
On tightening the tabla membrane, its frequency increases.
Now there are two possibilities :
2.45 m
As L = 2.45 m, t = 2 (i) If f1 < f2, the number of beats increases on tightening the
9.8 m / s 2 membrane.
(ii) If f1 > f2, the number of beats decreases on tightening the
 1
membrane.
or t =  2 4  s = 1 s
 
A tuning fork of unknown frequency gives 4 beats/s. With Two travelling waves of equal amplitudes and equal
another fork of frequency 310 Hz, it gives the same number frequencies move in opposite directions along a string.
of beats/s when loaded with wax. Find the unknown They interfere to produce a standing wave having the
frequency. equation
y = A cos kx sin t
Sol. Let us name the tuning fork of unknown frequency as A and –1 –1
where A = 1.0 mm, k = 1.57 cm and  = 78.5 s
the tuning fork of known frequency i.e., 310 Hz as B. When
A and B are sounded together, 4 beats are heard per second. Find : (a) the velocity of the component waves (b) the
node closest to the origin (in the region x > 0) and (c) the
Thus, frequency of A, i.e.,f is either (310 + 4) Hz = 314 Hz
antinode closest to the origin (x > 0) and (d) the amplitude
or f = (310 – 4) Hz = 306 Hz of the particle at x = 2.33 cm.
In case, the frequency of A is 306 Hz, on loading it with wax,
Sol. (a) The standing wave is formed by the superposition of
its frequency decreases and may become 305 Hz, 304 Hz,
303 Hz etc. In that case, the number of beats given by it the waves y1 = (A/2) sin (t – kx) and
per second when sounded with B will be (310 – 305) = 5, y2 = A/2 sin (t + kx) as y = y1 + y2
(310 – 304) = 6, (310 – 303) = 7 etc. i.e., the number of beats/ The wave velocity (magnitude) of either wave, i.e.,
s is more than 4. Thus, f = 306 Hz is not possible. If f = 314
 78.5s 1
Hz, on loading A with wax, its frequency may decrease to  = k  1.57 cm 1 = 50 cm/s
306 Hz and then it will give (310 – 306) = 4 beats/s with B.
Thus, the unknown frequency is 314 Hz. (b) For a node, y = 0, i.e., cos kx = 0
Example - 41 
or kx = (for the smallest positive value of x)
Calculate the speed of sound in a gas in which two 2
wavelength 204 cm and 208 cm produce 20 beats in 6 second.
 / 2 3.14 / 2
Sol. Here, wavelength of one wave, 1 = 204 cm or x = k  1.57 cm 1 1cm
Wavelength of the second wave 2 = 208 cm (c) For an antinode, |cos kx| = 1
Let speed of sound in the gas =  cm/s or kx =  (for the smallest positive value of x)
Frequency of one wave = f0

Frequency of second wave = f2 or x = = 2 cm
k
Number of beats produced per second, (d) The amplitude of vibration of the particle at x is given by
|A cos kx|.
20
fb = For the given point (x = 2.33 cm),
6
–1
amplitude = Acos kx = (1.0 mm)cos [(1.57 cm )(2.33 cm)]
As f1 – f2 = fb,
= (1.00 mm) cos (3.658 rad) = 0.875 mm
  20    [cos (3.658 rad) = cos (3.658 × 57°)
   as f1  and f 2  
204 208 6  1 2  = cos 209° = cos (180° + 29°)
= – cos 29° = –0.875
 (208  204) 20 = 0.875 in magnitude]
or 
204  208 6
Example - 43
A 3.6 g string of a sonometer is 64 cm long. What should
 20   204  208 
or    cm/s be the tension in the string in order that it may vibrate in
 6  4 
2 segments with a frequency of 256 Hz ?
= 35360 cm/s = 353.6 m/s
Sol. Here, l = 64 cm = 0.64 m, (On shortening the length, the frequency of the wire
–3 –2
 = 3.6 × 10 kg/64 × 10 m = 5.6 × 10 kg/m,
–3 increases)
f1 = 256 Hz According to the law of length,
Since the string vibrates in 2 segments, vf = f’L’
f1 = 2f or f × 73 = (f + 3) (72.5) = 72.5 f + 217.5

or 73 f – 72.5 f = 217.5 or 0.5 f = 217.5
1 T f = 435 Hz
or 256 = 2 ×
2 
Example - 46
A string vibrates with a frequency 200 Hz. Its length is
1 T doubled and its tension is altered until it begins to vibrate
or 256 =
0.64 (5.6 103 ) with frequency 300 Hz. What is the ratio of the new tension
2 –3 to the original tension ?
or T = (256 × 0.64) (5.6 × 10 ) N = 150 N
Example - 44 Sol. Let f1 and f2 be the frequencies in the two cases and L1, L2
A wire of length 1.5 m is stretched by a force of 44 N. The and T1, T2 be respectively the corresponding lengths of the
3
diameter of the wire is 2 mm and its density is 1.4 g/cm . string and tensions under which it is vibrating.
Calculate the frequency of the fundamental note emitted
by it. 1 T1
f1 = ,
2L1 
Sol. With ususal notation, we are given that
L = 1.5 m, T = 44 N 1 T2
–3 f2 =
D = 2 mm = 2 × 10 m 2L2 
3 3
 = 1.4 g/cm = 1400 kg/m
(For the same string,  in both the cases remains same)
1 T
We know that f = f1 L 2 T1
LD  Thus, f  L T2
2 1
1 44
= Hz 200 T
1.5(2 103 ) (22 / 7) 1400 or 2 1
300 T2
100
= Hz = 33.3 Hz. (as f1 = 200 Hz, f2 = 300 Hz and L2 = 2L1 or L2/L1 = 2)
3
Example - 45 2 T 4 T T
or  2 1 or  4 1 or 2  9
When the wire of a sonometer is 73 cm long, it is in 3 T2 9 T2 T1
resonance with a tuning fork. On shortening the wire by
Thus, the new tension is 9 times the original tension.
0.5 cm, it makes 3 beats with the same fork. Calculate the
frequency of the tuning fork. Example - 47
A wire of length 108 cm produces a fundamental note of
Sol. We are given that frequency 256 Hz, when stretched by a weight of 1 kg. By
L (original length of the wire) = 73 cm how much its length should be increased so that its pitch
L’ (shortened length of the wire) = (73 – 0.5) cm = 72.5 cm is raised by a major tone, if it is now stretched by a weight
of 4 kg ?
Let f be the frequency of the tuning fork.
This also is the frequency of the wire when its length is L as Sol. Case I. Frequency of the fundamental note, f = 256 Hz
it is then in resonance with the tuning fork. Let f’ be the length of the wire, L = 108 cm
frequency of the wire when its length is L’. Since it then
stretching force, T = 1 kg f
produces 3 beats/s with the tuning fork, f’ = f + 3
Case II. Frequency of the major tone emitted harmonics are present whereas in the case of a closed organ
pipe only odd harmonics are present.
9 9
i.e., f’ = f    256 Hz = 288 Hz Example - 49
8 8
Find the ratio of length of a closed pipe to that of the open
stretching force, T = 4 kg f pipe in order that the second overtone of the former is in
Let the length be increased by x. unison with fourth overtone of the latter.
Increased length of the wire, i.e.,
Sol. Let f and f’ be the fundamental frequencies of the open and
L’ = L + x = (108 + x) cm the closed pipes respectively of lengths L and L’.
1 T v v
Clearly, f = and f’ = ...(i)
As f = , 2L 4L '
2L 
where v is the speed of sound.
1 1kg f Second overtone of the closed pipe = 5f’
for Case I, 256 =
2 108  Fourth overtone of the open pipe = 5f
and for Case II, Since the two notes are to be in unison,
5f’ = 5f or f’ = f
1 4 kg f
288 = Thus, from eqns. (i) and (ii),
2  (108  x) 
v v
Dividing, we get 
4L ' 2L
256 108  x L' 2 1
 or 4L’ = 2L or   or L’ : L :: 1 : 2
288 108  4 L 4 2
Example - 50
8 108  x 108  x
or   or 972 + 9x = 1728 3
A brass rod (density 8.3 g/cm ), 3 m long is clamped at the
9 108  2 216
centre, It is excited to give longitudinal vibrations and the
frequency of the fundamental note is 600 Hz. Calculate the
756
or 9x = 1728 – 972 = 756 cm or x = = 84 cm velocity of sound in the rod and its Young’s modulus.
9
Thus, the length should be increased by 84 cm. Sol. Here, density of the brass rod,
3 3 3
 = 8.3 g/cm = 8.3 × 10 kg/m
Example - 48
A pipe of length 2L open at both ends has the same length of the rod, L = 3 m
frequency as another pipe of length L closed at one end. frequency of the note produced, f = 600 Hz
Prove this. Also state if the sounds will be identical for the Let the wavelength of vibration in the rod = 
two pipes.
As the rod is clamped at its centre, the centre is a node and
Sol. Fundamental frequency of open pipe of length 2L, i.e., free ends are antinodes.
Thus,  = 2 L = 6m
v v
f = 2  2L  4L ...(i) If speed of sound in brass is , then
Fundamental frequency of a closed pipe of length L, i.e.,  = f
3
v or = (600 Hz) (6 m) = 3.6 × 10 m/s
f’ = ...(ii) Let Young’s modulus of the material of the rod = Y
4L
From eqns. (i) and (ii), f = f’
As = Y/ ,
The sound (i.e., its quality) which depends upon the number 2
of harmonics and their relative intensities will not be the Y= ×
3 2 3 3 11 2
same in the two cases. In case of an open organ pipe, all the = (3.6 × 10 m/s) (8.3 × 10 kg/m ) = 1.1 × 10 N/m .
Example - 51 From eqns. (i) and (ii),

A steel rod 100 cm long is clamped at its middle. The 2 s f
fundamental frequency of longitudinal vibrations of the rod f’ – f’’ = (1 + s/)f – (1 – s/)f =

is given to be 2.53 kHz. What is the speed of sound in steel?
(f '  f '')f 3 340 m / s
or s = 
Sol. Here, length of the steel rod, L = 100 cm = 1m 2f 2  340 = 1.5 m/s
fundamental frequency of the longitudinal vibrations,
3
(as v’ – v’’ = 3, v = 340 m/s and f = 340 Hz)
f = 2.53 kHz = 2.53 × 10 Hz
Example - 53
If is the wavelength of the wave generated,
Consider a source moving towards an observer at the speed
/2 = L or = 2L = 2m of s = 0.95v. Deduce the observed frequency if the original
Therefore, speed of sound in steel rod, i.e., is 500 Hz. (Think what would happen if s>. Jet planes
3
 = f = (2.53 × 10 )(2 m) moving faster than sound are now so common). Here, is
3
the speed of sound.
= 5.06 × 10 m = 5.06 km/s
Aliter : For a rod vibrating longitudinally, Sol. We are given that v = 500 Hz, s = 0.95 v.
fundamental frequency, Since the observer is at rest and the source is moving towards
the observer, the apparent frequency,
v
f=
2L       500
or
3 –1
= 2fL = 2 (2.53 × 10 s )(1 m) f’ =     f   500 =
 s     0.95   0.05
3
or = 5.06 × 10 m/s = 5.06 km/s
or f’ = 10,000 Hz
Example - 52
If s >(–s) is negative and as such f’ is negative which
Two tuning forks with natural frequencies of 340 Hz each
has no meaning. Thus, Doppler formula is applicable so
move relative to a stationary observer. One fork moves
long as the velocity of the source does not exceed the
away from the observer while the other moves towards
velocity of the wave. In case of jet planes which move with
him at the same speed. The observer hears beats of
speed greater than the sound, a shock wave is formed whose
frequency 3 Hz. Find the speed of the tuning fork. Speed
wavefront is a cone with the plane at its apex. The semi-
of sound in air = 340 m/s. –1
vertical angle of the cone is sin (/s)
Sol. Let s be the speed of source and  be that of the sound Example - 54
waves. Let f be the frequency of the tuning fork. If v’ is its What is the speed of the observer for whom a note is
apparent frequency when it moves towards the stationary 10 per cent lower than the emitted frequency ?
observer,
Sol. As the apparent frequency (f’) is less than emitted frequency
   1 (f), the observer must move away from the source.
f’ =  f  f = (1 – S/)–1 f
 (    )
S 
(1  S
/ )
If is the speed of sound and o that of the observer, then
Applying binomial theorem (as S/ < 1), we get   o
f’ = f
 s  
f’ = 1  f ...(i) As the apparent frequency is 10% lower than the emitted
  
frequency,
If f’’ is the apparent frequency of the tuning fork when it
moves away from the stationary source, 10 90
f’ = f – f f = 0.9 f
100 100
   1
f’’ =  f  f = (1 + s/)–1f    o     o 
   s  (1  S / ) or 0.9 f =  f or 0.9 =  
     
Applying binomial theorem (since s/< 1), we get or 0.9  = –0 or 0 = – 0.9 = 0.1 
f’’ = (1 – s/)f ...(ii) Thus, speed of the observer is (1/10)th of the speed of sound.
OSCILLATION & WAVES 104
SHM Basics Phase, Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration, Kinetic,

1. Which of the following equations does not represent a Potential Energy as a funtion of time and positon
simple harmonic motion ? 6. A particle is performing S.H.M. along X-axis with amplitude 4
cm and time period 1.2 sec. The minimum time taken by the
(a) y = a sin  t
particle to move from x = + 2 cm to x = + 4 cm and back again
(b) y = b cos  t is given by
(c) y = a sin  t + b cos  t (a) 0.6 s (b) 0.4 s
(d) y = a tan  t (c) 0.3 s (d) 0.2 s
7. The displacement of an oscillating particle varies with time
2. A particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM of amplitude 0.1
m. When the particle passes through the mean position,  t 1
–3 (in seconds) according to the equation y = sin   ,
its K.E. is 8 × 10 J. The equation of motion of the particle, 2 2 3
o
when the initial phase of oscillation is 45 , is where y is in cm. The maximum acceleration of the particle is
(a) y = 0.1 cos (3 t + /4) (b) y = 0.1 sin (3 t + /4) approximately
–2 –2
(a) 0.62 cm s (b) 1.81 cm s
(c) y = 0.1 sin (4 t + /4) (d) y = 0.1 cos (4 t + /4) –2 –2
(c) 3.62 cm s (d) 5.2 cm s
3. The displacement of a particle is represented by the equation:
8. The kinetic energy of a particle executing S.H.M. is 16 J when
  it is in its mean position. If the amplitude of oscillations is 25
y = 3 cos   2t 
4  cm and the mass of the particle is 5.12 kg, the time period of
its oscillation in second is
The motion of the particle is :
(a) simple harmonic with period 2/ (a) /5 (b) 2 
(b) simple harmonic with period / (c) 5  (d) 20 
(c) periodic but not simple harmonic 9. Two pendulums of time period 3 s and 8 s respectively starts
oscillating simultaneously from two opposite extreme
(d) non-periodic positions. After how much time they will be in the same
4. For the two curves choose the correct option. phase ?
24 12
(a) s (b) s
5 5
24 12
(c) s (d) s
11 11
10. The force constant of a weightless spring is 16 N/m. A body
of mass 1.0 kg suspended from it is pulled down through 5
(a) (Amplitude)A > (Amplitude)B cm from it’s mean position and then released. The maximum
(b) (Time period)A > (Time period)B kinetic energy of the system (spring + body) will be
–2 –2
(c) Both (a) and (b) are correct (a) 2 × 10 J (b) 4 × 10 J
–2 –2
(c) 8 × 10 J (d) 16 × 10 J
(d) Both (a) and (b) are incorrect
11. The time taken by a particle executing S.H.M. of period T to
5. The phase difference between x1 = A sin t and x2 = A cos
move from the mean position to half the maximum
t is : displacement is
(a) /2 (b) 4 (a) T/2 (b) T/4
(c) /3 (d) /6 (c) T/8 (d) T/12
12. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion with 17. The relation between acceleration and displacement of four
frequency f. The frequency at which its kinetic energy particles are given below :
changes into potential energy is which one of the particles is executing simple harmonic
(a) f/2 (b) f motion ?
2
(c) 2 f (d) 4 f (a) ax = + 2x (b) ax = + 2x
2
13. A particle executes simple harmonic motion between x = –A (c) ax = – 2x (d) ax = – 2x
and x = + A. The time taken for it to go from 0 to A/2 is t1 and 18. A particle executing SHM has a maximum speed of 30 cm/s
to go from A/2 to A is t2. Then 2
and a maximum acceleration of 60 cm/s . The period of
(a) t1 < t2 (b) t1 > t2 oscillation is :
(c) t1 = t2 (d) t1 = 2 t2 
14. For a particle executing simple harmonic motion, the (a)  s (b) s
2
displacement x is given by x = A sin t. Identify the graph,
which represents the variation of potential energy (PE) as a 
(c) 2 s (d) s
function of time t and displacement x 4
II A
19. A block is left from x = + A, its speed at x  is
2
Energy
( = 2 rad/s).
t
Energy
III IV (a) (3A) m/s (b) ( 3A) m/ s
(c) (2A) m/s (d) ( 2A) m/ s

x
–A +A 20. For a particle in SHM, if the amplitude of the displacement is
(a) I, III (b) II, III a and the amplitude of velocity is v the amplitude of
(c) I, IV (d) II, IV acceleration is :
15. The potential energy of a harmonic oscillation of mass 2 kg
in its mean position is 5 J. If its total energy is 9 J and its v2
(a) va (b)
amplitude is 0.01 m, its time period of oscillation will be a
(a) (/10) s (b) (/20) s
(c) (/50) s (d) (/100) s v2 v
(c) (d)
16. A mass m is performing linear simple harmonic motion, then 2a a
which of the following graph represents correctly the variation
21. The displacement of an object attached to a spring and
of acceleration a corresponding to linear velocity v ? –2
executing simple harmonic motion is given by x = 2×10 cos
v2 v2 t m. The time at which the maximum speed first occurs is :
(a) 0.5 s (b) 0.75 s
(a) (b) (c) 0.125 s (d) 0.25 s
2 2
a a 22. What is the ratio of maximum acceleration to the maximum
2
v v 2 velocity of a simple harmonic oscillator ?
(a)  (b) /2
(c) (d) (c) 1/ (d) 2
a2 a2
23. If a conservative force is acting on a system in SHM. The 29. Two bodies M and N of equal masses are suspended from
two separate massless springs of spring constant k1 and k2
total mechanical energy is :
respectively. If the two bodies oscillate vertically such that
(a) time dependent their maximum velocities are equal, the ratio of the amplitude
of M to that of N is
(b) position dependent
(c) amplitude dependent (a) k1/ k2 (b) k1 / k 2
(d) Both (a) and (c) are correct (c) k2 / k1 (d) k 2 / k1

24. The expression for displacement of an object in SHM is x = 30. The period of oscillation of a mass m suspended from a
spring is 2 seconds. If along with it another mass of 2 kg is
T also suspended, the period of oscillation increases by one
A cos (t). The potential energy at t  is :
4 second. The mass m will be
(a) 2 kg (b) 1 kg
1 2 1 2 (c) 1.6 kg (d) 2.6 kg
(a) kA (b) kA
2 8 31. In the figure shown below, the block is moved sideways by
a distance A. The |net force| on the block is :
1 2
(c) kA (d) zero
4
25. A body executes simple harmonic motion. The potential

energy (PE), the kinetic energy (KE) and total energy (TE)
are measured as function of displacement x. Which of the (a) (k1 – k2) A (b) (k2 – k1) A
following statements is true ? (c) (k1 + k2) A (d) None of the above
(a) KE is maximum when x = 0 32. A block is in SHM on a frictionless surface as shown in the
figure. The position x = 0 shows the unstretched position of
(b) TE is zero when x = 0 the spring.
(c) KE is maximum when x is maximum
(d) PE is maximum when x = 0
Spring Block Oscillation

Choose the correct option with reference to the above
26. A force of 6.4 N stretches a vertical spring by 0.1 m. The system.
mass that must be suspended from the spring so that it (a) +A and –A are maximum displacements where, A is
oscillates with a period of (/4) second is amplitude
(a) (/4) kg (b) 1 kg (b) x = 0 indicate the equilibrium position
(c) The block executes to and fro motion about the mean
(c) () kg (d) 10 kg position, when pulled aside and released
27. A mass of 1 kg attached to the bottom of a spring has a (d) All of the above
certain frequency of vibration. The following mass has to 33. The time period of a spring mass system shown below is
be added to it in order to reduce the frequency by half. equal to :
(a) 1 kg (b) 2 kg
(c) 3 kg (d) 4 kg
28. If a spring has time period T, and is cut into n equal parts,
then the time period of each part will be
2m m
T (a) 2 (b) 2
(a) T n (b) k 4k
n
2 2 m
(c) nT (d) T (c) (d) None of these
k
34. There are two springs mass systems as shown in the figures. 37. A coin is placed on a horizontal platform which undergoes
Resistive forces are absent everywhere. Let the time vertical simple harmonic motion of angular frequency . The
periods of two systems are T1 and T2. The relation between amplitude of oscillation is gradually increased. The coin will
T1 and T2 is : leave contact with the platform for the first time
(a) at the highest position of the platform
(b) at the mean position of the platform
g
(c) at an amplitude of
2
T2 g2
(a) T1  (d) for an amplitude of
2 2
Angular SHM
T1 38. A man measures time period of a simple pendulum inside a
(b) T2  T
2 stationary lift and find it to be T. If the lift starts accelerating
upwards with an acceleration g/4, then the time period of
(c) T1 = T2 pendulum will be
(d) Cannot establish the relation between them
2T 5T
35. If the block is pulled by a distance x and left, the block will (a) (b)
5 2
start oscillating. The value of x, so that at a moment when
speed of the block become zero the spring become 5 2
(c) (d)
unstretched. 2T 5T
39. A simple pendulum is oscillating without damping, as showm

in figure. When the displacement of the bob is less than

maximum, its acceleration vector a is correctly shown in
(a) mg/2k (b) 2k/mg

(c) mg/k (d) 2mg/k (a) (b)
a
36. Two identical springs are connected in series and parallel
as shown in the figure. If fs and fp are frequencies of series a
fs
and parallel arrangements, what is ?
fp
(c) (d)
a
a
40. If we do an experiment by swinging a small ball by a thread

of length 100 cm, what will be the approximate time for
complete to and fro periodic motion ?
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1 (a) 4s (b) 2s
(c) 1 : 3 (d) 3 : 1 (c) 6s (d) 1s
41. A simple pendulum is suspended from the ceiling of a lift. 46. The displacement equation of a particle is
When the lift is at rest its time period is T. With what x = 3 sin 2 t + 4 cos 2 t
acceleration should the lift be accelerated upwards in order The amplitude and maximum velocity will be respectively
to reduce its period to T/2? (g is acceleration due to gravity). (a) 5, 10 (b) 3, 2
(a) 2g (b) 3g (c) 3, 4 (d) 4, 2
(c) 4g (d) g 47. The displacement of a particle varies with time according to
the relation : y = asin t + bcos t.
42. A simple pendulum has a time period T1 when on the Earth’s
Choose the correct statement.
surface and T2 when taken to a height 2R above the Earth’s
surface, where R is the radius of the Earth. The value of (a) The motion is oscillatory but not SHM.
(T1/T2) is : (b) The motion is SHM with amplitude (a + b).
2 2
(c) The motion is SHM with amplitude (a + b )
(a) 1/9 (b) 1/3
(c) (d) 9 (d) The motion is SHM with amplitude a 2  b2 .

3
48. A block of mass 1 kg hangs without vibrating at the end of
43. A hollow sphere is filled with water through the small hole
a spring whose force constant is 200 N/m and which is
in it. It is then hung by a long thread and made to oscillate.
attached to the ceiling of an elevator. The elevator is rising
As the water slowly flow out of the hole at the bottom, the with an upward acceleration of g/3 when the acceleration
period of oscillation will : suddenly ceases. The angular frequency of the block after
(a) continuously decrease the acceleration ceases is
(a) 13 rad/s (b) 14 rad/s
(b) continuously increase
(c) 15 rad/s (d) None of these
(c) first decrease then increase
49. A body is moving in a room with a velocity of 20 m/s
(d) first increase then decrease perpendicular to the two walls separated by 5 m. There is no
44. What is the velocity of the bob of a simple pendulum at its frictrion and the collisions with the walls are elastic. The
mean position, if it is able to rise to vertical height of 10 cm? motion of the body is
(g = 9.8 ms ).
–2 (a) not periodic
(b) periodic but not simple harmonic
(c) periodic and simple harmonic
(d) periodic with variable time period
50. The transverse displacement y (x, t) of a wave on a string is
given by

 ax 2  bt 2  2 ab xt 
y  x, t   e
–1 –1
(a) 2.2 ms (b) 1.8 ms
–1 –1 b
(c) 1.4 ms (d) 0.6 ms (a) wave moving in –x direction with speed
a
Miscellaneous SHM problems
(b) standing wave of frequency b
45. Four simple harmonic motions ; x1 = 8 sin t ; x2 = 6 sin
(t + /2) ; x3 = 4 sin (t + ) and x4 = 2 sin (t + 3 /2) are
1
superimposed on each other. The resulting amplitude and (c) standing wave of frequency
its phase difference with x1 are respectively b
–1
(a) 20, tan (1/2) (b) 4 2 , /2
a
–1 (d) wave moving in +x direction with speed
(c) 20, tan (2) (d) 4 2 , /4 b
51. A particle of mass m moving along the x-axis has a potential 57. A travelling wave represented by y = A sin (t – kx) is
2
energy U(x) = a + bx where a and b are positive constants. superimposed on another wave represented by
It will execute simple harmonic motion with a frequency y = A sin (t + kx). The resultant is
detemined by the value of
 1
(a) b alone (b) b and a alone (a) A standing wave having nodes at x   n   ,
 22
(c) b and m alone (d) b, a and m alone n = 0, 1, 2
52. A metre stick swinging in vertical plane about a fixed (b) A wave travelling along + x direction
horizontal axis passing through its one end undergoes small
(c) A wave travelling along –x direction
oscillation of frequency f0. If the bottom half of the stick
were cut off, then its new frequency of small oscillation n
would become. (d) A standing wave having nodes at x  ; n = 0, 1, 2
2
WAVE
Wave Parameter
58. A string of 5.5 m length has a mass 0.035 kg. If the tension in
the string is 77 N, then the speed of wave on the string is :
(a) 77 m/s (b) 102 m/s
(a) f0 (b) 2 f0
(c) 110 m/s (d) 164 m/s
(c) 2f0 (d) 2 2 f 0 59. The equation which represents a sinusoidal (harmonic) wave
53. Which of the following expressions corresponds to simple travelling along the positive direction of the X-axis is :
harmonic motion along a straight line, where x is the (a) y (x, t) = a sin (kx – t + )
displacement and a, b, c are positive constant?
(b) y (x, t) = a sin (kx + t + )
(a) a + bs – cx2 (b) a – bx + cx2
(c) bx2
(d) – bx (c) y (x, t) = a sin (kx + t)
54. A physical pendulum is positioned so that its centre of (d) y (x, t) = a sin (t + kx)
gravity is above the suspension point. When the pendulum 60. A sinusoidal travelling wave is described by y (x, t) = a sin
is released it passes the point of stable equilibrium with an (kx – t + ), where y(x, t) is the displacement as a function
angular velocity . The period of small oscillations of the of position x and time t.
pendulum is
With reference to the above equation, match the items in
4 2 Column-I with terms in Column-II and choose the correct
(a) (b) option from the codes given below.
 
Column-I Column-II
 
(c) (d) (A) a denotes 1. angular frequency of the wave
 2
(B)  denotes 2. angular wave number
55. A wave y = a sin (t – kx) on a string meets with another
wave producing a node at x = 0. Then the equation of the (C) k denotes 3. amplitude of the wave
unknown wave is : (D)  denotes 4. Initial phase angle at x = 0, t = 0
(a) y = a sin (t + kx) (b) y = – a sin (t + kx) Codes
(c) y = a sin (t – kx) (d) y = – a sin (t – kx) A B C D
56. Length of a string tied to two rigid supports is 40 cm.
(a) 3 2 4 2
Maximum length (wavelength in cm) of a stationary wave
produced on it is : (b) 3 2 1 4
(a) 20 (b) 80 (c) 3 1 2 4
(c) 40 (d) 120 (d) 4 1 2 3

61. The minimum distance between the two points having the Standing Wave on Stretched String
same phase is : 67. A standing wave consisting of 3 nodes and 2 antinodes is
formed between the two atoms having a distance of 1.21 Å
(a) wavelength of the wave
between them. The wavelength of the standing wave is :
(b) amplitude of the wave (a) 1.21 Å (b) 2.42 Å
(c) wave number (c) 6.05 Å (d) 3.63 Å
(d) frequency of the wave 68. A string is stretched between fixed points separated by 75.0 cm.
62. A wave equation is given by It is observed to have resonant frequencies of 420 Hz and
315 Hz. There are no other resonant frequencies between
  t x 1  these two. Then the lowest resonance frequency for this
y  4 sin        string is
  5 9 6 
(a) 1.05 Hz (b) 1050 Hz
where, x is in cm and t is in seconds. The wavelength of the (c) 10.5 Hz (d) 105 Hz
wave is: –4
69. A stretched string of length 1 m and mass 5 × 10 kg, fixed
(a) 18 cm (b) 9 cm at both ends, is under a tension of 20 N. If it is plucked at
points situated at 25 cm from one end, it would vibrate with
(c) 36 cm (d) 6 cm
a frequency :
63. The distance travelled by the wave pattern in the time (a) 400 Hz (b) 200 Hz
required for one full oscillation by any constituent of the
(c) 100 Hz (d) 256 Hz
medium is equal to :
Direction for questions 70 to 81
(a) wavelength of the wave
Answer to these questions are based on the given
(b) amplitude of the wave paragraph. Choose the correct option from those given
below for each question.
(c) wave number of the wave
A standing wave is formed on a string fixed at both the
(d) both (a) and (b) ends. The individual waves i.e., incident wave and reflected
64. The equation of progressive wave is wavearey1 (x, t) = a sin (kx – t) and y2 (x, t) = a sin (kx + t),
respectively. The two waves have same wavelength ‘’.
 t x 
y  0.2sin 2    , where x and y are in metres and 70. The position of nodes is given as
 0.01 0.3 
t is in seconds. The velocity of propagation of the wave is : n
(a) x  ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
–1 –1 2
(a) 30 ms (b) 40 ms
–1 –1
(c) 300 ms (d) 400 ms (2n  1)
(b) x  ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
65. A cylinderical tube, open at both ends, has a fundamental 2
frequency, f, in air. The tube is dipped vertically in water so (c) x = n; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
that half of it is in water. The fundamental frequency of the (d) x = (2n + 1) ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
air-column is now
71. The position of anti-nodes is given by the equation,
f
(a) f (b)  1
2 (a) x   n   ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
 2 2
(c)
3f (d) 2f
4 n
(b) x  ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
66. A long string having mass density as 0.01 kg/m is subjected 2
to a tension of 64 N. The speed of the transverse wave on
(2n  1)
the string is: (c) x  ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
–1 –1
2
(a) 100 ms (b) 120 ms
–1 –1
(d) x = (2n + 1); n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
(c) 80 ms (d) 90 ms
72. The distance between any two consecutive anti-nodes is 76. A wire under tension vibrates with a fundamental frequency
of 600 Hz. If the length of the wire is doubled, the radius is
(a)  (b) /2
halved and the wire is made to vibrate under one-ninth the
(c) 3/2 (d) 2 tension. Then, the fundamental frequency will become:
73. When temperature increase, the frequency of a tuning fork (a) 400 Hz (b) 600 Hz
(a) increases (c) 300 Hz (d) 200 Hz
(b) decreases Sound Wave
(c) remains same
77. When sound propagates through air, the region of high
(d) increases of decreases depending on the material density of air molecules is called:
74. Column-I has figures showing different modes of oscillation (a) compression (b) rarefaction
of the system (a string tied at both the ends) and Column-II (c) denser (d) None of the above
has name of the corresponding modes. Match the items in 78. The relation for Bulk modulus of a medium is given by
Column I with terms in Column II and choose the correct
option from the codes given below. p V
(a) B   (b) B  
V / V p / p
p p
(c) B  (d) B  
V / V V / V
79. Three sound waves of equal amplitudes have frequencies (f
– 1), f, (f + 1). They superpose to give beats. The number of
beats produced per second will be
(a) 4 (b) 3
(c) 2 (d) 1
80. The speed of a longitudinal wave in air is given by:
 B
(a) v  (b) v 
B 
(V / V)
Codes : (c) v  (d) both (a) and (c)
p
A B C D
(a) 4 2 3 1 81. Match the items in Column I with terms in Column-II and
choose the correct option from the codes given below.
(b) 4 3 1 2
Column-I Column-II
(c) 3 2 1 4
(A) Bulk modulus (isothermal) 1. p
(d) 2 3 1 4
(B) Bulk modulus (adiabatic) 2. 
75. A uniform wire of length L, diameter D and density S is
stretched under a tension T. The correct relation between (C) Laplace correction/Netwon’s 3. p
its fundamental fequency f, the length L and the diameter D formula
is :
Codes :
1 1 A B C
(a) f  (b) f 
LD L D (a) 1 2 3
(b) 2 3 1
1 1 (c) 3 1 2
(c) f  (d) f 
D2 LD2
(d) 3 2 1
82. Oxygen is 16 times heavier than hydrogen. Equal volumes 88. An open organ pipe of length l vibrates in its fundamental
of hydrogen and oxygen are mixed. The ratio of speed of mode. The pressure variation is maximum :
sound in the mixture to that in hydrogen is :
(a) at the two ends
2 (b) at the distance l/2 inside the ends
(a) 8 (b)
17
(c) at the distance l/4 inside the ends
1 32 (d) at the distance l/8 inside the ends
(c) (d)
8 17 89. A pipe closed at one end and open at the other end resonates
Standing Wave in organ Pipe with sound waves of frequencies 135 Hz and also 165 Hz
but not with any wave of frequency intermediate between
83. A pipe closed at one end produces a fundamental note of these two. The frequency of the fundamental note is :
412 Hz. It is cut into two equal length, the fundamental notes (a) 30 Hz (b) 15 Hz
produced by the two pieces are
(c) 60 Hz (d) 7.5 Hz
(a) 206 Hz, 412 Hz (b) 206 Hz, 824 Hz
90. A pipe closed at one end and open at the other end resonates
(c) 412 Hz, 824 Hz (d) 824 Hz, 1648 Hz with sound waves of frequency 135 Hz and also 165 Hz but
84. An open pipe is suddenly closed at one end with the result not with any wave of frequency intermediate between these
that the frequency of third harmonic of the closed pipe is two. Then the frequency of the fundamental note is
found to be higher by 100 Hz than fundamental frequency (a) 30 Hz (b) 15 Hz
of the open pipe. The fundamental frequency of the open
(c) 60 Hz (d) 7.5 Hz
pipe is
Beats
(a) 200 Hz (b) 300 Hz
91. Two wires are fixed on a sonometer. Their tensions are in the
(c) 240 Hz (d) 480 Hz ratio 8 : 1, their lengths are in the ratio 36 : 35, the diameters
85. A vehicle with a horn of frequency n is moving with a are in the ratio 4 :1 and densities are in the ratio 1 : 2. If the
–1
velocity of 30 m/s in a direction perpendicular to the straight note of the higher pitch has a frequency 360 s , the frequency
line joining the observer and the vehicle. The observer of beats produced is
–1 –1
perceives the sound to have a frequency (n + n1). If velocity (a) 5 s (b) 10 s
of sound in air is 300 m/s, n1 would be (c) 15 s
–1
(d) 20 s
–1
(a) n1 = 10 n (b) n1 = 0 92. Two sources A and B are sounding notes of frequency
(c) n1 = 0.1 n (d) n1 = – 0.1 n 680 Hz. A listener moves from A to B with a constant velocity
–1
u. If speed of sound is 340 ms , what should be the value of
86. An open pipe is in resonance in 2nd harmonic with frequency
u so that he hears 10 beats/s ?
f1. Now one end of the tube is closed and frequency is
–1 –1
increased to f2 such that the resonance again occurs in nth (a) 2.0 ms (b) 3.0 ms
–1 –1
harmonic. Choose the correct option. (c) 2.5 ms (d) 3.5 ms
93. Two sound waves with wavelength 5.0 m and 5.5 m
3 5
(a) n = 3, f2 = f1 (b) n = 3, f2 = f1 respectively, each propagate in a gas with velocity 330 m/s.
4 4
We expect the following number of beats/sec.
5 3 (a) 6 (b) 12
(c) n = 5, f2 = f (d) n = 5, f2 = f
4 1 4 1 (c) 0 (d) 1
87. If the length of a closed organ pipe is 1 m and velocity of 94. Three sound waves of equal amplitudes have frequencies (f
sound is 330 m/s, then the frequency of 1st overtone is : – 1), f and (f + 1). They superpose to give beats. The number
(a) 4 (330/4) Hz (b) 3 (330/4) Hz of beats per second will be :
(c) 2 (330/4) Hz (d) none of these (a) 4 (b) 3

(c) 2 (d) 1
95. A tuning fork vibrating with a sonometer having 20 cm wire 102. Two trains, each moving with a velocity of 30 m/s, cross
produces 5 beats/s. The beat frequency does not change if each other. One of the trains gives a whistle whose frequency
the length of the wire is changed to 21 cm. The frequency of is 600 Hz. If the speed of sound is 330 m/s, the apparent
the tuning fork must be : frequency for passengers sitting in the other train before
(a) 200 Hz (b) 210 Hz crossing would be :
(c) 205 Hz (d) 215 Hz (a) 600 Hz (b) 630 Hz
96. A source of frequency f gives 5 beats/s when sounded (c) 920 Hz (d) 720 Hz
with a frequency 200 Hz. The second harmonic of source 103. A whistle producing sound waves of frequencies 9500 Hz
gives 10 beats/s when sounded with a source of frequency and above is approaching a stationary person with speed v
420 Hz. The value of f is : m/s. The velocity of sound in air is 300 m/s. If the person
(a) 200 Hz (b) 210 Hz can hear frequencies upto a maximum of 10,000 Hz, the
maximum value of v upto which he can hear the whistle is :
(c) 205 Hz (d) 195 Hz
(a) 15 / 2 m/s (b) 15 m/s
Dopplers Effect
97. When a source is going away from a stationary observer (c) 30 m/s (d) 15 2 m/s
with a velocity equal to velocity of sound in air, then the 104. A vehicle with a horn of frequency f is moving with a velocity
frequency heard by the observer will be of 30 m/s in a direction perpendicular to the straight line
(a) same (b) double joining the observer and the vehicle. The observer perceives
(c) half (d) one third the sound to have a frequency f + f1. If the velocity of
sound in air is 300 m/s, f1 would be :
98. A car sounding its horn at 480 Hz moves towards a high wall
–1
at a speed of 20 ms , the frequency of the reflected sound (a) f1 = 10 f (b) f1 = 0
heard by the man sitting in the car will be nearest to ; (speed (c) f1 = 0.1f (d) f1 = –0.1 f
of sound 330 m/s)
Miscellaneous
(a) 480 Hz (b) 510 Hz
(c) 540 Hz (d) 570 Hz 105. The path difference between the two waves
99. A siren placed at a railway platform is emitting sound of 2x 

frequency 5 k Hz. A passenger sitting in a moving train A y1  a1 sin  t  
  
records a frequency of 5.5 k Hz, while the train approaches
the siren. During his return journey in a different train B, he
 2x 
records a frequency of 6.0 k Hz, while approaching the same and y 2  a 2 cos  t     is
siren. The ratio of the velocity of train B to that of train A is   
(a) 242/252 (b) 2
   
(c) 5/6 (d) 11/6 (a)  (b)  
2 2  2
100. A car is moving towards a high cliff. The driver sounds a
horn of frequency f. The reflected sound heard by the driver 2   2
has a frequency 2 f. If v be the velocity of sound, then the (c)
 
 
2
(d)  

velocity of the car, in the same velocity units would be
(a) v/4 (b) v/2 106. The equation of a wave travelling on a string is
(c) v/ 2 (d) v/3  x

y  4sin  8t  
2 8
101. A police car with a siren of frequency 8 kHz is moving with
uniform velocity of 36 km/h towards a tall building which if x and y are in centimetres, then velocity of wave is
reflects the sound waves. The speed of sound in air is 320 m/s. (a) 64 cm/sec in –ve x-direction
The frequency of the siren heard by the car driver is : (b) 32 cm/sec in –ve x-direction
(a) 8.50 kHz (b) 8.25 kHz (c) 32 cm/sec in +ve x-direction
(c) 7.75 kHz (d) 7.50 kHz (d) 64 cm/sec in +ve x-direction
107. A transverse wave is described by the equation 111. An increase in intensity level of 1 dB implies an increase in
Intensity of (given antilog10 0.1 = 1.2589)
 x
y  y0 sin 2  ft   (a) 1 % (b) 3.01 %
 
(c) 26 % (d) 0.1 %
The maximum particle velocity is equal to four times the 112. The intensity level of two sounds are 100 dB and 50 dB.
wave velocity if What is the ratio of their intensities?
1 3
(a) 10 (b) 10
y0 y0
(a)   (b)   (c) 10
5
(d) 10
10
4 2
113. A source of sound emits 200 W power which is uniformly
(c)   y0 (d)   2y0 distributed over a sphere of radius 10 m. What is the
loudness of sound on the surface of the sphere?
108. Wave pulse on a string shown in figure is moving to the
(a) 70 dB (b) 74 dB
right without changing shape. Consider two particles at
positions x1 = 1.5 m and x2 = 2.5 m. Their transverse velocities (c) 80 dB (d) 117 dB
at the moment shown in figure are along directions
(a) positive y-axis and positive y-axis respectively

(b) negative y-axis and positive y-axis respectively
(c) positive y-axis and negative y-axis respectively
(d) negative y-axis and negative y-axis respectively
109. A progressive wave is given by
y = 3 sin 2[(t/0.04) – (x/0.01)]
Where x, y are in cm and t in s. The frequency of wave and
maximum acceleration will be
3 2 3 2
(a) 100 Hz, 4.7 × 10 cm/s (b) 50 Hz, 7.5 × 10 cm/s
4 2 4 2
(c) 25 Hz, 4.7 × 10 cm/s (d) 25 Hz, 7.5 × 10 cm/s
110. Which of the following is not true for the progressive wave
 t x 
y  4sin 2   
 0.02 100 
Where x and y are in cm and t in seconds.

(a) The amplitude is 4 cm
(b) The wavelength is 100 cm
(c) The frequency is 50 Hz
(d) The velocity of propagation is 50 cm/s

OSCILLATIONS
1. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum is T =
(d)
L
2 . Measured value of L is 20.0 cm known to 1 mm
g
accuracy and time for 100 oscillations of the pendulum is 5. A 1 kg block attached to a spring vibrates with a frequency
found to be 90 s using a wrist watch of 1s resolution. The of 1 Hz on a frictionless horizontal table. Two springs
accuracy in the determination of g is : (2015) identical to the original spring are attached in parallel to
(a) 1% (b) 5% an 8 kg block placed on the same table. So, the frequency
of vibration of the 8 kg block is : (2017)
(c) 2 % (d) 3%
2. A particle is performing S.H.M. along X-axis with amplitude 1 1
(a) Hz (b) Hz
4 cm and time period 1.2 sec. The minimum time taken by 4 2 2
the particle to move from x = + 2 cm to x = + 4 cm and back
again is given by (2015)
1
(a) 0.6 s (b) 0.4 s (c) Hz (d) 2 Hz
2
(c) 0.3 s (d) 0.2 s
6. In an experiment to determine the period of a simple
3. A particle performs simple harmonic motion with amplitude
pendulum of length 1 m, it is attached to different spherical
A. Its speed is tripled at the instant that it is at a distance
bobs of radii r1 and r2. The two spherical bobs have uniform
2A
from equilibrium position. The new amplitude of the mass distribution. If the relative difference in the periods,
3
motion is : (2016) is found to be 5 × 10–4 s, the difference in radii, r1  r2 is
(a) 3A (b) A 3
best given by :     r1 , r2   (2017)
7A A
(c) (d) 41 (a) 1 cm (b) 0.1 cm
3 3
(c) 0.05 cm (d) 0.01 cm
4. A particle is executing, simple harmonic motion with a time
period T. At time t = 0, it is at its position of equilibrium. 7. A sliver atom in a solid oscillates in simple harmonic motion
The kinetic energy–time graph of the particle will look like in some direction with a frequency of 1012/sec What is the
: (2017) force constant of the bonds connecting one atom with
(a) the other? (Mole wt. of siver =108 and Avagadro number
= 6.02× 1023 gm mole–1) (2018)
(a) 2.2 N/m (b) 5.5 N/m
(b) (c) 6.4 N/m (d) 7.1 N/m
8. A pendulum with time period of 1s is losing energy due to
damping. At certain time its energy is 45 J. If after
completing 15 oscillations, its energy has become 15 J, its
damping constant (in s) is : (2015)
(c) 1 1
(a) (b) ln3
2 30
1
(c) 2 (d) ln3
15
9. Two particles are performing simple harmonic motion in a Parameters Curve

straight line about the same equilibrium point. The (a) A  B, a = b;  = 0 Parabola
amplitude and time period for both particles are same and

equal to A and T, respectively. At time t = 0 one particle (b) A = B, a = b;  = Line
2
has displacement A while the other one has displacement
A 
and they are moving towards each other. If they cross (c) A  B, a = b;  = Ellipse
2 2
each other at time t, then t is : (2016) 

(d) A = B, a = 2b;  = Circle
2
T 5T
(a) (b) 14. An oscillator of mass M is at rest in its equilibrium position
6 6
1 2
in a potential V = k  x - X  . A particle of mass m
T T 2
(c) (d)
3 4 comes from right with speed u and collides completely
10. In an engine the piston undergoes vertical simple inelastically with M and sticks to it. This process repeats
harmonic motion with amplitude 7 cm. A washer rests on every time the oscillator crosses its equilibrium position.
top of the piston and moves with it. The motor speed is The amplitude of oscillations after 13 collisions is : (M=10,
m=5, u=1, k=1) (2018)
slowly increased. The frequency of the piston at which
the washer no longer stays in contact with the piston, is 1 1
(a) (b)
close to : (2016) 3 2
(a) 0.1 Hz (b) 1.2 Hz
2 3
(c) 0.7 Hz (d) 1.9 Hz (c) (d)
3 5
11. The ratio of maximum acceleration to maximum velocity in
15. A particle executes simple harmonic motion and is located
a simple harmonic motion is 10 s–1. At, t = 0 the displacement
at x =a, b and c at times t0, 2t0 and 3t0 respectively. The
is 5 m. What is the maximum acceleration? The initial phase
frequency of the oscillation is : (2018)
 1
is . (2017) -1  a + c 
4 (1) 2t cos  2b 
0  
(a) 500 m/s2 (b) 500 2 m/s 2 1 -1  a + b 

(2) 2t cos  2c 
0  
(c) 750 m/s2 (d) 750 2 m/s 2
1 -1  2a + 3c 
12. A block of mass 0.1 kg is connected to an elastic spring of (3) 2t cos  b 
0  
spring constant 640 Nm–1 and oscillates in a damping
medium of damping constant 10–2 kg s–1, The system 1 -1  a + 2b 
dissipates its energy gradually. The time taken for its (4) 2t cos  3c 
0  
mechanical energy of vibration to drop to half of its initial
value, is closest to : (2017) 16. A damped harmonic oscillator has a frequency of
5oscillations per second. The amplitude drops to half
(a) 2 s (b) 3.5 s
itsvalue for every 10 oscillations. The time it will take to
(c) 5 s (d) 7 s
13. Two simple harmonic motions, as shown below, are at right 1
drop to of the original amplitude is close to :
angles. They are combined to form Lissajous figures. 1000
x  t  = A sin  at +   (2019)
(a) 50 s (b) 100 s
y  t  = Bsin  bt 
(c) 20 s (d) 10 s
Identify the correct match below. (2018)
17. A simple pendulum oscillating in air has period T. The bob 21. A cylindrical plastic bottle of negligible mass is filled with
of the pendulum is completely immersed in a non-viscous 310 ml of water and left floating in a pond with still water. If
pressed downward slightly and released, it starts
1
liquid. The density of the liquid is th of the material of performing simple harmonic motion at angular frequency
16 ω. If the radius of the bottle is 2.5 cm then ω is close to:
the bob. If the bob is inside liquid all the time, its period of (density of water = 103 kg/m3)
oscillation in this liquid is: (2019) (2019)
1 1 (a) 3.75 rad s–1 (b) 1.25 rad s–1
(a) 2T (b) 2T (c) 2.50 rrad s–1 (d) 8.00 rad s–1
10 14
22. A particle undergoing simple harmonic motion has time
1 1
(c) 4T (d) 4T t
15 14 dependent displacement given by x  t   A sin . The
90
m ratio of kinetic to potential energy of this particle at t = 210
18. Two masses m and are connected at the two ends of a
2 s will be : (2019)
massless rigid rod of length l. The rod is suspended by a
thin wire of torsional constant k at the centre of mass of 1
(a) (b) 1
the rod-mass system (see figure). Because of torsional 9
constant k, the restoring torque is τ = k for angular (c) 2 (d) 3
displacement . If the rod is rotated by an angle 0 and 23. A simple pendulum oflength 1 mis oscillating with an
released, the tension in it when it passes through its mean
position will be: (2019) angularfrequency
10 rad/s. The support of the pendulum startsoscillating up
and down with a small angular frequency of1 rad/s and an
amplitude of 10–2 m. The relative change inthe angular
frequency of the pendulum is best given by: (2019)
(a) 10–3 rad/s (b) 1 rad/s

–1
(c) 10 rad/s (d) 10–5 rad/s
3k02 2k 02
(a) (b) 24. A simple harmonic motion is represented by:
l l
k02 k02  
y  5 sin 3 t  3 cos 3 t cm . The amplitude and time
(c) (d)
l 2l period of the motion are : (2019)
19. A rod of mass ‘M’ and length ‘2L’ is suspended at its middle
by a wire. It exhibits torsional oscillations; If two masses
each of ‘m’ are attached at distance ‘L/2’ from its centre on 3 3
(a) 10 cm, s (b) 10 cm, s
both sides, it reduces the oscillation frequency by 20%. 2 2
The value of m/M is close to :
(2019) 3 2
(c) 5 cm, s (d) 5 cm, s
(a) 0.77 (b) 0.57 2 3
(c) 0.37 (d) 0.17 25. This displacement time graph of a particle executing S.H.M.
20. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion (SHM) of
amplitude A, along the x-axis, about x = 0. When its is given in figure : (sketch is schematic and not to scale)
potential Energy (PE) equals kinetic energy (KE), the
position of the particle will be: (2019)
A A
(a) (b)
2 2 2
A
(c) (d) A Which of the following statements is/are true for this
2
motion ?
3T WAVES
(A) The force is zero at t 
4 29. A train is moving on a straight track with speed 20 ms–1. It
(B) The acceleration is maximum at t = T is blowing its whistle at the frequency of 1000 Hz. The
T percentage change in the frequency heard by a person
(C) The speed is maximum at t  standing near the track as the train passes him is (speed
4
of sound = 320 ms–1) close to: (2015)
T
(D) The P.E. is equal to K.E. of the oscillation at t  (a) 18% (b) 24%
2
(2020) (c) 6% (d) 12%
(a) (B), (C) and (D) (b) (A), (B) and (D)
30. A signal of 5 kHz frequency is amplitude modulated on a
(c) (A) and (D) (d) (A), (B) and (C) carrier wave of frequency 2 MHz. The frequencies of the
26. A block of mass m attached to a massless spring is
resultant signal is/are : (2015)
performing oscillatory motion of amplitude ‘A’ on a
frictionless horizontal plane. If half of the mass of the block (a) 200 kHz, 2000 kHz and 1995 kHz
breaks off when it is passing through its equilibrium point, (b) 2000 kHz and 1995 kHz
the amplitude of oscillation for the remaining system
(c) 2 MHz only
become fA. The value of f is : (2020)
(d) 2005 kHz, and 1995 kHz
1 1 31. A uniform string of length 20 m is suspended from a rigid
(a) (b)
2 2 support. A short wave pulse is introduced at its lowest
end. It starts moving up the string. The time taken to reach
(c) 1 (d)2
the support is : (take g = 10 ms–2) (2016)
27. A ring is hung on a nail. It can oscillate, without slipping or
sliding (i) in its plane with a time period T1 and, (ii) back (a) 2s (b) 2 2 s
and forth in a direction perpendicular to its plane, with a
T1 (c) 2s (d) 2π 2 s
period T2. The ratio T will be : (2020)
2
32. A pipe open at both ends has a fundamental frequency f
3 2 in air. The pipe is dipped vertically in water so that half of
(a) (b)
2 3 it is in water. The fundamental frequency of the air column
is now : (2016)
2 2
(c) (d)
3 3 3f
(a) (b) 2f
28. When a particle of mass m is attached to a vertical spring 4
of spring constant k and released, its motion is described

f
by y  t   y0 sin 2 t , where ‘y’ is measured from the lower (c) f (d)
2
end of unstretched spring. Then is: (2020)
33. An observer is moving with half the speed of light towards
a stationary microwave source emitting waves at frequency
g 1 g 10 GHz. What is the frequency of the microwave measured
(a) y0 (b) 2 y0 by the observer? (speed of light =3×108 ms–1) (2017)
(a) 12.1 GHz (b) 17.3 GHz
2g g
(c) y0 (d) 2 y0 (c) 15.3 GHz (d) 10.1 GHz
34. A source of sound emits sound waves at frequency f0. It is

moving towards an observer with fixed speed vs (vs< v,
where v is the speed of sound in air). If the observer were
to move towards the source with speed v0, one of the
following two graphs (A and B) will given the correct (a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2
variation of the frequency f heard by the observer as v0 is
(c) 1 : 3 (d) 4 : 1
changed.
38. A standing wave is formed by the superposition of two
waves travelling in opposite directions. The transverse
displacement is given by (2017)
 5 
y (x, t)  0.5 sin  x  cos (200t).
 4 
What is the speed of the travelling wave moving in the

The variation of f with v0 is given correctly by : (2015)
positive x direction ?
f0
(a) graph A with slope   v  v  (x and t are in meter and second, respectively.)
s
(a) 160 m/s (b) 90 m/s
f0
(b) graph B with slope   v  v  (c) 180 m/s (d) 120 m/s
s
39. A tuning fork vibrates with frequency 256 Hz and gives
f0 one beat per second with the third normal mode of
(c) graph A with slope   v  v  vibration of an open pipe. What is the length of the pipe ?
s
(Speed of sound in air is 340 ms-1) (2018)
f0
(d) graph B with slope   v  v  (1) 220 cm (2) 190 cm
s
35. Two engines pass each other moving in opposite (3) 180 cm (4) 200 cm
directions with uniform speed of 30 m/s. One of them is 40. 5 beats/ second are heard when a tuning fork is sounded
blowing a whistle of frequency 540 Hz. Calculate the with a sonometer wire under tension, when the length of
frequency heard by driver of second engine before they the sonometer wire is either 0.95 m or 1m. The frequency
pass each other. Speed of sound is 330 m/sec : (2016) of the fork will be : (2018)
(a) 450 Hz (b) 540 Hz (a) 195 Hz (b) 150 Hz
(c) 648 Hz (d) 270 Hz
(c) 300 Hz (d) 251 Hz
36. A toy-car, blowing its horn, is moving with a steady speed
of 5 m/s, away from a wall. An observer, towards whom 41. Two sitar strings, A and B, playing the note ‘Dha’ are
the toy car is moving, is able to hear 5 beats per second. If slightly out of tune and produce beats of frequency 5 Hz.
the velocity of sound in air is 340 m/s, the frequency of The tension of the string B is slightly increased and the
the horn of the toy car is close to : (2016) beat frequency is found to decrease by 3 Hz. If the
(a) 680 Hz (b) 510 Hz frequency of A is 425 Hz, the original frequency of B is :
(c) 340 Hz (d) 170 Hz (2018)
37. Two wires W 1 and W 2 have the same radius r and (1) 430 Hz (2) 420 Hz
respective densities 1 and 2 such that 2 = 4 1. They (3) 428 Hz (4) 422 Hz
are joined together at the point O, as shown in the figure.
The combination is used as a sonometer wire and kept 42. The end correction of a resonance column is 1 cm. If the
under tension T. The point O is midway between the two shortest length resonating with the tuning fork is 10 cm,
bridges. When a stationary wave is set up in the composite the next resonating length should be : (2018)
wire, the joint is found to be a node. The ratio of the (a) 28 cm (b) 32 cm
number of antinodes formed in W1 to W2 is : (2017) (c) 36 cm (d) 40 cm
43. The P = 0.01sin[1000t–3x]Nm–2 pressure wave,corresponds (c)

to the sound produced by a vibrating blade on a day when
atmospheric temperature is 0°C. On some other day when
temperature is T, the speed of sound produced by the same
blade and at the same frequency is found to be 336ms–1.
Approximate value of T is: (2019) (d)
(a) 4°C (b) 11°C
(c) 12°C (d) 15°C
44. Two cars A and B are moving away from each other in
opposite directions. Both the cars are moving with a speed
of 20 ms 1 with respect to the ground. If an observer in car
A detects a frequency 2000 Hz of the sound coming from 48. A source of sound S is moving with a velocity of 50 m/s
car B, what is the natural frequency of the sound source in towards a stationary observer. The observer measures the
frequency of the source as 1000 Hz. What will be the
car B?(Speed of sound in air  340 ms 1 ) (2019)
apparent frequency of the source when it is moving away
(a) 2250 Hz (b) 2060 Hz from the observer after crossing him? (Take velocity of
(c) 2300 Hz (d) 2150 Hz sound in air 350 m/s) (2019)
45. A string 2.0 m long and fixed at its ends is driven by a 240 (a) 750 Hz (b) 857 Hz
Hz vibrator. The string vibrates in its third harmonic mode. (c) 1143 Hz (d) 807 Hz
The speed of the wave and its fundamental frequency is: 49. A progressive wave travelling along the positive x-
(2019) direction is represented by y  x, t   A sin  kx  t    .
(a) 180 m / s,80 Hz (b) 320 m / s,80 Hz Its snapshot at t = 0 is given in the figure. (2019)
(c) 320 m / s,120 Hz (d) 180 m / s,120 Hz
46. A stationary source emits sound waves of frequency 500Hz.
Two observers moving along a line passing through
thesource detect sound to be of frequencies 480 Hz and
530 Hz. Their respective speeds are, in ms-1,
(Given speed of sound= 300 m/s) (2019)
For this wave, the initial phase  is
(a) 12, 16 (b) 12, 18
(c) 16, 14 (d) 8, 18 
(a)  (b) 
47. The correct figure that shows, schematically, the wave 2
pattern produced by superposition of two waves of
frequencies 9 Hz and 11 Hz is: (2019) 
(c) 0 (d)
(a) 2
50. A submarine (A) travelling at 18 km/hr is being chased
along the line of its velocity by another submarine (B)
travelling at 27 km/hr. B sends a sonar signal of 500 Hz to
detect A and receives a reflected sound of frequency  .
The value of  (in Hz) is close to: (Speed of sound in
water = 1500 ms-1). Write the nearest integer as the answer.
(2019)
51. A tuning fork of frequency 480Hz is used in an experiment
(b)
for measuring speed of sound (v) in air by resonance tube
method. Resonance is observed to occur at two successive
lengths of the air column, l1 = 30 cm and l2 = 70 cm. then, v
is equal to: (2019)
(a) 332 ms-1 (b) 384 ms-1

(c) 338 ms-1 (d) 379 ms-1
52. A small speaker delivers 2 W of audio output. At what 58. A musician using an open flute of length 50 cm produces
distance from the speaker will one detect 120 dB intensity second harmonic sound waves. A person runs towards
sound? [Given reference intensity of sound as 10-12 W/m2] the musician from another end of the hall at a speed of 10
(2019) km/h. If the wave speed is 330 m/s, the frequency heard by
(a) 40 cm (b) 20 cm the running person shall be close to:
(c) 10 cm (d) 30 cm (2020)
53. A heavy ball of mass M is suspended from the ceiling of a
(a) 666 Hz (b) 753 Hz
car by a light string of mass m (m << M). When the car is at
(c) 500 Hz (d) 333 Hz
rest, the speed of transverse waves in the string is 60 ms–
1
. when the car has acceleration a, the wave-speed increases 59. Two identical strings X and Z made of same material have
to 60.5 ms–1. The value of a, in terms of gravitational
tension Tx and Tz in them. If their fundamental
acceleration g, is closest to: (2019)
frequencies are 450 Hz and 300 Hz, respectively, then the
g g
(a) (b) ratio Tx/Tz is :
30 5
(2020)
g g
(c) (d) (a) 2.25 (b) 1.25
10 20
(c) 0.44 (d) 1.5
54. A closed organ pipe has a fundamental frequency of 1.5
kHz. The number of overtones that can be distinctly heard 60. A wire of density 9 × 10 kg cm–3 is stretched between two
–3
by a person with this organ pipe will be: (Assume that the clamps 1 m apart. The resulting strain in the wire is 4.9 × 10–
highest frequency a person can hear is 20,000 Hz) 4
. The lowest frequency of the transverse vibrations in the
(2019)
(a) 6 (b) 4 wire is (Young’s modulus of wire Y = 9 × 1010 Nm–2), (to the
(c) 7 (d) 5 nearest integer),………. .
55. A string of length 1 m and mass 5 g is fixed at both ends. (2020)
The tension in the string is 8.0 N. The string is set into
61. A uniform thin rope of length 12 m and mass 6 kg hangs
vibration using an external vibrator of frequency 100 Hz.
The separation (in cm) between successive nodes on the vertically from a rigid support and a block of mass 2 kg is
string is: attached to its free end. A transverse short wavetrain of
(2019) wavelength 6 cm is produced at the lower end of the rope.
What is the wavelength of the wavetrain (in cm) when it
56. Equation of travelling wave on a stretched string of linear
reaches the top of the rope ?
density 5 g/m is y = 0.03 sin (450 t – 9x) where distance and
(2020)
time are measured in SI units. The tension in the string (in (a) 12 (b) 3
N) is: (2019) (c) 9 (d) 6
57. A travelling harmonic wave is represented by the equation 62. For a transverse wave travelling along a straight line, the
distance between two peaks (crests) is 5m, while the
y  x, t   103 sin  50t  2 x  , where x and y are in metres distance between one crest and one trough is 1.5m. The
and t is in seconds. Which of the following is a correct possible wavelengths (in m) of the waves are:
statement about the wave? (2020)
(2019) (a) 1, 3, 5,…. (b) 1,2,3,…
(a) The wave is propagating along the negative X-axis with 1 1 1 1 1 1
(c) , , ,... (d) , , ,...
speed 25 ms .–1 2 4 6 1 3 5
(b) The wave is propagating along the positive X-axis with 63. The driver of a bus approaching a big wall notices that the
speed 100 ms .–1 frequency of his bus’s hornchanges from 420 Hz to 490 Hz
when he hears it after it gets reflected from the wall.Find
(c) The wave is propagating along the positive X-axis with
the speed of the bus if speed of the sound is 330 ms–1.
speed 25 ms–1. (2020)
(d) The wave is propagating along the negative X-axis (a) 81 kmh–1
(b) 91 kmh –1
with speed 100 ms–1. (c) 71 kmh–1 (d) 61 kmh–1

64. Assume that the displacement (s) of air is proportional to 69. A one metre long (both ends open) organ pipe is kept in a
the pressure difference (p) created by a sound wave.
Displacement(s) further depends on the speed of sound gas that has double the density of air at STP. Assuming
(), density of air () and the frequency (f). If the speed of sound in air at STP is 300 m/s, the frequency
p  10Pa,   300m / s,   1 kg/m and f  000 Hz,
3
difference between the fundamental and second harmonic
then s will be of the order of (take the multiplicative constant of this pipe is______Hz. (2020)
to be 1) (2020)
70. A transverse wave travels on a taut steel wire with a velocity
(a) 1 mm (b) 10 mm
of V when tension in it is 2.06 × 104 . When the tension is
1 3
(c) mm (d) mm V
10 100 changed to T, the velocity changed to The value
2
65. In a resonance tube experiment when the tube is filled
with water up to a height of 17.0 cm from bottom, it of T is close to (2020)
resonates with a given tuning fork. When the water level
is raised the next resonance with the same tuning fork (a) 30.5 × 104 N (b) 2.50 × 104 N
occurs at a height of 24.5 cm. If the velocity of sound in air
(c) 10.2 × 102 N (d) 5.15 × 103 N
is 330 m/s, the tuning fork frequency is : (2020)
(a) 2200 Hz (b) 550 Hz 71. Three harmonic waves of same frequency (v) and intensity
(c) 3300 Hz (d) 1100 Hz
66. A driver in a car, approaching a vertical wall notices that
 
(I0) having initial phaseangles 0, , radrespectively..
the frequency of his car horn, has changed from 440 Hz to 4 4
480 Hz, when it gets reflected from the wall. If the speed of When they are superimposed, the resultant intensityis
sound in air is 345 m/s, then the speed of the car is : close to (2020)
(2020)
(a) 24 km/hr (b) 36 km/hr (a) 5.8 I0 (b) I0
(c) 54 km/hr (d) 18 km/hr
(c) 3 I0 (d) 0.2 I0
67. An object of mass m is suspended at the end of a massless
72. For a transverse wave travelling along a straight line, the
wire of length L and area of cross-section A. Young distance between two peaks (crests) is 5m, while the
modulus of the material of the wire is Y. If the mass is distance between one crest and one trough is 1.5m. The
pulled down slightly its frequency of oscillation along the possible wavelengths (in m) of the waves are:
vertical direction is: (2020) (2020)
(a) 1, 3, 5,…. (b) 1,2,3,…
1 mL
(a) f  1 YA (b) f 
2 mL 2 YA 1 1 1 1 1 1
(c) , , ,... (d) , , ,...
2 4 6 1 3 5
1 YL 1 mA
(c) f  (d) f  73. A simple pendulum oscillating in air has period T. The bob
2 mA 2 YL
of the pendulum is completely immersed in a non-viscous
68. A stationary observer receives sound from two identical
1
tuning forks, one of which approaches and the other one liquid. The density of the liquid is th of the material of
16
receded with the same speed (much less than the speed of the bob. If the bob is inside liquid all the time, its period of
sound). The observer hears 2 beats/sec. The oscillation oscillation in this liquid is:
frequency of each tuning fork is (2020)
vo = 1400 Hz and the velocity of sound in air is 350 m/s. The
1 1
speed of each tuning fork is close to (2020) (a) 2T (b) 2T
10 14
1
(a) m/s (b) 1 m/s
4 1 1
(c) 4T (d) 4T
1 1 15 14
(c) m/s (d) m/s
2 8
OSCILLATION 6. The variation of the acceleration a of the particle executing

S.H.M. with displacement x is as shown in the figure.
Single Correct Options
(a) (b) a
1. A simple harmonic motion is represented by a
x (t) = 10 sin (20 t + 0.5). The amplitude of the S.H.M. is
(a) A = 30 (b) A = 20
(c) A = 10 (d) A = 5
2. The vertical motion of a ship at sea is described by the x
x
d2x (c) (d)

equation   4x , where x is the vertical height of the
dt 2 a a
ship (in metre) above its mean position. If it oscillates

through a height of 1 m x x
(a) its maximum vertical speed will be 1 m/s
(b) its maximum vertical speed will be 2 m/s
(c) its greatest vertical acceleration is 2 m/s2 7. What is the maximum acceleration of the particle doing
(d) its greatest vertical acceleration is 1 m/s 2 the SHM ?
3. A body of mass 0.01 kg executes simple harmonic motion  t 

y  2sin    , where y is in cm.
(S.H.M.) about x = 0 under the influence of a force shown 2 
below : The period of the S.H.M. is
 2
(a) cm/s 2 (b) cm/s 2
F(N) 2 2
8.0  2
+2.0 (c) cm/s 2 (d) cm/s 2
x(m) 4 4
-2.0 8. The acceleration a of a particle undergoing SHM is shown
-8.0
in the figure. Which of the labelled points corresponds to
the particle being at –xmax ?
(a) 1.05 s (b) 0.52 s
(c) 0.25 s (d) 0.30 s
4. If a particle under S.H.M. has time period 0.1 sec and
amplitude 2 × 10–3 m. It has maximum velocity
 
(a) m/s (b) m/s
25 26
(a) 4 (b) 3

(c) m/s (d) None of these (c) 2 (d) 1
30
9. The equation of motion of a particle executing simple
5. For a particle executing simple harmonic motion, which of harmonic motion is a + 162x = 0. In this equation, a is the
the following statements is not correct
linear acceleration in m/s2 of the particle at a displacement
(a) The total energy of the particle always remains the same
x in metre. The time period in simple harmonic motion is
(b) The restoring force is always directed towards a fixed point
(c) The restoring force is maximum at the extreme positions 1 1
(a) s (b) s
(d) The acceleration of the particle is maximum at the 4 2
equilibrium position. (c) 1 s (d) 2 s
10. The displacement of a particle moving in S.H.M. at any 17. A particle of mass 0.1 kg executes SHM under a force
instant is given by y  a sin t . The acceleration after time F = (–10x) Newton. Speed of particle at mean position is 6 m/
s. Then amplitude of oscillations is
T (a) 0.6 m (b) 0.2 m
t is (where T is the time period)
4 (c) 0.4 m (d) 0.1 m
(a) a (b) a 18. The displacement time equation of a particle executing
SHM is : x = A sin (t + ). At time t = 0 position of the
(c) a 2 (d)  a 2 particle is x = A/2 and it is moving along negative x-
11. The potential energy of a particle executing S.H.M. is 2.5 J, direction. Then the angle  can be :
when its displacement is half of amplitude. The total (a) /6 (b) /3
energy of the particle is (c) /3 (d) 5/6
(a) 18 J (b) 10 J 19. Two simple harmonic motions are represented by the
(c) 12 J (d) 2.5 J
 
12. A particle is vibrating in a simple harmonic motion with equations y1  0 . 1 sin  100  t   and y 2  0 .1 cos  t.
 3
amplitude 4 cm. At what displacement from the equilibrium
is its energy half potential and half kinetic ? The phase difference of the velocity of particle 1 with
respect to the velocity of particle 2 is
(a) 2 2 cm (b) 2 cm  
(c) 3 cm (d) 1 cm (a) (b)
3 6
13. Energy of particle executing SHM depends upon
 
(a) amplitude only (b) amplitude and frequency (c) (d)
6 3
(c) velocity only (d) frequency only
20. If < E > and < U > denote the average kinetic and the
14. A particle of mass 0.10 kg executes SHM with an amplitude
average potential energies respectively of mass describing
0.05 m and frequency 20 vib/s. Its energy of oscillation is
a simple harmonic motion, over one period, then the correct
(a) 2 J (b) 4 J
relation is
(c) 1 J (d) zero (a) < E > = < U > (b) < E > = 2 <U >
15. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion with a period (c) < E > = – 2 <U > (d) < E >= – < U >
of T seconds and amplitude a metre. The shortest time it 21. The following figure depicts a circular motion. The radius
a of the circle, the period of revolution, the initial position
takes to reach a point m from its mean position in and the sense of revolution are indicated on the figure.
2
The simple harmonic motion of the x–projection of the
seconds is radius vector of the rotating particle P can be shown as :
T
(a) T (b)
4
T T
(c) (d)
8 16
16. A particle of mass 0.1 kg is executing SHM of amplitude 0.1
m. When the particle passes through the mean position,
its KE is 8 × 10–3 J. Find the equation of motion of the
particle, if the initial phase of oscillation is 45°
 2t  
 (a) x  t   a cos   
  4 4
(a) y  0.1cos  3t  
 4
 t  
  (b) x  t   a cos   
(b) y  0.1sin  6t    4 4
 4
   2 t  
(c) x  t   a sin   
(c) y  0.1sin  4t    4 4
 4
   t  
(d) y  0.1cos  4t   (d) x  t   a cos   
 4  3 2
22. A particle moves with simple harmonic motion in a straight

t
line. In first s, after starting from rest it travels a distance 28. A particle moves according to the law x = a cos . The
2
a, and in next  s it travels 2a, in same direction, then :
distance covered by it in the time interval between t = 0
(a) time period of oscillations is 8
to t = 3 s is
(b) amplitude of motion is 4a (a) 2 a (b) 3 a
(c) time period of oscillations is 6 (c) 4 a (d) 5 a
(d) amplitude of motion is 3a 29. The potential energy of a harmonic oscillator of mass 2 kg
in its mean position is 5J. If its total energy is 9J and its
23. In SHM for how many times potential energy is equal to amplitude is 0.01 m, its time period will be
kinetic energy during one complete period ?
 
(a) 1 (b) 2 (a) s (b) s
100 50
(c) 4 (d) 8
 
24. Velocity at mean position of a particle executing SHM is v. (c)   s (d) none of these
Velocity of the particle at a distance equal to half of the  20 
amplitude will be 30. Two particles are executing SHM in a straight line.
Amplitude A and time period T of both the particles are
v v equal. At time t = 0, one particle is at displacement x1 = +A
(a) (b)
2 2 A
and the other at x 2  and they are approaching
2
3 3 towards each other. After what time they cross each other ?
(c) v (d) v
2 4 (a) T/3 (b) T/4
25. A particle executes linear simple harmonic motion with an (c) 5T/6 (d) T/6
31. A particle is executing S.H.M. of amplitude 5 cm and period
amplitude of 2 cm. When the particle is at 1 cm from the
6 sec. How long will it take to move from one end of its
mean position the magnitude of its velocity is equal to
path on one side of mean position to a position 2.5 cm on
that of its acceleration. Then its time period in seconds is the same side of the mean position ?
1 (a) 1.5 sec (b) 1 sec
(a) (b) 2 3 (c) 3 sec (d) 3.5 sec
2 3 32. A particle executing harmonic motion is having velocities
v1 and v2 at distance x1 and x2 from the equilibrium position.
2 3 The amplitude of the motion is
(c) (d)
3 2
v12 x22  v22 x12 v12 x12  v22 x22
26. A particle of mass m executes simple harmonic motion (a) (b)
v12  v22 v12  v22
with amplitude a and frequency . The average kinetic
energy during its motion from the position of equilibrium v12 x22  v22 x12 v12 x22  v22 x12
to the ends is (c) (d)
v12  v22 v12  v22
2 2 2 2 2 2
(a) 2 ma  (b)  ma 
33. A certain simple harmonic vibrator of mass 0.1 kg has a
1 2 2 2 total energy of 10 J. Its displacement from the mean
(c)  ma  (d) 42ma22 position is 1 cm when it has equal kinetic and potential
4
energies. The amplitude A and frequency f of vibtration of
27. The maximum acceleration of a particle in SHM is made the vibrator are
two times keeping the maximum speed to be constant. It is 500
possible when (a) A  2 cm, f  Hz
π
(a) amplitude of oscillation is doubled while frequency 1000
remains constant (b) A  2 cm, f  Hz
π
(b) amplitude is doubled while frequency is halved 1 500
(c) frequency is doubled while amplitude is halved (c) A  cm, f  Hz
2 π
(d) frequency of oscillation is doubled while amplitude 1 1000
remains constant (d) A  cm, f  Hz
2 π
34. A particle of mass m is executing simple harmonic 41. Two bodies M and N of equal masses are suspended from
oscillations about the origin on the x-axis. Its potential two separate massless springs of force constants k1 and
3
energy is U(x) = k | x | , where k is a positive constant. If the k2 respectively. If the two bodies oscillate vertically such
amplitude of oscillation is a, then its time period T is that their maximum velocities are equal, the ratio of the
(a) proportional to 1/ a (b) proportional to a amplitude M to that of N is
3/2 k1 k1
(c) proportional to a (d) proportional a (a) k (b)
2 k2
35. The displacement of the particle from its mean position (in
metre) is given by k2 k2
y = 0.2 sin (10t + 1.5) cos (10t + 1.5). (c) k (d) k1
1
The motion of the particle is
(a) periodic but not simple harmonic motion 42. In arrangement given in figure, if the block of mass m is
(b) non periodic displaced, the frequency is given by
(c) simple harmonic motion with period of 0.1 s A B
(d) simple harmonic motion with period of 0.2 s. m
36. Maximum velocity in SHM is m. The average velocity k1 k2
during motion from one extreme point to the other extreme
point will be : 1  K1 – K 2 
(a) f 
π 2 2  m 
(a) vm (b) v m
2 π
4 π
(c) v m (d) v m 1  K1  K 2 
π 4 (b) f 
2  m 
37. Force constant of a weightless spring is 16 N/m. A body of
mass 1.0 kg suspended from it is pulled down through 5
cm from its mean position and then released. The maximum 1  m 
kinetic energy of the body will be (c) f  2  K  K 
 1 2
(a) 2 × 10–2 J (b) 4 × 10–2 J
(c) 8 × 10–2 J (d) 16 × 10–2 J
1  m 
38. A particle is attached to a vertical spring and is pulled (d) f   
2  K1 – K 2 
down a distance 0.04 m below its equlibrium position and
is released from rest. The initial upward acceleration of the 43. Three masses 700g, 500g, and 400g are suspended at the
particle is 0.30 m/s2. The period of the oscillation is end of as spring as shown and are in equilibrium. When
(a) 4.08 s (b) 1.92 s the 700g mass is removed, the system oscillates with a
(c) 3.90 s (d) 2.29 s period of 3 seconds, when the 500 gm mass is also
removed, it will oscillate with a period of
39. Frequency of a particle executing SHM is 10 Hz. The
particle is suspended from a vertical spring. At the hightest
point of its oscillation the spring is unstretched. Maximum
speed of the particle is : (g = 10 m/s2)
(a) 2m/s (b) m/s
(c) 1/m/s (d) 1/2m/s 700 gm
40. To make the frequency double of an oscillator, we have to 500 gm
400 gm
(a) Double the mass
(b) Half the mass (a) 1 s (b) 2 s
(c) Quadruple the mass
12
(d) Reduce the mass to one-fourth (c) 3 s (d) s
5
44. On a smooth inclined plane, a body of mass M is attached (a) system will perform SHM with angular frequency given
between two springs. The other ends of the springs are
k  m1  m 2 
fixed to firm supports. If each spring has force constant by .
K, the period of oscillation of the body (assuming the m1m 2
springs as massless) is
(b) system performs SHM with angular frequency given
k
by m1  m 2 .
M (c) tension in string will be 0 when the system is released.
m2g
(d) maximumdisplacement of m1 will be .
 k
47. A massless rod is pivoted at point O. A string carrying a
mass m at one end is attached to the point A on the rod.
1/2 1/ 2
 m   2m  The period of small vertical oscillation of mass m around
(a) 2   (b) 2  
 2K   K  its equilibrium position is :
1/2
Mg sin   2 Mg 
(c) 2 (d) 2  
2K  K 
45. Four massless springs whose force constants are 2k, 2k, k
and 2 k respectivley are attached to a mass M kept on a
frictionless plane (as shown in figure). If the mass M is
displaced in the horizontal direction, then the frequency a m a m
(a) T  2 (b) T  
of the system. b k b k
b m b m
(c) T  2 (d) T  
a k a k
48. A block of mass m, attached to a fixed position O on a
smooth inclined wedge of mass M, oscillates with
amplitude A and linear frequency f. The wedge is located
1 k 1 4k on a rough horizontal surface. If the angle of the wedge is
(a) (b) 60°, then the force of friction acting on the wedge is given
2 4M 2 M
by (coefficient of static friction = )
1 k 1 7k
(c) (d)
2 7M 2 M
46. m1 and m2 are connected with a light inextensible string

with m1 lying on smooth table and m2 hanging as shown
in figure. m1 is also connected to a light spring which is
initially unstretched and the system is released from rest (a)  (M + m) g
1
(b) m2 A sin t
2
(c)   M  m  2 A sin t
 3 2 
(d)   M  m  g  2 m A sin t 
 
49. In the figure, the block of mass m, attached to the springs 52. A wooden cube (density of wood d) of side l floats in a
of stiffness k is in contact with the completely elastic wall, liquid of density  with its upper and lower surfaces
and the compression in the spring is x. The spring is horizontal. If the cube is pushed slightly down and
compressed further by x by displacing the block towards released, it performs simple harmonic motion of period T.
left and is then released. If the collision between the block Then T is equal to
and the wall is completely elastic then the time period of
oscillations of the block will be :  d
(a) 2 (b) 2
  d  g g
 d
(c) 2 (d) 2
dg   d  g
2 m m 53. The friction coefficient between two blocks of masses 1
(a) (b) 2
3 k k kg and 4 kg shown in figure is  and the horizontal plane
surface is smooth. If the system is slight displaced from
 m  m the mean position and released, it will execute SHM. The
(c) (d)
3 k 6 k maximum amplitude for which the upper block does not
slip relative to the lower will be –(K is spring constant)
50. A uniform cylinder of length L and mass M having cross-
sectional area A is suspended with its length vertical from
a fixed point by a light spring such that it is half submerged
in a liquid of density  at equilibrium position. When the
cylinder is given a small downward push and released it
starts oscillating with small amplitudes. If the spring has a
force constant k, then its time period of oscillations will be
M M
(a) T  2 (b) T  2 5 g g
Ag k (a) (b)
K K
3 g 2 g
M (c) (d)
(c) T  2 (d) none of these K K
k  Ag
54. A mass M = 5 kg is attached to a spring a shown in the
51. One end of a spring of force constant k is fixed to a vertical figure and held in position, so that the spring remains
wall and the other to a block of mass m resting on a smooth unstretched. The spring constant is 200 N/m. The mass M
horizontal surface. There is another wall at a distance x 0 is, then released and begins to undergo small oscillations.
from the black. The spring is then compressed by 2x 0 The amplitude of oscillation is
and released. The time taken to strike the wall is
2x0 x0
1 k k
(a)  (b)
6 m m
(a) 0.5 m (b) 0.25 m

2 m  k
(c) (d) (c) 0.2 m (d) 0.1 m
3 k 4 m
55. A spring has a natural length of 50 cm and a force constant 60. The ratio of frequencies of two pendulums are 2 : 3, then
of 2.0 × 103 Nm–1. A body of mass 10 kg is suspended from their length are in ratio
it and the spring is stretched. If the body is pulled down to (a) 2/3 (b) 3/ 2
a length of 58 cm and released, it executes simple harmonic
motion. What is the net force on the body when it is at its 4 9
(c) (d)
9 4
lowermost position of its oscillation ? (Take g = 10 ms–2)
(a) 20 N (b) 40 N 61. In a seconds pendulum, mass of the bob is 30 g. If it is
(c) 60 N (d) 80 N replaced by 90 g mass then its time period will be
56. A spring of force constant 200 N/m is mounted as shown (a) 1 s (b) 2 s
in figure and a mass 2 kg is attached to the free end. If the
(c) 4 s (d) 3 s
system is given an initial displacement of 0.05 m and an
initial velocity of 2 m/sec, find the amplitude of simple 62. The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum of length
harmonic motion. L suspended from the roof of a vehicle which moves
without friction down an inclined plane of inclination ,
is given by
L L
(a) 2 (b) 2
g cos  g sin 
(a) 0.4 m (b) 0.206 m L L

(c) 2 (d) 2
(c) 0.3 m (d) 0.5 m g g tan 
57. The mass and diameter of a planet are twice those of
earth. The period of oscillation of pendulum on this planet 63. In case of a simple pendulum, time period versus length is
will be (If it is a second’s pendulum on earth) depicted by
1
(a) sec (b) 2 2 sec
2
1
(c) 2 sec (d) sec (a) (b)
2
58. A man measures the period of a simple pendulum inside a
stationary lift and finds it to be T sec. If the lift accelerates
upwards with an acceleration g / 4 , then the period of the
pendulum will be
Pendulum
(c) (d)
Lift
64. A simple pendulum has time period T = 2 s is air. If whole

(a) T (b) T/4
arrangement is placed in nonviscous liquid whose density
2T
(c) (d) 2T 5 is 1/2 times the density of bob. The time period in the
5
liquid will be :
59. The length of second’s pendulum of the earth is about 1
m. What should be the length of second’s pendulum on
2
the moon ? (a) s (b) 4 s
2
1
(a) 1 m (b) m
6 (c) 2 2 s (d) 4 2 s
(c) 6 m (d) 36 m
65. A horizontal rod of mass m and length L is pivoted smoothly 68. The displacement equation of a particle is
at one end. The rod’s other end is supported by a spring x = 3 sin 2t + 4 cos 2t
of force constant k. The rod is rotated (in vertical plane) The amplitude and maximum velocity will be respectively
(a) 5, 10 (b) 3, 2
by a small angle  from its horizontal equilibrium position
(c) 4, 2 (d) 3, 4
and released. The angular frequency of the subsequent
69. The equation of a SHM is given by x = 3 sin 5t + 4cos 5t,
simple harmonic motion is
where x is in cm and time t is in seconds. Find the phase
constant of the motion.
(a) 45° (b) 30°
(c) 53.1° (d) 60°
70. A particle undergoing SHM has the equation : x = A sin (t + ),
where x represents the displacement of the particle. The
kinetic energy oscillates with time period
2 
(a) (b)
 
4
(c) (d) none of these

3k k 71. The potential energy of a particle of mass 1 kg in motion
(a) (b) along the x–axis is given by : U = 4 (1 – cos 2x) J
m 3m
Here x is in metres. The period of small oscillations (in sec)
is:
3k 3g k
(c)  (d) (a) 2  (b) 
m 2L m
(c) /2 (d) 2
66. A uniform rod of length L is suspended from a point P and 72. A rectangular block of mass m and area of cross-section A
is made to undergo small oscillations. Time period of floats in a liquid of density . If it is given small vertical
oscillation is (O is centre of mass) : displacement from equilibrium, it undergoes oscillation with
a time period T, then
(a) T  m (b) T 
1 1
(c) T  (d) T 
A 
73. A U tube of uniform bore of cross-sectional area A has
been set up vertically with open ends facing up. Now M
gm of a liquid of density d is poured into it. The column of
liquid in this tube will oscillate with a period T such that
3L L M MA
(a) 2 (b) 2 (a) T  2 (b) T  2
g g g gd
7L L
(c) 2 (d) 2 M M
12 g 12 g (c) T  2 (d) T  2
gdA 2 Adg
67. The motion of a particle is given x = A sin t + B cos t. 74. The metallic bob of a simple pendulum has the relative
The motion of the particle is density . The time period of this pendulum is T. If the
(a) not simple harmonic metallic bob is immersed in water, then the new time period
(b) simple harmonic with amplitude A + B is given by
 1 
 A  B (a) T  (b) T   1
(c) simple harmonic with amplitude
2
 1 
(d) simple harmonic with amplitude A 2  B2 (c) T  (d) T   1
75. One end of a spring of force constant K is fixed to a vertical

wall and the other to a body of mass m resting on a smooth
horizontal surface. There is another wall at a distance x0
from the body. The spring is then compressed by 3x0 and
released. The time taken to strike the wall from the instant
–1
of release is (given sin (1/3) = (/9))
 m 2 m m1g
(a) (b) (a) the amplitude of oscillation is
6 K 3 K k
 m1  m 2  g
 m 11 m (b) the amplitude of oscillation is
(c) (d) k
4 K 18 K
k
76. A mass m is suspended from a spring of force constant k (c) the system oscillates with angular frequency m2
and just touches another identical spring fixed to the floor
as shown in the figure. The time period of small oscillations (d) the system oscillates with angular frequency
is k
 m1  m 2 
79. A particle is subjected to two simple harmonic motions
along x and y directions according to x = 3 sin 100 t; y
= 4sin 100 t
(a) Motion of particle will be on ellipse travelling in
clockwise direction.
m m m (b) Motion of particle will be on a straight line with slope
(a) 2 (b)   4/3.
k k k/2
(c) Motion will be simple harmonic motion with
m m m amplitude 5.
(c)  (d)  
3k / 2 k 2k (d) Phase difference between two motions is /2.
Multiple Correct Options 80. A rectangular block of mass m and area of cross section A
77. A coin is placed on a horizonatal platform, which floats on a liquid of density . If it is given a small
undergoes vertical simple harmonic motion of angular displacement, it oscillates with a period T, then
frequency . The amplitude of oscillation is gradually
increased. The coin will leave contact with the platform (a) T  m (b) T  
for the first time
(a) at the highest position of the platform 1 1
(c) T  (d) T 
(b) at the mean position of the platform A r
2
(c) for an amplitude of g/ 81. The potential energy of a particle of mass 0.1 kg, moving
along the x-axis, is given by U = 5x(x – 4) J, where x is in
(d) for an amplitude of g/
meter. It can be concluded that
78. Two masses m1 and m2 are suspended together by a light
(a) the particle is acted upon by a constant force.
spring of spring constant k as shown in the figure. When
the system is in equilibrium, the mass m1 is removed (b) the speed of the particle is maximum at x = 2 m.
without disturbing the system, as a result of this removal (c) the particle executes SHM.
mass m2 performs simple harmonic motion. For this
(d) the period of oscillation of the particle is (/5) s.
situation mark the correct statement(s).
82. The angular frequency of the damped oscillator is given Passage - 2

Using the following passage, solve Q. 87 to 89
k r2 
by,    
 m 4m 2  where k is the spring constant, m A small block of mass m is fixed at upper end of a massive
  vertical spring of spring constant k = 4 mg/L and natural
is the mass of the oscillator and r is the damping constant. length ‘10L’. The lower end of spring is free and is at a
height L from fixed horizontal floor as shown. The spring
r2 is initially unstressed and the spring-block system is
If the ratio is 8%, the change in time period compared
mk released from rest in the shown position.
to the undamped oscillator is approximately as follows:
(a) increases by 8% (b) decreases by 8%
(c) increases by 1% (d) decrease by 1%
83. A body is in simple harmonic motion with time period half
second (T = 0.5 s) and amplitude one cm (A = 1 cm). Find
the average velocity in the interval in which it moves
87. At the instant the speed of block is maximum, the
from equilibrium position to half of its amplitude.
magnitude of force exerted by the spring on the block is
(a) 6 cm/s (b) 4 cm/s
(c) 16 cm/s (d) 12 cm/s mg
(a) (b) mg
2
Comprehension Type Questions
(c) zero (d) None of these
Passage - 1
88. As the block is coming down, the maximum speed attained
Using the following passage, solve Q. 84 to 86 by the block is
One end of an ideal spring is fixed to a wall at origin O and
the axis of spring is parallel to x-axis . A block of mass m = (a) gL
1 kg is attached to free end of the spring and it is performing
SHM. Equation of position of the block in co-ordinate (b) 3gL
system shown in figure is x = 10 + 3 sin (10 t), where t is in
second and x in cm. 3
(c) gL
2
Another block of mass M = 3 kg, moving towards the
origin with velocity 30 cm/s collides with the block
performing SHM at t = 0 and gets stuck to it. 3
(d) gL
2
89. Till the block reaches its lowest position for the first time,
the time duration for which the spring remains
compressed is
L L 1
84. Angular frequency of oscillation after collision is (a)   sin 1
2g 4g 3
(a) 20 rad/s (b) 5 rad/s
(c) 100 rad/s (d) 50 rad/s
 L L 1
85. New amplitude of oscillation is (b)  sin 1
4 g 4g 3
(a) 3 cm (b) 20 cm
(c) 10 cm (d) 100 cm L L 2
(c)   sin 1
86. New equation for position of the combined body is 2g 4g 3
(a) (10 + 3 sin 5t) cm (b) (10 – 3 sin 5t) cm
(c) (10 + 3 cos 10 t) cm (d) (10 – 3 cos 10t) cm  L L 2
(d)  sin 1
2 2g 4g 3
Passage - 3 94. Velocity of the block as a function of time can be

expressed as
Using the following passage, solve Q. 90 to 94

A 100 g block is connected to a horizontal massless spring (a) v  48sin 16t   cm / s
of force constant 25.6 N/m. As shown in figure (a), the  2
block is free to oscillate on a horizontal frictionless surface. 
The block is displaced 3 cm from the equilibrium position (b) v  48sin 16t   cm / s
 3
and, at t = 0, it is released from rest at x= 0. It executes
simple harmonic motion with the positive x-direction  
(c) v  56sin  16t   cm / s
indicated in figure (a).  4
The position-time(x-t) graph of motion of the block is as  
shown in figure (b). (d) v  56sin  16t   cm / s
 6
Match the Following
95. Two particles ‘A’ and ‘B’ start SHM at t = 0. Their positions
as function of time are given by
XA = A sin t
XB = A sin t + /3)
Column I Column II

(a) Minimum time when x is same (p)
3

(b) Minimum time when velocity is same (q)


(c) Minimum time after which (r)
2
vA < 0 and vB < 0
5
90. When the block is at position A on the graph, its (d) Minimum time after which (s)
6
(a) position and velocity both are negative xA < 0 and xB < 0
(b) position is positive and velocity is negative 96. A simple harmonic oscillator consists of a block attached
(c) position is negative and velocity is positive to a spring with k = 200 N/m. The block slides on a
(d) position and velocity both the positive. frictionless horizontal surface, with equilibrium point x =
91. When the block is at position B on the graph, its 0. A graph of the block’s vleocity v as a function of time t
(a) position and velocity are positive is shown. Correctly match the required information in
(b) position is positive and velocity is negative 2
Column I with the values given in Column II (use  = 10):
(c) position in negative and velocity is positive
(d) position and velocity are negative
92. When the block is at position C on the graph, its
(a) velocity is maximum and acceleration is zero
(b) velocity is minimum and acceleration is zero
(c) velocity is zero and acceleration is negative
(d) velocity is zero and acceleration is positive
93. Position of the block as a function of time can now be Column I Column II
expressed as (a) The block’s mass in kg (p) –200
(b) The block’s displacement (q) 0.20
    at t = 0 in metres
(a) x  3cos 16t   cm (b) x  3cos 16t   cm
 2  3 (c) The block’s acceleration (r) 4.0
2
at t = 0.10s in m/s
    (d) The block’s maximum (s) –0.20
(c) x  3.5cos 16t   cm (d) x  3.2cos 16t   cm
 6  4  kinetic energy in joules
WAVES a
101. An equation of plane progressive wave y = sin
Single Correct Options 
97. A mass m is suspended at the end of a massless wire of 2  x 

 t   . If maximum velocity of particle and velocity
length L and cross-sectional area A. If Y is the Young’s 3  b
modulus of the material of the wire, the frequency of
oscillations along the vertical line is given by a
of wave are equal. Now will be
b
1 mL
(a) f  2 3
2 YA (a) (b)
3 2
1 YL 1
(b) f  (c) (d) none of these.
2 mA 2
102. A transverse wave is represented by the equation
1 AL 2 (vt – x) for what value of the maximum
(c) f  y  y 0 sin 
2 Ym 
particle velocity is equal to two times the wave velocity?
1 YA
(d) f  y 0
2 mL (a)   (b) y0
2
98. The amplitude of a wave disturbance propagating along
2y 0
1 (c) = 2y0 (d)  
positve x-axis is given by y  at t = 0 and 2
1 x2
103. Transverse waves are produced in a long string by
1 attaching its free end to a vibrating tuning fork. Figure
y at t = 2 s where x and y are in metres. The
1  (x  1) 2 below shows the shape of a part of string. Which pairs of
shape of the wave disturbance does not change with time. points are in phase?
The velocity of the wave is
(a) 0.5 m/s (b) 1 m/s
(c) 2 m/s (d) 4 m/s
99. The distance between two consecutive crests in a wave
train produced in string is 5 cm. If two complete waves
pass through any point per second, the velocity of the
wave is (a) A and D (b) B and E
(a) 10 cm/s (b) 2.5 cm/s (c) C and F (d) A and G
(c) 5 cm/s (d) 15 cm/s 104. When a wave travels in a medium, the particle
displacements are given by y (x, t) = 0.03 sin  (2t – 0.01 x)
100. A equation of plane progressive wave y = a sin ( t + kx).
where y and x are in meters and t in seconds.
Its wrong statement is
The wave length of the wave is
2 (a) 10 m (b) 20 m
(a) is wave length
k (c) 100 m (d) 200 m
 105. Transverse wave of amplitude 10 cm is generated at one
(b) is velocity of wave end (x = 0) of a long string by a tuning fork of frequency
k
500 Hz. At a certain instant of time, the displacement of a
 particle A at x = 100 cm is – 5 cm and of particle B at x = 200
(c) is frequency of wave cm is + 5 cm. What is the wave length of the wave?
2
k (a) 2 m (b) 3 m
(d) is maximum velocity of particle (c) 4 m (d) 5 m

106. A source of sound vibrates according to the equation 113. The speed of sound in oxygen (O2) at a certain temperature
–1 –1
y = 0.05 cos  t. It sends out waves of velocity 1.5 ms . is 460 ms . The speed of sound in helium (He) at the same
The wave length of the waves is temperature will be (assume both gases to be ideal) (2008)
–1 –1
(a) 1.5 m (b) 3.0 m (a) 330 ms (b) 460 ms
–1 –1
(c) 4.5 m (d) 6.0 m (c) 500 ms (d) 1420 ms
107. A progressive wave in a medium is represented by the 114. The speed of sound in a gas is v and the root mean square
speed of gas molecules is vrmsIf the ratio of the specific
5
equation y = 0.1 sin 10 t  x  where y and x are in heats of the gas  = 1.5, then the ratio of speed of sound
 11  to vrms is
cm and t in seconds. The maximum speed of a particle of
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 2
the medium due to the wave is
–1 –1
(a) 1 cm s (b) 10 cm s (c) 1: 3 (d) 1 : 3
–1 –1
(c)  cms (d) 10  cms 115. Under the same conditions of pressure and temperature,
108. The potential energy of a particle executing simple the velocity of sound in oxygen and hydrogen gases are
harmonic motion at a distance x from the equilibrium v0 and vH then :
position is proportional to (a) vH = 2v0 (b) vH = 4v0
(a) (b) x (c) v0 = 4vH (d) vH = v0
x
(c) x
2
(d) x
3 116. If the temperature of the gaseous medium drops by 1%,
the velocity of sound in that medium :
5  x (a) increase by 5% (b) remains unchanged
109. The equation of wave y  sin  t   where
2  2 (c) decreases by 0.5% (d) decreases by 2%
displacement is in cm and time in sec. The phase angle 117. The velocity of sound through a diatomic gaseous medium
between two particles at distance 12 cm is of molecular weight M at 0°C :
0
(a) 6 (b) 6 radian
R 3R
(c) 3
0
(d) 3 radian (a) (b)
M M
110. The particle displacement in a travelling harmonic wave is
given by y (x, t) = 2.0 cos 2  (10t – 0.008x + 0.35) where x 382 R 273 R
(c) (d)
and y are in centimetres and t is in seconds. What is the M M
phase difference between oscillatory motion at two point 118. Two periodic waves of amplitudes a and b pass through a
separated by a distance of 4 m? region at the same in the same direction. If a > b, the
(a) 0.2  (b) 6.4  difference in the maximum and minimum possible
amplitudes is :
(c) 0.6  (d) 0.8 
(a) a + b (b) a – b
111. Transverse waves of the same frequency are generated in (c) 2 a (d) 2 b
two steel wires A and B. The diameter of A is twice that of 119. The extension in a string, obeying Hookes’ law, is x. The
B and the tension in A is half that in B. The ratio of the speed of the wave in the stretched string is v. If the extension
velocities of waves in A and B is in the string is increased to 1.5 x, the speed of the wave in
the string will be
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 2
(a) 1.22 v (b) 0.61 v
(c) 1 : 2 2 (d) 3 : 2 2 (c) 1.50 v (d) 0.75 v
112. The velocity of sound in air is 332 m/s. If the air consits of 120. A uniform rope of mass 0.1 kg and length 2.45 m hangs
nitrogen and oxygen in the ratio 4 : 1, the velocity of sound from a ceiling. The time taken by a transverse wave to
2
in oxygen is travel the full length of the rope is (g = 9.8 m/s )
(a) 1 s (b) 2 s
(a) 372 m/s (b) 278 m/s
(c) 3 s (d) 4 s
(c) 418 m/s (d) 315 m/s
–8 –2
121. A sound has an intensity of 2 × 10 Wm . Its intensity
level in decibels is : (log10 2 = 0.3)  x
129. A wave is incident on fixed target as y= 5sin 2   t   ,
(a) 23 (b) 4.3  2
(c) 43 (d) none of these
the equation of reflected wave through rigid target
122. Two waves represented by the following equations are
travelling in the same medium  x
y1 = 5 sin 2 (75t – 0.25 x), (a) y = –5 sin 2  t  
 2
y2 = 10 sin 2 (150 t – 0.50 x)
I1  x
The intensity ratio I of the two waves is : (b) y = +5 sin 2  t  
2  2
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 4
(c) 1 : 8 (d) 1 : 16  x
(c) y = +5 sin 2  t  
123. The intensity level of a sound wave is 4 dB. If the intensity  2
of the wave is doubled, then the intensity level of the
sound, as expressed in dB, would be :
 x
(a) 8 (b) 16 (d) y = –5 sin 2  t  
 2
(c) 7 (d) 14
124. Two sound waves of the same frequency have respective 130. Two loudspeakers A and B, 1.0 m apart, produce sound waves
amplitudes of 3 units and 1 unit and are travelling in of the same wavelength and in the same phase. A sensitive
opposite directions in the same straight line. At a particular sound detector, moving along PQ, parallel to line AB, 2.4 m
place in that line, the resultant wave will vary in loudness. away, detects maximum sound at P (on the perpendicular
The ratio maximum loudness/minimum loudness is
bisector of AB) and another maximum sound when it first
(a) 9/1 (b) 6/1
reaches Q directly opposite to B, as shown in Figure. What is
(c) 9/2 (d) 2/1
the wavelength of sound emitted by the speakers ?
125. A sound absorber attenuates the sound level by 20 dB.
The intensity decreases by a factor of
(a) 100 (b) 1000
(c) 10000 (d) 10
2 2
126. Two sounds waves have intensties 100W/m and 400W/m
respectively. The later sound is
(a) 6 decibel louder than the other
(b) 4 decibel louder than the other
(c) 0.6 decibel louder than the other
(a) 0.1 m (b) 0.2 m
(d) data’s are insufficient.
127. The power of a sound from the speaker of a radio is 20 (c) 0.3 m (d) 0.4 m
mW. By turning the knob of the volume control, the power 
of the sound is increased to 400 mW. The power increase 131. When two sound waves with a phase difference of ,
2
in decibels as compared to the original power is
and each having amplitude A and frequency , are
(a) 13.0 dB (b) 10 dB
superimposed on each other, then the maximum amplitude
(c) 20 dB (d) 8000 dB
and frequency of resultant wave is :
128. A bat flying above a lake emits ultrasonic sound of 100
kHz. When this wave falls on the water surface, it is partly A  A
reflected and partly transmitted. What are the wavelengths (a) : (b) :
2 2 2
of the reflected and transmitted waves? The speed of
–1 –1
sound in air is 340 ms and in water 1450 ms .

(a) 6.8 mm and 2.9 cm (b) 3.4 mm and 7.8 mm (c) 2 A; (d) 2A :
2
(c) 3.4 mm and 14.5 mm (d) 6.8 mm and 1.45 cm
132. Two waves are passing through a region in the same 138. The fundamental frequency of sonometer wire is 600 Hz
st
direction at the same time. If the equation of these waves when length of wire is short by 25%. Now frequency of 1
are : overtone will be
(a) 800 Hz (b) 1200 Hz
2
y1  a sin  vt  x  (c) 1600 Hz (d) 2000 Hz

139. The length of sonometer wire is 1.8 m. What is wavelength
2 of wave when number of nodes are 10
y 2  b sin  vt  x   x 0 
  (a) 20 cm (b) 36 cm
(c) 40 cm (d) 72 cm
 140. The length of a sonometer wire AB is 110 cm. Where should
then the amplitude of the resultant wave for x 0  , is :
2 the two bridges be placed from A, to divide the wire in 3
(a) | a – b | (b) (a + b) segments whose fundamental frequencies are in the ratio
of 1 : 2 : 3?
(c) zero (d) a 2  b2 (a) 30 cm, 60 cm (b) 40 cm, 80 cm
133. A string fixed at both ends is vibrating in the lowest mode (c) 60 cm, 90 cm (d) 30 cm, 90 cm
of vibration for which a point at quarter of its length from 141. The total length of a sonometer wire between fixed ends
one end is a point of maximum displacement. The is 110 cm. Two bridges are placed to divide the length of
frequency of vibration in this mode is 100 Hz. What will be wire in ratio 6 : 3 : 2. The tension in the wire is 400 N and
the frequency emitted when it vibrates in the next mode the mass per unit length is 0.01 kg/m. What is the minimum
such that this point is again a point of maximum common frequency with which three parts can vibrate ?
displacement ? (a) 1100 Hz (b)100 Hz
(a) 400 Hz (b) 200 Hz (c) 166 Hz (d) 1000 Hz
(c) 600 Hz (d) 300 Hz 142. Figure shows a stationary wave between two fixed point P
134. A string is stretched between fixed points separated by 75 cm. and Q. Which point(s) of 1,2 and 3 are in phase with the
It is observed to have resonant frequencies of 420 Hz and point X ?
315 Hz. There are no other resonant frequencies between
these two. Then, the lowest resonant frequency for this
string is
(a) 10.5 Hz (b) 105 Hz (a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2 only
(c) 1.05 Hz (d) 1050 Hz (c) 2 and 3 only (d) 3 only
135. Two stretched strings of same material are vibrating under 143. Particle displacements (in cm) in a standing wave are given by
the same tension in fundamental mode. The ratio of their y (x, t) = 2 sin (0.1  x) cos (100  t).
frequencies is 1 : 2 and ratio of the length of the vibrating The distance between a node and the next anti–node is
segments is 1 : 4. Then the ratio of the radii of the strings is : (a) 2.5 cm (b) 5.0 cm
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 4 : 1 (c) 7.5 cm (d) 10.0 cm
(c) 3 : 2 (d) 8 : 1 144. Two parts of a sonometer wire, divided by a movable knife–
edge, differ in length by 1 cm and produce 1 beat per second
136. A string of length 1 m has the mass per unit length 0.1 g
–1 when sounded together. If the total length of the wire is 100
cm . What would be the fundamental frequency of
cm, the frequencies of the two parts of the wire are
vibrating of this string under tension of 400 N ?
(a) 51 Hz, 50 Hz (b) 50.5 Hz, 49.5 Hz
(a) 400 Hz (b) 100 Hz
(c) 49 Hz, 48 Hz (d) 49.5 Hz, 48.5 Hz
(c) 50 Hz (d) 200 Hz 145. A tuning fork of frequency 340 Hz is sounded above a
137. Four wires of identical length, diameters and of the same cylindrical tube 1 m high. Water is slowly poured into the
–1
material are stretched on a sonometre wire. If the ratio of tube. If the speed of sound is 340 ms , at what levels of
their tensions is 1 : 4 : 9 : 16, then the ratio of their water in the tube will the sound of the fork be appreciably
fundamental frequencies are : intensified?
(a) 16 : 9 : 4 : 1 (b) 4 : 3 : 2 : 1 (a) 25 cm, 75 cm (b) 20 cm, 80 cm
(c) 1 : 4 : 2 : 16 (d) 1 : 2 : 3 : 4 (c) 15 cm, 85 cm (d) 17 cm, 83 cm
146. An organ pipe closed at one end is excited to support the 154. An organ pipe P1, closed at one end vibrating in its first
third overtone. It is found that air in the pipe has harmonic and another pipe P2, open at both ends vibrating
(a) 3 nodes and 3 antinodes in its third harmonic, are in resonance with a given tuning
(b) 3 nodes and 4 antinodes fork. The ratio of the lengths of P1 and P2 is
(c) 4 nodes and 3 antinodes
8 1
(d) 4 nodes and 4 antinodes (a) (b)
3 6
147. Two organ pipes A and B are closed and open respectively.
Third overtone of each are unison. The ratio of their length is
1 1
(a) 8/7 (b) 7/8 (c) (d)
2 3
(c) 7/4 (d) 4/7
148. The fundamental frequency of open organ pipe is f when 155. Two closed pipes produce 10 beats/s when emitting their
it filled with one–fourth length with water now frequency fundamental nodes. If their length are in ratio of 25 : 26.
will be Then their fundamental frequency in Hz, are :
(a) f (b) f / 3 (a) 270, 280 (b) 260, 270
(c) 2f/3 (d) 4f/3 (c) 260, 250 (d) 260, 280
149. Two organ pipes, each closed at one end, give 5 beats per 156. A weight is attached to the free end of a sonometer wire. It
second when emitting their fundamental notes. If their gives resonance at a length 40 cm when it is resonaced with
lengths are in the ratio of 50 : 51, their fundamental a tuning fork of frequency 512 Hz. The weight is then
frequencies (in Hz) are
immersed wholly in water, the resonant length is reduced to
(a) 250, 255 (b) 255, 260
30 cm. The relative density in which weight suspended is
(c) 260, 265 (d) 265, 270
150. Standing waves are produced by the superposition of two 16 16
(a) (b)
waves y1 = 0.05 sin (3  t – 2x) and y2 = 0.05 sin (3  t + 2x) 9 7
where x and y are expressed in metres and t is in seconds.
What is the amplitude of a particle at x = 0.5 m. Given cos 16 16
0
(57.3 ) = 0.54 (c) (d)
5 3
(a) 2.7cm (b) 5.4 cm
157. Two tuning forks A and B produce 10 beats per second
(c) 8.1 cm (d) 10.8 cm
when sounded together. On slightly loading fork A with a
151. A pipe of length 20 cm is open at both ends. Which
little wax, it was observed that 15 beats are heard per second.
harmonic mode of the pipe is resonantly excited by a 1700
Hz source? The speed of sound = 340 ms .
–1 If the frequency of fork B is 480 Hz, what is the frequency of
(a) First harmonic (b) Second harmonic fork A before it was loaded?
(c) Third harmonic (d) Fourth harmonic (a) 465 Hz (b) 470 Hz
152. A knife–edge divides a sonometer wire into two parts. (c) 490Hz (d) 495 Hz
The fundamental frequencies of the two parts are f1 and f2. 158. Nine tuning forks are arranged in order of increasing
The fundamental frequency of the sonometer wire when frequency. Each tuning fork produces 4 beats per second
the knife–edge is removed will be when sounded with either of its neighbours. If the
1 frequency of the 9th tuning fork is twice that of the first,
(a) f1 + f2 (b) (f1  f 2 ) what is the frequency of the first tuning fork?
2
(a) 32 Hz (b) 40 Hz
f1 f 2
(c) f1f 2 (d) f  f (c) 48 Hz (d) 56 Hz
1 2
159. A tuning fork produces 4 beats per second when sounded
153. A tube closed at one end containing air, produces, when with a sonometer of vibrating length 48 cm. It produces 4
excited, the fundamental note of frequency 512 Hz. If the beats per second also when the vibrating length is 50 cm.
tube is open at both ends, the fundamental frequency that What is the frequency of the tuning fork?
can be excited is (in Hz) (a) 196 Hz (b) 284 Hz
(a) 1024 (b) 512 (c) 375 Hz (d) 460 Hz
(c) 256 (d) 128
160. 1 = 100 cm, 2 = 99 cm and velocity of sound = 396 m/s. 167. Two trains, one coming towards and another going away
The number beats (in Hz) are : from an observer both with the speed of 4 m/s, produces
(a) 4 (b) 2 whistle simultaneously of frequency 300 Hz. Find the
(c) 3 (d) 1 number of beats produced (V = 330 m/s).
161. Following two wave trains are approaching each other : (a) 5 (b) 6
(c) 7 (d) 12
y1 = a sin 2000 t
168. A metal wire of diameter 1 mm is held on two knife edges
y2 = a sin 2008 t
separated by a distance of 50 cm. The tension in the wire
The number of beats heard per second is :
is 100 N. The wire vibrating with its fundamental frequency
(a) 8 (b) 4 and a vibrating tuning fork together produce 5 beats per
(c) 1 (d) zero second. The tension in the wire is then reduced to 81 N.
162. A tuning fork of frequency 480 Hz produces 10 beat/s, When the two are excited, beats are heard at the same rate.
when sounded with a vibrating sonometer string. What What is the frequency of the fork?
must be frequency of the string, if a slight increase in (a) 90 Hz (b) 95 Hz
tension produces more beats per sec then before ? (c) 100 Hz (d) 105 Hz
(a) 460 Hz (b) 470 Hz 169. Two whistles A and B have frequencies 660 Hz and 590 Hz
(c) 480 Hz (d) 490 Hz respectively. An observer is standing in the middle of line
163. When two tuning forks A and B are sounded together, x joining the two sources. Source B and observer are moving
beats/sec are heard. Frequency of A is n. Now, when one towards right with velocity 30 m/s and A is standing to the
prong of fork B is loaded with a little wax, the number of left side. If the velocity of sound in air is 300 m/s. The
beats decreases. The frequency of fork B is : number of beats/second listened by the observer are :
(a) n + x (b) n – x (a) 8 (b) 6
(c) n + 2x (d) n – 2x (c) 4 (d) 2
164. A tuning fork of frequency 100 when sound together with 170. A closed organ pipe and an open organ pipe of same length
another tuning fork of unknown frequency produces 2 produce 2 beats when they are set into vibrations
beats/s. On loading the tuning fork whose frequency is simultaneously in their fundamental mode. The length of
not known and sounded together with the same tuning open organ pipe is now halved and of closed organ pipe is
fork produces one beat, then the frequency of the unknown doubled. The number of beats produced will be :
tuning fork is : (a) 8 (b) 7
(a) 102 (b) 98 (c) 4 (d) 2
(c) 99 (d) 101 171. A source of sound is travelling towards a stationary
165. An unknown tuning fork sounded together with a tuning observer. The frequency of sound heard by the observed
fork of frequency 256 emits two beats. On loading tuning is of three times the original frequency. The velocity of
fork of frequency 256, the number of beats heard is 1/s. sound is v m/s. The speed of source will be
The frequency of unknown tuning fork is :
2
(a) 257 (b) 258 (a) f (b) f
3
(c) 256 (d) 254
166. An organ pipe, open from both ends produces 5 beats/s 3
(c) f (d) 3 f
when vibrated with a source of frequency 200 Hz in its 2
fundamental mode. The second harmonic of the same pipe
172. An observer moves towards a stationary source of sound
produces 10 beats/s with a source of frequency 420 Hz.
with a velocity one–tenth the velocity of sound. The
The fundamental frequency of pipe is :
apparent increase in frequency is
(a) 195 Hz (b) 205 Hz
(a) zero (b) 5%
(c) 190 Hz (d) 210 Hz
(c) 10% (d) 0.1%
173. A train standing at a certain distance from a railway Multiple Answer Type Question
platform is blowing a whistle of frequency 500 Hz. If the
–1 179. A wave equation which gives the displacement along Y-
speed of sound is 340 ms , the frequency and wavelength
direction is given by
of the sound of the whistle heard by a man running
–4
–1
towards the engine with a speed of 10 ms respectively y = 10 sin(60 t + 2x)
are where x and y are in metres and t is time in seconds. This
(a) 500 Hz, 0.7 m (b) 500 Hz, 0.68 m represents a wave
(c) 486 Hz, 0.7 m (d) 515 Hz, 0.68 m (a) travelling with a velocity of 30 m/s in the negative x-
direction
174. In the above question a wind starts blowing in the direction
from the engine to the platform with a speed of 10 ms .
–1 (b) of wavelength  metres
The frequency and wavelength of the sound of the whistle (c) of frequency 30/ Hertz
–4
heard by a man standing at the platform will be (d) of amplitude 10 m travelling along the negative x-
(a) 500 Hz, 0.68 m (b) 500 Hz, 0.7m direction.
(c) 486 Hz, 0.7 m (d) 515 Hz, 0.68 m 180. For a transverse wave on a string, the string displacement
175. A train blowing its whistle moves with a constant velocity is described by
u away from the observer on the ground. The ratio of the y = (x, t) = f(x – at)
actual frequency of the whistle to that measured by the where f represents a function and a is a negative constant.
observer is found to be 1.2. If the train is at rest and the Then which of the following is/are correct statment(s)?
observer moves away from it at the same velocity, the (a) Shape of the string at time t = 0 is given by f(x)
ratio would be given by
(b) The shape of wave from does not change as it moves
(a) 0.51 (b) 1.25 along the string
(c) 1.52 (d) 2.05 (c) Wave form moves in +ve x-direction
176. A motorcycle starts from rest and accelerates along a (d) The speed of waveform is a
2
straight line at 2.2 m/s . At the starting point of the
181. A wave moves at a constant speed along a stretched string.
motorcycle, there is a stationary electric siren. How far
Mark the incorrect statement out of the following:
has the motorcycle gone when the driver hears the
(a) Particle speed is constant and equal to the wave speed.
frequency of the siren at 90% of its value when the
–1
motorcycle was at rest ? (Speed of sound in air = 330 ms ) (b) Particle speed is independent of amplitude of the
priodic motion of the source.
(a) 123.75 m (b) 247.5 m
(c) Particle speed is independent of frequency of periodic
(c) 495 m (d) 990 m
motion of the source.
177. A whistle emitting a sound of frequency 440 Hz is tied
(d) Particle speed is dependent on tension and linear mass
to a string of 1.5 m length and rotated with an angular
density the string.
velocity of 20 rad/s in the horizontal plane. Then the
range of frequencies heard by an observer stationed at 182. An observer A is moving directly towards a stationary
a large distance from the whistle will be (Speed of sound sound source while another observer B is moving away
v = 330 m/s) from the source with the same velocity. Which of the
following statments are correct?
(a) 400.0 Hz to 484.0 Hz (b) 403.3 Hz to 480.0 Hz
(a) Average of frequencies recorded by A and B is equal
(c) 400.0 Hz to 480.0 Hz (d) 403.3 Hz to 484.0 Hz
to natural frequency of the source.
178. A car sounding its horn at 480 Hz moves towards a high
–1 (b) Wavelength of wave received by A is less than that of
wall at a speed of 20 m/s. If the speed of sound is 340 m/s ,
waves received by B.
the frequency of the reflected sound heard by the man
sitting in the car will be nearest to (c) Wavelength of waves received by two observers will
be same.
(a) 480 Hz (b) 510 Hz
(c) 540 Hz (d) 570 Hz (d) Both the observers will observe the wave travelling
with same speed.
Integer Type D
183. A body of mass 1kg falls from a height 25cm on to the pan L/4 L/4
of a spring balance. The masses of the pan and spring are L/2
negligible. The spring constant of the spring is 100N/m. A B
Having stuck to the pan the body starts performing
harmonic oscillations in the vertical direction. Find the
amplitude of oscillation (in cm). M M
188. Two narrow cylindrical pipes A and B have the same length.
Pipe A is open at both ends and is filled with a monoatomic
gas of molar mass MA. Pipe B is open at one end and
closed at the other end, and is filled with a diatomic gas of
molar mass MB. Both gases are at the same temperature. If
the frequency of the second harmonic of the fundamental
mode in pipe A is equal to the frequency of the third
184. A pendulum inside an elevator has a time period T1, when
harmonic of the fundamental mode in pipe B, determine
the elevator is at rest; 10s, when the elevator accelerates, –3
the value of MA/MB. (in 10 ).
up; 50 s, when the elevator accelerates down. Determine
T1 in seconds. 189. A “pop” gun consists of a tube 25 cm long closed at one
end by a cork and at the other end by a tighly fitted piston.
185. The cylinder body floats in water and has a mass of The piston is pushed slowly in. When the pressure rises
250kg with a low centre of mass to keep it stable in the to one and half times the atmospheric pressure, the cork is
upright position. Determine the natural frequency  of violently blown out. Calculate the frequency of the “pop”
the body. caused by its ejection. (v = 340 m/s)
ASSERTION AND REASON
(A) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true and reason
D=4m is the correct explanation of the assertion.
250 kg (B) If both ASSERTION and REASON are true but reason is
not the correct explanation of the assertion.
water
(C) If ASSERTION is true but REASON is false.
186. A uniform rod PQ of mass 0.1 kg and length 0.12 m can (D) If both ASSERTION and REASON are false.
swing in a vertical plane about A as a pendulum. A particle (E) If ASSERTION is false but REASON is true.
of mass 0.2 kg is attached to the rod at a distance x from
190. Assertion : All oscillatory motions are necessarily periodic
A. Find x such that the period of vibration is minimum.
motion but all periodic motion are not oscillatory.
A Reason : Simple pendulum is an example of oscillatory

P motion.
x=?
(a) A (b) B
(c) C
(d) D (e) E
Q 191. Assertion : When a simple pendulum is made to oscillate
on the surface of moon, its time period increases.
187. A string has a mass 10 g and a length L = 3 m. Its two ends
are tied to two walls at a distance D = 2 m apart. Two Reason : Moon is much smaller as compared to earth.
blocks of mass M = 2 kg each are suspended from the (a) A (b) B
string as shown in figure. In what time in ms will a wave (c) C (d) D
pulse sent from a point A, reach point B ? (e) E
192. Assertion : In extreme position of a particle executing 199. Assertion : Where two vibrating tuning forks having
S.H.M., both velocity and acceleration are zero. frequencies 256 Hz and 512 Hz are held near each other,
Reason : In S.H.M., acceleration always acts towards
beats cannot be heard.
mean position.
(a) A (b) B Reason : The principle of superposition is valid only if
(c) C (d) D the frequencies of the oscillators are nearly equal.
(e) E (a) A (b) B
193. Assertion : Soldiers are asked to break steps while (c) C
crossing the bridge. (d) D (e) E
Reason : The frequency of marching may be equal to the
natural frequency of bridge and may lead to resonance Match the Column
which can break the bridge.
200. Match the column correctly
(a) A (b) B
Column–I Column–II
(c) C (d) D
(e) E (a) The displcement of a (p) increase
194. Assertion : In simple harmonic motion the total energy is particle in simple
proportional to the square of the amplitude. harmonic motion in one
2
Reason : Total energy is given by 1/2 kA time period will
(a) A (b) B (b) The average in one time (q) decrease
(c) C (d) D period in a S.H.M. will
(e) E (c) A spring pendulum (r) zero
195. You are given an assertion and reason.
perform SHM with a
Assertion : Both transverse and longitudinal mechanical
waves can propagate in solids but only longitudinal frequency f. It is taken
mechanical waves can propagate in gases. in a lift slowly accelerating
Reason : Gases cannot withstand a shearing stress; hence upward, the frequency will
they have only bulk modulus. Choose the correct statement (d) A pendulum is suspended (s) remain constant
from the following. from the ceiling of the
(a) A (b) B compartment of a train.
(c) C (d) D When the train is stationary,
(e) E
the time period of the
196. Assertion : Compression and rarefaction involve changes
in density and pressure. pendulum is T. If the train
Reason : When particles are compressed, density of accelerates the time period
medium increases and when they are rarefied, density of of pendulum.
medium decreases. 201. Match the column
(a) A (b) B Column I Column II
(c) C (d) D (A) Wave in solids (P) Transverse only
(e) E (B) electromagnetic waves (Q) Can be transverse
197. Assertion : The phase difference between two medium
or longitudinal
particle having a path difference  is 2  . (C) Longitudinal waves (R) Require a medium
Reason : The phase difference is directly proportional to to propagate
path difference of a particle. (D) Pressure waves (S) Elastic parameters
(a) A (b) B dependent
(c) C (d) D 202. Match the column :
(e) E For the travelling wave
198. Assertion : Sound would travel faster on a hot summer y = 0.02 sin 2 (10t – 5x), (all in SI units)
day than on a cold winter day. Column I Column II
Reason : Velocity of sound is directly proportional to the (A) Speed of wave (P) 10
square of its absolute temperature. (B) Frequency of wave (Q) 0.4 
(a) A (b) B (C) Wavelength of wave (R) 2
(c) C (d) D (D) Maximum particle speed (S) 0.2
(e) E
Comprehension Type 208. What is the displacement of the particle of the string at x
= 50 cm at time t = 0.05 s?
Passage – 1 1
(a) cm
The spring shown in figure is unstretched when a man 2
start pulling the block. The mass of the block is M. If the
man exerts a constant force F. (b) 2cm
k F 3
(c) cm
2
2
203. The amplitude and time period of the motion of the block is (d) cm
3
F M F M 209. What is the velocity of this particle at this instant?
(a) , 2 (b) , 2
k k 2k 2k
(a) 10 2  cm/s
2F M
(c) , 2 (d) none of these (b) 40 2  cm/s
k 4k
204. The energy stored in spring when the block passes (c) 30 2  cm /s
through the equilibrium position is
(d) 20 2  cm /s
2F2 F2
(a) (b) Using the following Passage, solve Q. 210 to Q. 212
k k
Passage – 3
F2 F2 A train approaching a hill at a speed of 40 km/hr sounds a
(c) (d)
4k 2k whistle of frequency 580 Hz when it is at a distance of 1 km
205. The kinetic energy of the block at this position is (at from the hill. A wind with a speed of 40 km/hr is blowing in the
equilibrium position) direction of motion of train. Velocity of sound = 1200 km/hr.
210. Find the frequency of the whistle as heard by an observer
F2 F2 on the hill
(a) (b)
2k k (a) 599.33 Hz
(b) 590.33 Hz
2F2 F2
(c) (d) (c) 582.30 Hz
k 4k
(d) 370.22 Hz
Passage - 2 211. What is the distance from the hill at which the echo from
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 206 to Q. 209 the hill is heard by the driver ?
2
A long string having a cross-sectional area 0.80 mm
3
and density 12.5 g/cm is subjected to a tension of 64 N 15
(a) km
along the x-axis. One end (at x = 0) of this string is 16
attached to a vibrator moving in transverse direction at
a frequency of 20 Hz. At, t = 0, the source is at a maximum 20
(b) km
displacement y = 1.0 cm. 31
206. Find the speed of the wave travelling on the string.
17
(a) 20 m/s (b) 10 m/s (c) km
18
(c) 80 m/s (d) 40 m/s
207. Write the equation for the wave. 29
–1 –1 (d) km
(a) y = (1.0 cm) cos[(40 s )t – {(/2m )x}] 30
–1 –1
(b) y = (1.0 cm) cos[(40 s )t + {(/2m )x}] 212. What is the frequency heard by the driver ?
–1 –1
(c) y = (1.0 cm) cos[(40 s )t – {(/4m )x}] (a) 620 Hz (b) 630 Hz
–1 –1
(d) y = (1.0 cm) cos[(40 s )t + {(/4m )x}] (c) 650 Hz (d) 640 Hz

Passage – 4
RADAR is the acronym of radio detection and ranging. A
radar detects an enemy aircraft by the use of radio-waves
which are received after reflection. In analogy with plane
mirror reflection, one can take the reflected wave to be
coming from a virtual source. If the reflector is moving
with a speed u, the speed of source relative the receiver
can be 2u. Even when this kind of motion exist with the
source and to the receiver, Doppler’s effect can be applied.
According to Doppler’s effect as a source and an observer
are approaching each other, the apparent frequency f’, of
a signal of frequency f is,
 v  v0 
f 'f 
 v  vs 
Using the elaborated idea solve the following questions:
213. If an aircraft is approaching a given radar with a speed u,
the apparent frequency of f, received by the radar will be
[v – velocity of e.m. wave]
 v   v 
(a) f   (b) f  
vu vu
 v   v 
(c) f   (d) f  
vu  v  2u 
214. The apparent decrease in frequency, if the ari-craft moves
away is
2u u
(a) f (b) f
v v
u 2uf
(c) f (d)
2v v  2u
215. In a detective system, the apparent frequency found with
the source moving with a speed u = 0.8v is f1 and the
source being at rest and the RADAR moving with u = 0.9v
is f2, then
(a) f1 = f2 (b) f1 > f2
8
(c) f1 < f2 (d) f 2  f1
9

OSCILLATIONS 5. A simple pendulum has time period T1. The point of
Single Correct Options suspension is now moved upward according to the relation
y = kt2, (k = 1 m/s2) where y is the vertical displacement.
1. The period of oscillation of simple pendulum of length L T12
suspended from the roof of the vehicle which moves The time period now becomes T2. The ratio of is
T22
without friction, down an inclined plane of inclinations ,
is given by : (2000) (Take g = 10 m/s2) (2005)
(a) 6/5 (b)5/6
L L
(a) 2 (b) 2 (c) 1 (d) 4/5
g cos  g sin 
6. The x–t graph of a particle undergoing simple harmonic
L L motion is shown below. The acceleration of the particle at
(c) 2 (d) 2 t = 4/3 s is : (2009)
g g tan 
x
2. A particle executes simple harmonic motion between x = – A (cm)
and x = + A. The time taken for it to go from O to A/2 is t1 1
and to go from A/2 to A is t2, then : (2001)
(a) t1< t2 (b) t1> t2 0 t(s)
4 8 12
(c) t1= t2 (d) t1= 2t2
3. For a particle executing SHM the displacement x given by –1
x = A cos t. Identify the graph which represents the
variation of potential energy (PE) as a function of time t 3 2 2
(a)  cm s 2 (b) cm s2
and displacement x : (2003) 32 32
2 3 2
(c) cm s 2 (d)   cm s 2
32 32
7. A uniform rod of length l and mass M is pivoted at the
centre. Its two ends are attached to two springs of equal
(a) I, III (b) II, IV spring constant k. The springs are fixed to rigid supports
(c) II, III (d) I, IV as shown in the figure, and rod is free to oscillate in the
4. A block P of mass m is placed on a horizontal frictionless horizontal plane. The rod is gently pushed through a small
plane. A second block of same mass m is placed on it and angle  in one direction and released. The frequency of
is connected to a spring of spring constant k, the two oscillation is (2009)
blocks are pulled by a distance A. Block Q oscillates without
slipping. What is the maximum value of frictional force
between the two blocks ? (2004)
k
Q
1 2k 1 k
(a) (b)
P 2 M 2 M
1 6k 1 24k
(a) kA/2 (b) kA (c) (d)
2 M 2 M
(c) s mg (d) zero
8. The mass M shown in the figure oscillates in simple

harmonic motion with amplitude A. The amplitude of the Multiple Correct Option
point P is (2009) 12. Function x  A sin 2 t  Bcos 2 t  C sin t cos t
k1 k2
P represents SHM : (2006)
M
(a) for any value of A, B and C (except C = 0)
k1 A k2 A
(a) k (b) k (b) If A = –B, C = 2 B, amplitude = B 2
2 1
(c) If A = B; C = 0
k1 A k2A
(c) k  k (d) k  k (d) If A = B ; C = 2 B, amplitude = |B|
1 2 1 2
9. A wooden block performs SHM on frictionless surface 13. A metal rod of length L and mass m is pivoted at one end.
with frequency f0. The block carries a charge +Q on its A thin disk of mass M and radius R (< L) is attached at its
 centre of the free end of the rod. Consider two ways the
surface. If now a uniform electric field E is switched-on disc is attached. Case A – the disc is not free to rotate
as shown, then the SHM of the block will be (2011) about its centre and Case B – the disc is free to rotate
E about its centre. The rod-disc system performs SHM in
vertical plane after being released from the same displaced
+Q position. Which of the following statement(s) is/are true ?
(2011)
(a) of the same frequency and with shifted mean position

(b) of the same frequency and with the same mean position
(c) of changed frequency and with shifted mean position
(d) of changed frequency and with the same mean position
10. A point mass is subjected to two simultaneous
sinusoidal displacements in x–direction, x 1 (t) = A
 2 
sin t and x2 (t) = A sin  t   . Adding a third
 3  (a) Restoring torque in case A = Restoring torque in case
sinusoidal displacement x3(t) = B sin (t + ) brings the B
mass to a complete rest. The value of B and  are (2011) (b) Restoring torque in case A < Restoring torque in case
B
3 4
(a) 2 A, (b) A, (c) Angular frequency for case A > Angular frequency for
4 3
case B
5  (d) Angular frequency for case A < Angular frequency for
(c) 3A, (d) A,
6 3 case B
11. Two vehicles, each moving with speed u on the same 14. A horizontal stretched string, fixed at two ends, is vibrating
horizontal straight road, are approaching each other. Wind in its fifth harmonic according to the equation, (2013)
blows along the road with velocity w. One of these vehicles –1 –1
y (x, t) = (0.01m)[sin(62.8 m )x]cos[(628s )t].
blows a whistle of frequency f1. An observer in the other
vehicles hears the frequency of the whistle to be f2. The Assuming  = 3.14, the correct statement(s) is (are)
speed of sound in still air is v. The correct statement (s) is (a) the number of nodes is 5
(are) (2013) (b) the length of the string is 0.25 m
(a) If the wind blows from the observer to the source, f2 > f1
(c) the maximum displacement of the mid-point of the string
(b) If the wind blows from the source to the observer, f2 > f1
from its equilibrium position is 0.01 m
(c) If the wind blows from the observer to the source, f2 < f1
(d) If the wind blows from the source to the observer, f2 < f1 (d) the fundamental frequency is 100 Hz
15. A block with mass M is connected by a massless spring Integer Type

with stiffness constant k to a rigid wall and moves without
17. A mass m is undergoing SHM in the vertical direction
friction on a horizontal surface. The block oscillates with
about the mean position y0 with amplitude A and angular
small amplitude A about an equilibrium position x0.
frequency . At a distance y from the mean position, the
Consider two cases: (i) when the block is at x0; and (ii) mass detaches from the spring. Assume that the spring
when the block is at x = x0 + A . In both the cases, a particle contracts and does not obstruct the motion of m.
with mass m (< M) is softly placed on the block after
which they stick to each other. Which of the following Find the distance y* . (measured from the mean position)
statement(s) is(are) true about the motion after the mass such that the height h attained by the block is maximum.
m is placed on the mass M ? (2016)
 A2
g  (2005)
(a) The amplitude of oscillation in the first case changes
M
by a factor of , whereas in the second case it
mM
remains unchanged
(b) The final time period of oscillation in both the cases is
same
(c) The total energy decreases in both the cases 18. A 0.1 kg mass is suspended from a wire of negligible mass.
(d) The instantaneous speed at x0 of the combined masses The length of the wire is 1m and its cross-sectional area is
decreases in both the cases 4.9×10–7 m2. If the mass is pulled a little in the vertically
downward direction and released, it perform simple
16. Two independent harmonic oscillators of equal mass are harmonic motion of angular frequency 140 rad s–1. If the
oscillating about the origin with angular frequencies  Young’s modulus of the material of the wire is n×109 Nm–2
and  and have total energies E1 and E2, respectively, the value of n is (2010)
The variation of their momenta p with positions x are
MATCH THE COLUMN
a a
shown in the figures. If = n2 and = n, then the 19. Column–I describes some situation in which a small object
b R
moves. Column–II describes some characteristics of these
correct equation(s) is (are) (2015)
motions. Match the situations in Column–I with the
characteristic in Column–II. (2007)
Column-I Column-II
(a) The object moves on the x–axis (p)The object
executes under a conservative simple harmonic
force in such a way that its motion.
“speed” and “position” satisfy
(a) E11 = E22 v  c1 c2  x 2 ,where c1 and
 2 c2 are positive constants.

(b)   n
 (b) The object moves on the x–axis (q)The object does not
in such a way that its velocity change its direction
(c) 21 = n2
and its displacement from the
E1 E 2 origin satisfy v = –kx, where k
(d)   
 2
is a positive constant.
(c) The object is attached to one (r) The kinetic energy Compression Type
end of a mass–less spring of a of the object keeps
PASSAGE
given spring constant. The other on decreasing
end of the spring is attached to
the ceiling of an elevator. Initially When a particle of mass m moves on the x–axis in a potential
everything is at rest. The elevator of the form V(x) = kx2, it performs simple harmonic motion.
starts going upwards with a m
constant acceleration a. The motion The corresponding time period is proportional to , as
k
of the object is observed from the can be seen easily using dimensional analysis. However,
elevator during the period it the motion of a particle can be periodic even when its
maintains this acceleration. potential energy increases on both sides of x = 0 in a way
(d) The object is projected from the (s) The object can different from kx2 and its total energy is such that the
earth’s surface vertically upwards change its direction particle does not escape to infinity. Consider a particle
of mass m moving on the x–axis. Its potential energy is
GM e
2 , where Me is the mass only once. V(x) = x4 (a > 0) for |x| near the origin and becomes a
Re
constant equal to V0 for |x| > X0 (see figure) (2010)
of the earth and Re is the radius
of the earth. Neglect forces from
V(x)
objects other than the earth.
20. Column-I gives a list of possible set of parameters meased
V0
in some experiments. The variations of the parameters in
the form of graphs are shown in Column-II. Match the set
x
of parameters given in Column-I with the graphs given in X0
Column-II. Indicate your answer by darkening the
appropriate bubbles of the 4 × 4 matrix given in the ORS. 21. If the total energy of the particle is E, it will perform periodic
motion only if
Column-I Column-II
y (a) E < 0 (b) E > 0
(a) Potential energy of a simple pedulum (p)
(c) V0 > E > 0 (d) E > V0
(y-axis) as a function of displacement
22. For periodic motion of small amplitude A, the time period
(x-axis)
T of this particle is proportional to
(b) Displacement (y-axis) as a function (q) O y x
m 1 m
of time (x-axis) for a one dimensional (a) A (b)
 A 
motion at zero or constant accelera-
tion when the body is moving along  1 
(c) A (d)
O x m A m
the positive x-direction.
23. The acceleration of this particle for |x| > X0 is
(c) Range of a projectile (y-axis) as a (r) y
(a) proportional to V0
function of its velocity (x-axis)
V0
when projected at a fixed angle. (b) proportional to mX 0
O x
y
V0
(d) The square of the time period (s) (c) proportional to mX0
(y-axis) of a simple pendulum as a
(d) zero
function of its length (x-axis).
O x
WAVES 29. A sonometer wire resonates with a given tuning fork

forming standing waves with five antinodes between the
Single Correct Options two bridges when a mass of 9 kg is suspended from the
wire. When this mass is replaced by mass M. The wire
24. A train move towards a stationary observer with speed
resonates with the same tuning fork forming three
34m/s. The train sounds a whistle and its frequency
antinodes for the same positions of the bridges. The value
registered by the observers is f1. If the train’s speed is
of M is : (2002)
reduced to 17 m/s, the frequency registered is f2. If the
speed of sound is 340 m/s then the ratio f1/f2 is (2000) (a) 25 kg (b) 5 kg
(a) 18/19 (b) 1/2 (c) 12.5 kg (d) 1/25 kg
(c) 2 (d) 19/18 30. A police car moving at 22 m/s chases a motorcyclist. The
25. Two vibrating strings of the same material but of length police man sounds his horn at 176 Hz, while both of them
L and 2L have radii 2r and r respectively. They are move towards a stationary siren of frequency 165 Hz.
stretched under the same tension. Both the strings vibrate Calculate the speed of the motorcycle. If it is given that
in their fundamental modes. The one of Length L with the motorcyclist does not observe any beats (speed of
frequency f1 and the other with frequency f2. The ratio f1/ sound = 330 m/s) (2003)
f2 is given by (2000)
(a) 2 (b) 4
(c) 8 (d) 1
26. The ends of a stretched wire of length L are fixed at x = 0
and x = L. In one epxeriment the displacment of the wire is
 x 
y1  A sin   sin t and energy is E1 and in other
 L 
(a) 33 m/s (b) 22 m/s
 2x  (c) zero (d) 11 m/s
experiment its displacement is y 2  A sin   sin 2t
 L  31. In the experiment for the determination of the speed of
and energy is E2. Then (2001) sound in air using the resonance column method, the
(a) E2 = E1 (b) E2 = 2E1 length+ of the air column that resonates in the fundamental
(c) E2 = 4 E1 (d) E2 = 16 E1 mode, with a tuning fork is 0.1 m. When this length is
changed to 0.35 m, the same tuning fork resonates with
27. Two pulses in a stretched string, whose centres are initially
the first overtone. Calculate the end correction. (2003)
8 cm apart, are moving towards each other as shown in the
figure. The speed of each pulse is 2 cm/s. After 2 s the (a) 0.012 m (b) 0.025 m
total energy of the pulses will be (2001) (c) 0.05 m (d) 0.024 m
32. A source of sound of frequency 600 Hz is placed inside
water. The speed of sound in water is 1500 m/s and in air it
is 300 m/s. The frequency of sound recorded by an
observer who is standing in air is (2004)
(a) zero
(a) 200 Hz (b) 3000 Hz
(b) purely kinetic
(c) 120 Hz (d) 600 Hz
(c) purely potential
33. A closed organ pipe of length L and an open organ pipe
(d) partly kinetic and partly potential
contain gases of densities 1 and 2 respectively. The
28. A siren placed at a railway platform is emitting sound of
compressibility of gases are equal in both the pipes. Both
frequency 5 kHz. A passanger sitting in a moving train A
the pipes are vibrating in their first overtone with same
records a frequency of 5.5 kHz, while the train approaches
frequency. The length of the open organ pipe is (2004)
the siren. During his return journey in a different train B he
records a frequency of 6.0 kHz while approaching the same (a) L/3 (b) 4L/3
siren. The ratio of the velocity of train B to that of train A is
(a) 242/252 (b) 2 (2002) 4 L 1 4 L 2
(c) (d)
(c) 5/6 (d) 11/6 3 2 3 1
34. An open pipe is in resonance in 2nd harmonic with 38. A vibrating string of certain length l under a tension T
frequency f1. Now one end of the tube is closed and
resonates with a mode corresponding to the first overtone
frequency is increased to f2 such that the resonance again
occurs in nth harmonic. Choose the correct option.(2005) (third harmonic) of an air column of length 75 cm inside a
3 tube closed at one end. The string also generates 4 beats/s
(a) n  3, f 2  f1
4 when excited along with a tuning fork of frequency n.
5 Now when the tension of the string is slightly increased
(b) n  3, f 2  f1
4
the number of beats reduces to 2 per second. Assuming
5
(c) n  5, f 2  f1 the velocity of sound in air to be 340 m/s, the frequency n
4
3 of the tuning fork in Hz is : (2008)
(d) n  5, f 2  f1
4
(a) 344 (b) 336
35. A tuning fork of 512 Hz is used to produce resonance in a
resonance tube experiment. The level of water at first (c) 117.3 (d) 109.3
resonance is 30.7 cm and at second resonance is 63.2 cm.
39. A hollow pipe of length 0.8 m is closed at one end. At its open
The error in calculating velocity of sound is : (2005)
(a) 204.1 cm/s (b) 110 cm/s end a 0.5 m long uniform string is vibrating in its second
(c) 58 cm/s (d) 280 cm/s harmonic and it resonates with the fundamental frequency of
36. A massless rod BD is suspended by two identical massless the pipe. If the tension in the wire is 50 N and the speed of
strings AB and CD of equal lengths. A block of mass m is –1
sound is 320 ms , the mass of the string is : (2010)
suspended from point P such that BP is equal to x. If the
(a) 5 g (b) 10 g
fundamental frequency of the left wire is twice the fundamental
frequency of right wire, then the value of x is: (2006) (c) 20 g (d) 40 g
40. A police car with a siren of frequency 8 kHz is moving with

uniform velocity 36 km/h towards a tall building which
reflects the sound waves. The speed of sound in air is 320
m/s. The frequency of the siren heard by the car driver is
(a) l/5 (b) l/4
(a) 8.50 kHz (b) 8.25 kHz (2011)
(c) 4l/5 (d) 3l/4
37. A transverse sinusoidal wave moves along a string in the (a) 7.75 kHz (d) 7.50 kHz
positive x–direction at a speed of 10 cm/s. The wavelength of
the wave is 0.5 m and its amplitude is 10 cm. At a particular 41. A student is performing the experiment of resonance
time t, the snap-shot of the wave is shown in figure. The column. The diameter of the column tube is 4 cm. The
velocity of point P when its displacement is 5 cm is : (2008) frequency of the tuning fork is 512 Hz. The air temperature
is 38°C in which the speed of sound is 336 m/s. The zero of
the meter scale coincides with the top end of the resonance
column tube. When the first resonance occurs, the reading
of the water level in the column is (2012)
(a) 14.0 cm
3 3
(a) ĵm / s (b)  ĵm / s (b) 15.2 cm
50 50
(c) 16.4 cm
3 3
(c) î m / s (d)  î m / s
50 50 (d) 17.6 cm
42. A student is performing an experiment using a resonance

x0
column and a tuning fork of frequency 244s–1. He is told (c) When spring achieves an extension of for the
that the air in the tube has been replaced by another gas 2
(assume that the column remains filled with the gas). If the first time, the speed of the block connected to the spring
minimum height at which resonance occurs is (0.350 
0.005) m, the gas in the tube is M
is 3g
5k
(Useful information: 167 RT  640 j 1/2 mole -1/2;
(d) a2-a1=a1-a3
1/2 -1/2
140 RT  590 J mole . The molar masses M in grams Multiple Correct Options
10 44. A student performed the experiment to measure the speed
are given in the options. Take the values of for each
M of sound in air using resonance air-column method. Two
gas as given there.) (2014) resonances in the air-column were obtained by lowering
the water level. The resonance with the shorter air-column
10 7 is the first resonance and that with the longer air column
(a) Neon (M = 20,  )
20 10 is the second resonance. Then, (2009)
(a) the intensity of the sound heard at the first resonance
10 3
(b) Nitrogen (M = 28,  ) was more than that at the second resonance
28 5
(b) the prongs of the tuning fork were kept in a horizontal
10 9 plane above the resonance tube
(c) Oxygen (M = 32,  ) (c) the amplitude of vibration of the ends of the prongs is
32 16
typically around 1 cm
10 17 (d) the length of the air–column at the first resonance
(d) Argon (M = 36,  )
36 32 was somewhat shorter than l/4th of the wavelength of
43. A block of mass 2M is attached to a massless spring with the sound in air
spring-constant k. This block is connected to two other 45. A person blows into open-end of a long pipe. As a result,
blocks of masses M and 2M using two massless pulleys a high-pressure pulse of air travels down the pipe. When
and strings. The accelerations of the blocks are a1,a2, and this pulse reaches the other end of the pipe, (2012)
a3 as shown in the figure. The system is released from (a) a high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if
rest with spring in its unstretched state. The maximum the other end of the pipe is open.
extension of the spring is x0. Which of the following (b) a low-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if the
option(s) is/are correct? [g is the acceleration due to other end of the pipe is open
gravity. Neglect friction] (2019) (c) a low-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if the
other end of the pipe is closed
(d) a high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if
the other end of the pipe is closed.
46. A particle of mass m is attached to one end of a mass-less
spring of force constant k, lying on a frictionless horizontal
plane. The other end of the spring is fixed. The particle
starts moving horizontally from its equilibrium position at
time t = 0 with an initial velocity u0. When the speed of the
particle is 0.5 u0, it collides elastically with a rigid wall.
After this collision (2013)
x0 (a) the speed of the particle when it returns to its
(a) At an extension of of the spring, the magnitude of equilibrium position is u0
4
3g (b) the time at which the particle passes through the
acceleration of the block connected to the spring is
10 m
4Mg equilibrium position for the first time is t  
(b) x 0  k
k
(c) the time at which the maximum compression of the (a) The plot below represents schematically the variation
of beat frequency with time
4 m
spring occurs is t 
3 k
(d) the time at which the particle passes through the
5 m
equilibrium position for the second time is t 
3 k
47. One end of a taut string of length 3 m along the x axis is
fixed at x = 0. The speed of the waves in the string is 100
ms-1. The other end of the string is vibrating in the y (b) The plot below represents schematically the variation
direction so that stationary waves are set up in the string. of beat frequency with time
The possible waveform(s) of these stationary waves
is(are) (2014)
x 50 t
(a) y (t) = A sin cos
6 3
x 100t
(b) y (t) = A sin cos
3 3
5x 250t (c) The rate of change in beat frequency is maximum when
(c) y (t) = A sin cos
6 3 the car passes through Q
(d) fP + fR = 2 fQ
5x
(d) y (t) = A sin cos 250t
2 Integer Type
48. A container of fixed volume has a mixture of one mole of
hydrogen and one mole of helium in equilibrium at 50. A 20 cm long string, having a mass of 1.0 g, is fixed at both
temperature T. Assuming the gases are ideal, the correct the ends. The tension in the string is 0.5 N. The string is
statement(s) is (are) (2015) set into vibration using an external vibrator of frequency
(a) The average energy per mole of the gas mixture is 2RT 100 Hz. Find the separation (in cm) between the successive
(b) The ratio of speed of sound in the gas mixture to that nodes on the string. (2009)
in helium gas is 6/5 51. A stationary source is emitting sound at a fixed frequency
(c) The ratio of the rms speed of helium atoms to that of f0, which is reflected by two cars approaching the source.
1 The difference between the frequencies of sound reflected
hydrogen molecules is from the cars is 1.2% of f0. What is the difference in the
2
speeds of the cars (in km per hour) to the nearest integer ?
(d) The ratio of the rms speed of helium atoms to that of
The cars are moving at constant speeds much smaller than
–1
1 the speed of sound which is 330 ms .
hydrogen molecules is
2 52. When two progressive waves y1 = 4 sin (2x – 6t) and
49. Two loudspeakers M and N are located 20 m apart and
emit sound at frequencies 118 Hz and 121 Hz, respectively.  
y2 = 3 sin  2x  6t   are superimposed, the amplitude
A car is initially at a point P , 1800 m away from the midpoint  2
Q of the line MN and moves towards Q constantly at 60 of the resultant wave is (2010)
km/hr along the perpendicular bisector of MN. It crosses
Q and eventually reaches a point R, 1800 m away from Q. 53. Four harmonic waves of equal frequencies and equal
Let v(t) represent the beat frequency measured by a  
person sitting in the car at time t. Let fP, fQ and fR be the intensities I0 have phases angles  and . When
 
beat frequencies measured at locations P, Q and R,
respectively. The speed of sound in air is 330 ms–1. Which they are superposed, the intensity of the resulting wave
of the following statement(s) is(are) true regarding the is nI0.The value of n is. (2015)
sound heard by the person?
(2016)
54. Two men are walking along a horizontal straight line in (C) Stretched wire clamped at (r) f = L
the same direction. The man in front walks at a speed 1.0 both ends
ms-1 and the man behind walks at a speed 2.0 ms-1. A third
man is standing at a height 12 m above the same horizontal O L
line such that all three men are in a vertical plane. The two
(D) Strentched wire clamped at (s) f = 2L
walking men are blowing identical whistles which emit a
both ends and at mid-point
sound of frequency 1430 Hz. The speed of sound in air is
330 ms-1. At the instant, when the moving men are 10 m
apart, the stationary man is equidistant from them. The O L
frequency of beats in Hz, heard by the stationary man at L/2
this instant, is _______. (2018) (t) f = 4L
55. A train S1, moving with a uniform velocity of 108 km/h, 57. A musical instrument is made using four different metal
approaches another train S2 standing on a platform. An strings 1, 2, 3 and 4 with mass per unit length , 2, 3 and
observer O moves with a uniform velocity of 36 km/h 4 respectively. The instrument is played by vibrating
towards S2, as shown in figure. Both the trains are blowing the strings by varying the free length in between the range
whistles of same frequency 120 Hz. When O is 600 m L0 and 2L0. It is found that in string-1() at free length L0
away from S2 and distance between S1 and S2 is 800 m, and tension T0 the fundamental mode frequency is f0.
the number of beats heard by O is ______ . (Speed of the List-I List-II
sound = 330 (2019) (I) String-1() (P) 1
(II) String-2() (Q) 1 2
1
(III) String-2() (R)
2
1
(IV) String-4() (S)
3
(T) 3/16
(U) 1/16
If the tension in each string is T0, the correct match for
the highest fundamental frequency in f0 units will be :
Match the Column (2019)
(a) I  P, II  Q, III  T, IV  S
56. Column-I show four systems, each of the same length L,
for producing standing waves. The lowest possible natural (b) I  P, II  R, III  S, IV  Q
frequency of a system is called its fundamental frequency, (c) I  Q, II  S, III  R, IV  P
whose wavelength is denoted as f. Match each system (d) I  Q, II  P, III  R, IV  T
with statements given in Column-II describing the nature 58. A musical instrument is made using four different metal
and wavelength of the standing waves. (2011) strings 1, 2, 3 and 4 with mass per unit length , 2, 3 and
Column-I 4 respectively. The instrument is played by vibrating
Column-II the strings by varying the free length in between the range
L0 and 2L0. It is found that in string-1() at free length L0
(A) Pipe closed at one end (p) Longitudinal waves and tension T0 the fundamental mode frequency is f0.
(2019)
List-I List-II
O L (I) String-1() (P) 1
(B) Pipe open at both ends (q) Transverse waves (II) String-2() (Q) 1 2
1
(III) String-2() (R)
2
O L
1 Assume that the sound of the whistle is composed of

(IV) String-4() (S) components varying in frequency from f1 = 800 Hz to
3
f2 = 1120 Hz, as shown in the figure. The spread in the
(T) 3/16 frequency (highest frequency–lowest frequency) is thus
(U) 1/16 320 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s.
The length of the strings 1, 2, 3 and 4 are kept fixed at L0, 62. The speed of sound of the whistle is (2007)
3L0 5L0 7L (a) 340 m/s for passengers in A and 310 m/s for passengers in B
, and 0 , respectively. Strings 1, 2, 3 and 4 are
2 4 4 (b) 360 m/s for passengers in A and 310 m/s for passengers in B
vibrated at their
(c) 310 m/s for passengers in A and 360 m/s for passengers in B
1st, 3rd, 5th and 14th harmonics, respectively such that all
the strings have same frequency. The correct match for (d) 340 m/s for passengers in both the trains
the tension in the four strings in the units of T0 will be : 63. The distribution of the sound intensity of the whistle as
(a) I  P, II  R, III  T, IV  U observed by the passengers in train A is best represented
(b) I  P, II  Q, III  R, IV  T by (2007)
(c) I  P, II  Q, III  T, IV  U
(d) I  T, II  Q, III  R, IV  U
Comprehension Type
(a)
Passage - I
Two plane harmonic sound waves are expressed by the f1 f2 Frequency
equations.
y1 (x, t) = A cos (0.5 x – 100 t)
y2 (x, t) = A cos (0.46 x – 92 t)
(All parameters are in MKS)
59. How many times does an observer hear maximum intensity
(b)
in one second ? (2006)
(a) 4 (b) 10 f1 f2 Frequency
(c) 6 (d) 8
60. What is the speed of the sound ? (2006)
(a) 200 m/s (b) 180 m/s
(c) 192 m/s (d) 96 m/s
61. At x = 0 how many times the amplitude of y1 + y2 is zero in (c)
one second ? (2006)
(a) 192 (b) 48 f1 f2 Frequency
(c) 100 (d) 96
Passage - II
Two trains A and B are moving with speeds 20 m/s and 30
m/s respectively in the same direction on the same straight
track, with B ahead of A. The engines are at the front ends.
The engine of train A blows a long whistle. (d)
f1 f2 Frequency
64. The spread of frequency as observed by the passengers

in train B is
(a) 310 Hz (b) 330 Hz
f1 f2 Frequency
(c) 350 Hz (d) 290 Hz
Subjective 68. In a resonance tube experiment to determine the speed of

sound in air, a pipe of diameter 5 cm is used. The air column
65. A 3.6 m long pipe resonates with a source of frequency
in pipe resonates with a tuning fork of frequency 480 Hz
212.5 Hz when water level is at certain heights in the pipe.
when the minimum length of the air column is 16 cm. Find
Find the heights of water level (from the bottom of the
the speed of sound in air at room temperature. (2003)
pipe) at which resonances occur. Neglect end correction.
69. A string of mass per unit length  is clamped at both ends
Now the pipe is filled to a height H (  3.6m). A small hole
such that one end of the string is at x = 0 and the other is
is drilled very close to its bottom and water is allowed to
at x = l. When string vibrates in fundamental mode
leak. Obtain an expression for the rate of fall of water level amplitude of the mid-point O of the string is a, and tension
in the pipe as a function of H. If the radii of the pipe and in the string is T. Find the total oscillation energy stored
the hole are 2 × 10–2 m and l × 10–3 m respectively. Calculate in the string. (2003)
the time interval between the occurrence of first two 70. An observer standing on a railway crossing receives
resonances. Speed of sound in air is 340 m/s and g = 10m/s2. frequency of 2.2 kHz and 1.8 kHz when the train
(2000) approaches and recedes from the observer. Find the
66. A boat is travelling in a river with a speed 10 m/s along the velocity of the train.
stream flowing with a speed 2 m/s. From this boat a sound (The speed of the sound in air is 300 m/s.) (2005)
transmitter is lowered into the river through a rigid support. 71. A harmonically moving transverse wave on a string has a
The wavelength of the sound emitted from the transmitter maximum particle velocity and acceleration of 3 m/s and 90
2
inside the water is 14.45 mm. Assume that attenuation of m/s respectively. Velocity of the wave is 20 m/s. Find the
sound in water and air is negligible. (2001) waveform. (2005)
(a) What will be the frequency detected by a receiver Fill in the blanks
kept inside the river downstream? 72. A stationary tuning fork is in resonance with an air column
(b) The transmitter and the receiver are now pulled up into in a pipe. If the tuning fork is moved with a speed of 2 ms–
1
air. The air is blowing with a speed 5 m/s in the direction in front of the open end of the pipe and parallel to it, the
length of the pipe should be changed for the resonance
opposite to the river stream. Determine the frequency of
to occur with the moving tuning fork. If the speed of
the sound detected by the receiver. (Temperature of the air sound in air is 320 ms –1, the smallest value of the
and water =20° C ; Density of river water = 103 kg/m3 ; Bulk percentage change required in the length of the pipe is
modulus of the water =2.088 × 109 Pa ; Gas constant R = ………… . -
(2020)
8.31 J/mol-K ; Mean molecular mass of air = 28.8 × 10–3 kg/
mol; Cp/CV for air = 1.4)
67. Two narrow cylindrical pipes A and B have the same
length. Pipe A is open at both ends and is filled with a
monoatomic gas of molar mass MA. Pipe B is open at one
end and closed at the other end, and is filled with a
diatomic gas of molar mass MB. Both gases are at the
same temperature. (2002)
(a) If the frequency to the second harmonic of pipe A is
equal to the frequency of the third harmonic of the
fundamental mode in pipe B, determine the value of MA/
MB.
(b) Now the open end of the pipe B is closed (so that the
pipe is closed at both ends). Find the ratio of the
fundamental frequency in pipe A to that in pipe B.
OSCILLATION & WAVES

157
Answer Key
CHAPTER -1 FLUID MECHANICS
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (a) 1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (c)

5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (b) 5. (a) 6. (d) 7. (a) 8. (c)
9. (b) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (b) 9. (c) 10. (d) 11. (c) 12. (c)
13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (a)
13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (d)
17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (b) 20. (a)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23.(c) 24. (a) 17. (c) 18. (748.00) 19. (b) 20. (a)
25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (d) 21. (b) 22. (a) 23.(b) 24. (5.00)
29. (a) 30. (c) 31. (a) 32. (c) 25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (c)
33. (d) 34. (a) 35.(b) 36. (d) 29. (d) 30. (101.00) 31. (d) 32. (3)
37. (b) 38. (c) 39. (a) 40. (c)
33. (b) 34. (a) 35.(b) 36. (b)
41. (d) 42. (a) 43. (c) 44. (c)
45. (d) 46. (c) 47. (b) 48. (c) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (c) 40. (a)
49. (d) 50. (c) 51. (b) 52. (c) 41. (d)
53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (b) 56. (c)
57. (d) 58. (b) 59. (c) 60. (a)
61. (a) 62. (c) 63. (a) 64. (b)
65. (c) 66. (a) 67. (b) 68. (a)
69. (a) 70. (d) 71. (c) 72. (c)
73. (d) 74. (c) 75. (c) 76. (b)
77. (b) 78. (d) 79. (c) 80. (c)
81. (c) 82. (a) 83. (a) 84. (c)
85. (d) 86. (b) 87. (d) 88. (a)
89. (b) 90. (b) 91. (a) 92. (d)
93. (d) 94. (a) 95. (a) 96. (b)
97. (a) 98. (a) 99. (c) 100. (c)
101. (b) 102. (b) 103. (c) 104. (c)
105. (b) 106. (b) 107. (b) 108. (c)
109. (d) 110. (d) 111. (b) 112. (b)
ANSWER KEY 158
EXERCISE - 3 : EXERCISE - 4 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (a) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (b)
1. (d)
5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (c)
2. (d)
9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (b)
3. (a) zero (b) 0.25 cm (c) g/6)
13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (c)
4. (a) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (b, c)
17. (d) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (d) 8. (a, d) 9. (a, c) 10. (a, c, d) 11. (0015)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23.(d) 24. (b) 12. (0006) 13. (0006) 14. (0003) 15. (a, d)
25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (d) 28. (b)
16. (009.00) 17. (004.00) 18. (a) 19. (c)
29. (a) 30. (b) 31. (a) 32. (b)
20. (c) 21. (a) 22. (a) 23.(c)
33. (d) 34. (c) 35.(a) 36. (a)
24. (a) 25. (b) 26. (c) 27. (a)
37. (b) 38. (c) 39. (c) 40. (c)
28. ((ga/2y))
41. (a, b, d) 42. (a, b, c, d) 43. (a) 44. (b, c)
29. (2m)
45. (b) 46. (a, b, c) 47. (a, c, d) 48. (b)
49. (b, c) 50. (b, d) 51. (b, d) 52. (a, c) dR
53. (a, b) 54. (c) 55. (a, b, c) 56. (0050) 30.  r5
dt
57. (a) 58. (0025) 59. (a, d)
60. (1.01×10 ) 61. (c)
5
62. (d) 63. (c)  2 L2
64. (a) 65. (b) 66. (d) 67. (b) 31. ( H  )
2g
68. (AR); (B  Q);(C  P);(D  S)
32. (1.01 × 10 Pa)
5
69. (d) 70. (c) 71. (b) 72. (b)
73. (a) 74. (a) 75. (d) 76. (a)
77. (b) 78. (a) 79. (b) 80. (c)
81. (a) 82. (c) 83. (a) 84. (d)
85. (b) 86. (a)
159
Answer Key
CHAPTER -2 ELASTICITY
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (c) 1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (b)

5. (d) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (a) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (a)
9. (d) 10. (c) 11. (a) 12. (c) 9. (a) 10. (a) 11. (c) 12. (c)
13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (c) 13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (a) 16. (a)
17. (b) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (a)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23.(d) 24. (a)
25. (d) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (d)
29. (d) 30. (d) 31. (a) 32. (c)
33. (b) 34. (a) 35.(d) 36. (b)
ANSWER KEY 160
EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS EXERCISE - 4: PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (b) 1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (c)

5. (c) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (d) 5. (a, b) 6. (2.00) 7. (000.23 to 000.24)
9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (a, c, d) 8. (1.09 × 10 N/M )
10 2
13. (a, b, c) 14. (a, d) 15. (a, b, d) 16. (a, 2)

17. (a, d) 18. (2) 19. (a) 20. (a)
21. (A  Q,S);(B  P, R);(C  P, Q, R,S);(D  P, Q, R,S)
22. (a) 23.(a) 24. (b) 25. (a)

26. (b) 27. (d) 28. (a, c) 29. (b)
ANSWER KEY 161
Answer Key
CHAPTER -3 OSCILLATION AND WAVES
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (d) 1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (a)

5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (a)
5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (d)
9. (b) 10. (a) 11. (d) 12. (c)
9. (a) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (d)
13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (d) 16. (d)
17. (d) 18. (a) 19. (b) 20. (b) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (a) 16. (c)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23.(c) 24. (d) 17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (c)
25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (b) 21. (d) 22. (d) 23.(a) 24. (a)
29. (d) 30. (c) 31. (c) 32. (d)
25. (d) 26. (d) 27. (c) 28. (d)
33. (c) 34. (c) 35.(d) 36. (a)
37. (c) 38. (a) 39. (c) 40. (b) 29. (d) 30. (d) 31. (b) 32. (c)
41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (d) 44. (c) 33. (b) 34. (c) 35.(c) 36. (d)
45. (d) 46. (a) 47. (d) 48. (b) 37. (b) 38. (a) 39. (d) 40. (a)
49. (b) 50. (a) 51. (c) 52. (b) 41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (a) 44. (a)
53. (d) 54. (a) 55. (b) 56. (b)
45. (b) 46. (b) 47. (c) 48. (a)
57. (a) 58. (c) 59. (a) 60. (c)
49. (b) 50. (502.00) 51. (b) 52. (a)
61. (a) 62. (a) 63. (a) 64. (a)
65. (a) 66. (c) 67. (a) 68. (d) 53. (b) 54. (a) 55. (20.00) 56. (12.50)
69. (b) 70. (a) 71. (a) 72. (a) 57. (a) 58. (a) 59. (a)
73. (b) 74. (b) 75. (a) 76. (d) 60. (035.00) 61. (a) 62. (d) 63. (b)
77. (a) 78. (a) 79. (c) 80. (b)
64. (d) 65. (a) 66. (c) 67. (a)
81. (c) 82. (b) 83. (d) 84. (a)
85. (b) 86. (c) 87. (b) 88. (b) 68. (a) 69. (106.05) 70. (d) 71. (a)
89. (b) 90. (b) 91. (b) 92. (c) 72. (d) 73. (c)
93. (a) 94. (c) 95. (c) 96. (c)
97. (c) 98. (c) 99. (b) 100. (d)
101. (a) 102. (d) 103. (b) 104. (b)
105. (b) 106. (d) 106. (b) 107. (b)
108. (b) 109. (d) 110. (d) 111. (c)
112. (c) 113. (d)
ANSWER KEY 162
EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

115. (d) 116. (c) 117. (c) 118. (d)
119. (a) 120. (a) 121. (c) 122. (b)
123. (c) 124. (d) 125. (a) 126. (a)
127. (a) 128. (c) 129. (a) 130. (b)
131. (d) 132. (a) 133. (d) 134. (b)
135. (d) 136. (b) 137. (d) 138. (c)
139. (c) 140. (c) 141. (d) 142. (d)
143. (b) 144. (b) 145. (a) 146. (d)
147. (b) 148. (d) 149. (a) 150. (b)
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. 151. (b) 152. (d) 153. (a) 154. (b)
155. (c) 156. (b) 157. (b) 158. (a)
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (a)
159. (a) 160. (a) 161. (b) 162. (d)
5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (d)
163. (a) 164. (a) 165. (b) 166. (b)
9. (b) 10. (d) 11. (b) 12. (a)
167. (c) 168. (b) 169. (c) 170. (b)
13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (c) 171. (a) 172. (c) 173. (d) 174. (b)
17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (a) 175. (b) 176. (b) 177. (d) 178. (c)
21. (a) 22. (c) 23.(c) 24. (c) 179. (c, d) 180. (a, b, d) 181. (a, b, c, d) 182. (a, c)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (b) 183. (0034) 184. (0014) 185. (0022) 186. (0003)
29. (a) 30. (d) 31. (b) 32. (c) 187. (98) 188. (6349) 189. (510) 190. (b)
33. (a) 34. (a) 35.(c) 36. (b) 191. (b) 192. (c) 193. (a) 194. (a)
37. (a) 38. (d) 39. (d) 40. (d) 195. (a) 196. (a) 197. (b) 198. (c)
41. (d) 42. (b) 43. (b) 44. (a) 199. (c) 200. (a - r, s; b - r, s; c- s; d - q)
45. (b) 46. (b) 47. (a) 48. (b) 201. (a - q; b - p; c - r, s; d - r)
49. (a) 50. (c) 51. (c) 52. (b) 202. (a - r; b - p; c- s; d - q) 203. (a) 204. (d)
53. (a) 54. (a) 55. (c) 56. (b) 205. (a) 206. (c) 207. (a) 208. (a)
57. (b) 58. (c) 59. (b) 60. (d) 209. (d) 210. (a) 211. (d) 212. (a)
61. (b) 62. (a) 63. (d) 64. (c) 213. (d) 214. (a) 215. (c)
65. (a) 66. (c) 67. (d) 68. (a)
69. (c) 70. (b) 71. (c) 72. (d)
73. (d) 74. (d) 75. (d) 76. (d)
77. (a, c) 78. (a, c) 79. (b, c) 80. (a, b, d)
81. (b, c, d) 82. (c) 83. (d) 84. (b)
85. (a) 86. (b) 87. (b) 88. (c)
89. (b) 90. (b) 91. (c) 92. (c)
93. (c) 94. (d) 95. (a - p; b - s; c - r; d - q)
96. (a - q; b - s; c - p; d - r) 97. (d) 98. (a)
99. (a) 100. (d) 101. (b) 102. (b)
103. (d) 104. (d) 105. (a) 106. (b)
107. (c) 108. (c) 109. (b) 110. (b)
111. (c) 112. (d) 113. (d) 114. (b)
ANSWER KEY 163
EXERCISE - 4: PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

2 a 2 T
69. ( )
4
70. (uT = 30 m/s)

71. (y = (0.1 m) sin [(30 rad/s) t ± (1.5 m–1) x + ])
72. (000.62 to 000.63)
DIRECTION TO USE -
1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (a)

5. (a) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (d)
9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (a, b) 12. (b, d)
13. (a, d) 14. (b, c) 15. (a, b, d) 16. (b, d)
17. (0)
18. (4)
19. (a – p); (b – q, r); (c – p); (d – q, s)
20. (a  p or p, s); (b  q, s or q, r, s) (c  s); (d  q)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23.(d) 24. (d)
25. (d) 26. (c) 27. (b) 28. (b)
29. (a) 30. (b) 31. (b) 32. (d)
33. (c) 34. (c) 35.(d) 36. (a)
37. (b) 38. (a) 39. (b) 40. (a)
41. (b) 42. (d) 43. (d) 44. (a, d)
45. (b, d) 46. (a, d) 47. (a, c, d) 48. (a, b, d)
49. (a, b, c) 50. (0005) 51. (0007) 52. (0005)
53. (0003) 54. (0005) 55. (8.13)
56. (A – p, t; B – p, s; C – q, s; D – q, r)
57. (b) 58. (c) 59. (a) 60. (a)
61. (c) 62. (b) 63. (a) 64. (a)
dH
65. (3.2 m, 2.4 m, 1.6 m, 0.8 m,  
 1.11  10 2  H , 43 s )
dt
66. (a) 1.0069 × 105 Hz (b) 1.0304 × 105 Hz)
400 3
67. (a) (b)
189 4
68. (336 m/s)

Note

JEE MODULE 3 PHY Waves and Mechanical Properties of Solids and Fluids

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

JEE MODULE 3 PHY Waves and Mechanical Properties of Solids and Fluids

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2

Key Points on ‘How to obtain optimal benefits from ‘Tatva’ ?

I wish you all the best.

Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing

Teachers SME DTP

Suraj Bhan Singh

Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 14

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 22

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 32

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 37

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 48

Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 157

Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 59

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 65

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 69

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 71

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 75

Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 159

Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 90

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 104

Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 115

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 123

Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 145

Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 161

FLUID MECHANICS THEORY

Pressure p at any point is defined as the normal force per

2 1.1.2 Atmospheric Pressure

1.1.3 Pascal’s Law

p2 – p1 = gh, where  is the density of liquid.

According to principle of hydraulics, A1

 When a body is partially or fully dipped into a fluid, the

 Steady Flow (Stream Line Flow)

1.2.1 Equation of Continuity

In a time t, the volume of liquid entering the tube of flow

a2 2 Viscous force is given by :

1.3.1 Stoke’s Law

 When a solid moves through a viscous medium, its motion

1.3.2 Terminal Velocity

1.3.3 Poiseuille’s Formula 1.4.1 Surface Energy

Volume of liquid coming out of tube per second in given by

1.3.4 Reynold Number W = SA, where A = increase in surface area.

 Capillary rise in a tube of insufficient length : hr

Adhesion > Cohesion Adhesion = Cohesion Adhesion < Cohesion

i.e. P  P0  2T . above it, i.e. P = P0. i.e., P  P0  2T .

F = P × A2 = 2 h g A2 or F1  r 2 F2  (10 / 100) 2  1350  9.8  3307 N

(c) Since the liquid exerts equal pressure in all directions, so

submarine at this depth, the interior of which is maintained

Sol. Here, M 38.25 3 3

(b) Area of rectangle = 20 × 13 = 260 sq. cm.

Sol. Here, r = 30.0 mm = 3 cm ; F = 3.03 gf = 3.03 × 980 dyne. Since

Example - 21 of a large iron ship, the weight of water displaced by the

If you are interested in aerospace engineering, you need to

master this chapter. If you want to become a hematologist,

you still need to master this chapter

"Samajh ayega to mazaa ayega,

Mazaa ayega to samajh ayega".

Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing

EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

(a) p1 > p0 (b) p > p0

These figures indicate, respectively, that the vessel is:

17. The minimum horizontal acceleration of the container so Pascals Law

(a) hg (b) lg

(c) l decreases and h increases Continuity Equation, Bernoulli’s